TGM - Comman Municipal Sold Waste Management - 160910 - NK PDF

FOR
COMMON MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTE

MANAGEMENT FACILITIES
Prepared for
Government of India
Project Coordination Dr. Nalini Bhat
Ministry of Environment & Forests Advisor, Ministry of Environment and Forests
Dr. T. Chandni
Director, Ministry of Environment and Forests
Core Project Coordination Team Mr. Mahesh Babu

IL&FS Environment CEO
Mr. N. Sateesh Babu
Vice President & Project Director
Dr. N.B. Mazumdar
MSW Expert
Mr. B.S.V. Pavan Gopal
Manager –Technical
Ms. Chaitanya Vangeti
Assistant Manager –Technical
Ms. Suman Benedicta Thomas
Technical Writer
Expert Core & Peer Committee

Chairman Dr. V. Rajagopalan, IAS
Additional Secretary
Ministry of Chemicals & Fertilizers
Core Members Dr. R. K. Garg
Former Chairman, EIA Committee, Ministry of Environment and
Forests
Mr. Paritosh C. Tyagi
Former Chairman, Central Pollution Control Board
Prof. S.P. Gautam
Chairman, Central Pollution Control Board
Dr. Tapan Chakraborti
Director, National Environmental Engineering Research Institute
Mr. K. P. Nyati
Former Head, Environmental Policy, Confederation of Indian Industry
Dr. G.K. Pandey
Former Advisor, Ministry of Environment and Forests
Dr. Nalini Bhat
Advisor, Ministry of Environment and Forests
Dr. G.V. Subramaniam
Advisor, Ministry of Environment and Forests
Dr. B. Sengupta
Former Member Secretary, Central Pollution Control Board
Dr. R. C. Trivedi
Former Scientist, Central Pollution Control Board
Peer Member Mr. P. U. Asnani
Municipal Solid Waste Management Expert
Dr. Bindu Madav Uppaluri
Municipal Solid Waste Management Expert
Member Convener Mr. N. Sateesh Babu
Project Director
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION TO THE TECHNICAL EIA GUIDANCE MANUALS PROJECT 1-1

1.1 Purpose ................................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.2 Project Implementation ....................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3 Additional Information........................................................................................................ 1-4
2. CONCEPTUAL FACETS OF EIA 2-1
2.1 Environment in EIA Context............................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Objectives of EIA................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.3 Types of EIA ....................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4 Basic EIA Principles ........................................................................................................... 2-3
2.5 Project Cycle ....................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.6 Environmental Impacts ....................................................................................................... 2-5
2.6.1 Direct impacts...................................................................................................... 2-6
2.6.2 Indirect impacts ................................................................................................... 2-6
2.6.3 Cumulative impacts ............................................................................................. 2-6
2.6.4 Induced impacts................................................................................................... 2-7
2.7 Significance of Impacts ....................................................................................................... 2-7
2.7.1 Criteria/methodology to determine the significance of the identified impacts.... 2-8
3. ABOUT COMMON (CENTRALIZED) MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT
FACILITY INCLUDING BEST PRACTICES AND POLLUTION CONTROL
TECHNOLOGIES 3-1
3.1 Introduction to the Municipal Solid Waste Management.................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Solid waste management in Indian scenario........................................................ 3-2
3.1.2 MSW – A growing challenge .............................................................................. 3-3
3.2 Elements of MSW Management ......................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.1 Waste generation ................................................................................................. 3-5
3.2.2 Waste handling, sorting, storage, and processing at the source........................... 3-8
3.2.3 Collection and storage of MSW .......................................................................... 3-8
3.2.4 Sorting, processing and transformation of solid waste ...................................... 3-10
3.2.5 Transfer and transport........................................................................................ 3-10
3.2.6 Disposal ............................................................................................................. 3-11
3.3 Technological Aspects ...................................................................................................... 3-11
3.3.1 Landfill .............................................................................................................. 3-12
3.3.2 Composting........................................................................................................ 3-18
3.3.3 Biomethanation / anaerobic digestion ............................................................... 3-26
3.3.4 Pelletization and refuse derived fuel.................................................................. 3-27
3.3.5 Incineration........................................................................................................ 3-28
3.3.6 Pyrolysis and Gasification ................................................................................. 3-29
3.3.7 Recycling/reuse ................................................................................................. 3-30
3.3.8 Comparative analysis of technologies ............................................................... 3-30
3.4 Major Concerns and Exposure Pathways.......................................................................... 3-41
Technical EIA Guidance Manual for CMSWMF September 2010

i
Table of Contents
3.4.1 Major concerns .................................................................................................. 3-41

3.4.2 Exposure pathways ............................................................................................ 3-43
3.5 Financial Aspects of Solid Waste Management................................................................ 3-43
3.5.1 Investments or operating costs........................................................................... 3-44
3.5.2 Revenue generation ........................................................................................... 3-45
3.6 Summary of Applicable National Regulations.................................................................. 3-49
3.6.1 General description of major statutes ................................................................ 3-49
3.6.2 General standards for discharge of environmental pollutants ........................... 3-49
3.6.3 Requirements for common MSW management facilities.................................. 3-49
3.6.4 FCO Standards for compost quality .................................................................. 3-50
4. OPERATIONAL ASPECTS OF EIA 4-1
4.1 Coverage of Common MSW Management Facility under the Purview of Notification ..... 4-1
4.2 Screening............................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.2.1 Applicable conditions for Category B projects.................................................... 4-4
4.2.2 Criteria for classification of Category B1 and B2 projects.................................. 4-4
4.2.3 Application for prior environmental clearance.................................................... 4-5
4.2.4 Siting guidelines .................................................................................................. 4-5
4.3 Scoping for EIA Studies...................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.1 Pre-feasibility report ............................................................................................ 4-7
4.3.2 Guidance for providing information in Form 1 ................................................... 4-8
4.3.3 Identification of appropriate valued environmental components ........................ 4-9
4.3.4 Methods for identification of impacts.................................................................. 4-9
4.3.5 Testing the Significance of Impacts .................................................................. 4-16
4.3.6 Terms of reference for EIA studies ................................................................... 4-16
4.4 Environmental Impact Assessment ................................................................................... 4-21
4.4.1 EIA team............................................................................................................ 4-22
4.4.2 Baseline quality of the environment .................................................................. 4-22
4.4.3 Impact prediction tools ...................................................................................... 4-26
4.4.4 Significance of the impacts................................................................................ 4-26
4.5 Social Impact Assessment ................................................................................................. 4-27
4.6 Risk Assessment................................................................................................................ 4-29
4.7 Mitigation Measures.......................................................................................................... 4-33
4.7.1 Important considerations for mitigation methods.............................................. 4-33
4.7.2 Hierarchy of elements of mitigation plan .......................................................... 4-34
4.7.3 Typical mitigation measures.............................................................................. 4-35
4.8 Environmental Management Plan ..................................................................................... 4-38
4.9 Reporting........................................................................................................................... 4-39
4.10 Public Consultation ........................................................................................................... 4-41
4.11 Appraisal ........................................................................................................................... 4-44
4.12 Decision Making ............................................................................................................... 4-45
4.13 Post-clearance Monitoring Protocol.................................................................................. 4-46
5. STAKEHOLDERS’ ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES 5-1
5.1 SEIAA ................................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2 EAC and SEAC................................................................................................................... 5-6

ii
Table of Contents
LIST OF TABLES
Table 3-1: Typical Constituents of Municipal Landfill Gas ............................................................. 3-17
Table 3-2: Physical and Chemical Properties of High Quality Compost.......................................... 3-20
Table 3-3: Operating and Emission Standards for Incinerators ........................................................ 3-28
Table 3-4: Case Study – Pyrolysis of Indian MSW .......................................................................... 3-29
Table 3-5: Comparative Analysis of the Available Energy Technologies........................................ 3-31
Table 3-6: Influencing Parameters and Constraints of Various MSW Technologies ....................... 3-32
Table 3-7: Inputs and Outputs of Various MSW Technologies........................................................ 3-40
Table 3-8: Indicative Carbon Revenues Potential using Various MSWM Technologies................. 3-47
Table 3-9: Summary of Key Parameters from Action Plans............................................................. 3-48
Table 4-1: Advantages and Disadvantages of Impact Identification Methods ................................... 4-9
Table 4-2: Matrix of Impacts ............................................................................................................ 4-12
Table 4-3: List of Important Physical Environment Components and Indicators of EBM.............. 4-24
Table 4-4: Choice of Models for Impact Predictions: Risk Assessment.......................................... 4-31
Table 4-5: Typical Mitigation Measures........................................................................................... 4-36
Table 4-6: Structure of EIA Report................................................................................................... 4-39
Table 5-1: Roles and Responsibilities of Stakeholders Involved in Prior Environmental Clearance 5-1
Table 5-2: Organization-specific Functions........................................................................................ 5-2
Table 5-3: SEIAA: Eligibility Criteria for Chairperson/ Members/ Secretary ................................... 5-5
Table 5-4: EAC/SEAC: Eligibility Criteria for Chairperson / Members / Secretary.......................... 5-8

iii
Table of Contents
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 2-1: Inclusive Components of Sustainable Development........................................................ 2-1
Figure 2-2: Types of Impacts .............................................................................................................. 2-5
Figure 2-3: Cumulative Impact ........................................................................................................... 2-7
Figure 3-1: Type and Composition of MSW ...................................................................................... 3-6
Figure 3-2: Technological Options for MSW Management ............................................................. 3-12
Figure 3-3: Schematic Diagram of Bioreactor Landfill .................................................................... 3-16
Figure 3-4: Schematic of Composting Process ................................................................................. 3-19
Figure 3-5: Steps in Composting ...................................................................................................... 3-22
Figure 3-6: Composting Procedure ................................................................................................... 3-23
Figure 3-7: Cross Section of a Mass Burn Incineration Plant........................................................... 3-28
Figure 3-8: CDM Project cycle......................................................................................................... 3-47
Figure 4-1: Prior Environmental Clearance Process for Activities Falling Under Category A ......... 4-2
Figure 4-2: Prior Environmental Clearance Process for Activities Falling Under Category B ......... 4-3
Figure 4-3: Approach for EIA Study ................................................................................................ 4-22
Figure 4-4: Risk Assessment – Conceptual Framework ................................................................... 4-31
Figure 4-5: Comprehensive Risk Assessment - At a Glance ............................................................ 4-32
Figure 4-6: Elements of Mitigation................................................................................................... 4-34

iv
Table of Contents
ANNEXURES
Annexure I
Definitions – MSW (Management and Handling) Rules 2000
Annexure II
Waste Generation and Composition
Annexure III
Schedules from MSW (Management and Handling) Rules 2000
Annexure IV
A Compilation of Legal Instruments
Annexure V
General Standards for Discharge of Environmental Pollutants
Annexure VI
Fertilizer Control Order (FCO) Standards for Compost Quality
Annexure VII
Critically Polluted Industrial Areas and Clusters/Potential Impact Zones
Annexure VIII
Form 1 (Application Form for Obtaining EIA Clearance)
Annexure IX
Pre-feasibility Report: Points for Coverage of EIA Studies
Annexure X
Types of Monitoring and Network Design Considerations
Annexure XI
Guidance for Assessment of Baseline Components and Attributes
Annexure XII
Sources of Secondary Data

v
Table of Contents
Annexure XIII
Impact Prediction Tools
Annexure XIV
Form through which the State Governments/Administration of the Union Territories Submit
Nominations for SEIAA and SEAC for the Consideration and Notification by the Central
Government
Annexure XV
Composition of EAC/SEAC
Annexure XVI
Best Practices available and reference
ACRONYMS
AAQ Ambient Air Quality

BOD Biological Oxygen Demand
BOQ Bill of Quantities
BOT Build Operate Transfer
CCA Conventional Cost Accounting
CDM Clean Development Mechanism
CER Corporate Environmental Reports
CEAA Canadian Environmental Assessment Agency
CFE Consent for Establishment
CMSWMF Common Municipal Solid Waste Management Facility
CPCB Central Pollution Control Board
CPHEEO Central Public Health and Environmental Engineering Organization
CREP Corporate Responsibility for Environmental Protection
CRZ Coastal Regulatory Zone
DA Development Authorities
DMP Disaster Management Plan
EAC Expert Appraisal Committee
ECI Environmental Condition Indicators
EcE Economic-cum-Environmental
EIA Environmental Impact Assessment
EIS Environmental Information System
EMA Environmental Management Accounting
EMP Environmental Management Plan
EMS Environmental Management System
EPI Environmental Performance Indicators
EPR Extended Producers Responsibilities
Technical EIA Guidance Manual for CMSWMF vi September 2010

Table of Contents
EPZ Export Processing Zones

ES Environmental Statements
FCA Full Cost Assessment
FCO Fertilizer Control Order
GHG Green House Gases
HAZOP Hazard and Operability Studies
HTL High Tide Level
IC Internal Combustion
IL&FS Infrastructure Leasing and Financial Services
ISO International Standard Organization
JNNURM Jawaharlal Nehru National Urban Renewal Mission
LCA Life Cycle Assessment
LDAR Leak Detection and Repair
LTL Low Tide Level
MCA Maximum Credible Accident
MoEF Ministry of Environment & Forests
MoUD Ministry of Urban Development
MSW Municipal Solid Waste
NAQM National Air Quality Monitoring
NEERI National Environmental Engineering Research Institute
NGO Non-Government Organizations
O&M Operation and Maintenance
PM Particulate Matter
PPA Participatory Poverty Assessment
PRA Participatory Rural Appraisal
QA/QC Quality Assurance/Quality Control
QRA Quantitative Risk Assessment
RDF Refuse Derived Fuel
RWA Residents Welfare Association
SEA Strategic Environmental Assessment
SEAC State Level Expert Appraisal Committee
SEIAA State Level Environment Impact Assessment Authority
SEZ Special Economic Zone
SIA Social Impact Assessment
SPCB State Pollution Control Board
SPM Suspended Particulate Matter
TCA Total Cost Assessment
TCLP Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure

vii
Table of Contents
TEQM Total Environmental Quality Movement

TGM Technical EIA Guidance Manual
ToR Terms of Reference
ULBs Urban Local Bodies
UT Union Territory
UTEIAA Union Territory Level Environment Impact Assessment Authority
UTPCC Union Territory Pollution Control Committee

viii
Gr{Izfifr TdTET ?rq df (atie uarc)
q-qi€ur Ed s-4
JAIRAM RAMESH g{T{d ll*Fl{
a$ Rld-r t oooe
wir! MIMSTEROF STATE(INDEPENDENT CHARGE}
ENVIRONM€NT & FORESTS
GOVERNMENT OF INDIA
N E WD E L H.I1 1 0O O 3
22"dDecember 2010
FOREWORD
The Ministry of Environment & Forests(MOEF) introduced the Environmental Impact

Assessment(EIA) Notification 2006 on 14tt'september 2006,which not only reengineeredthe
entire environment clearance(EC) processspecilied under the EIA Notification 1494,but also
introduced a number of new developmental sectorswhich would require prior environmental
clearance.The EIA Notification 2006has notified a list of 39 developmentai sectorswhich have
been further categorisedas A or B based on their capacity and likely environmental lmpacts.
Category B projectshave been further categorisedas 81 and 82. The EIA Noti{ication 2006has
further introduced a system of screening, scoping and appraisal and for the setting up of
Environment Impact Assessment Authority (EIAA) at the Central level and state Level
Environment Impact AssessmentAuthorities (SEIAAs)to grant environmental ciearancesat the
Central and Statelevel respectively.The Ministry of Environment & Forestsis the Environment
Impact AssessmentAuthority at the Central level and 25 State Level Environrnent ImDact
-ste
AssessmentAuthorities (sEiAAS) have been set up in the various states/UTs. rhe
Notification 2006 also stipulates the constitution of a multi-disciplinary Expert Appraisal
committee (EAC) at the Centre and state level Expert Appraisai Committees (sEA-cs) at
state/UT Level for appraisal of Category A or B projects respectively and to recommend
grant/rejection of environmental clearanceto each project/activities fall'ing under the varrous
sectorsto the EIAA/SEIAAs respectively.
Although the process of obtaining environmental clearance consisting of screerung,

scoping and Appraisal and for undertaking public consultation including "the p.ocess of
conduct of Public Hearing has been elaborated under the EIA Notification ZOO6, +heN:otification
itseif provides for bringing out guidelines from time to time on the EIA Notification 2006and
the EC processwith a view to bringing clarity on the EC processfor expediting environmental
clearance.This need was further reinforced after the constitution of SEIAAJ and SEACs in
various States,who were assignedthe task for the first time and for addressingthe concernsof
standardization of the quality of appraisal and in reducing inconsislencies between
SEACs/SEIAAsin granting ECs for similar projectsin different States.
The Technical Guidance Manual of "Common Municipal solid waste Management

Facilities' sectordescribestypes of EIA, processand pollution control technologies,operational
aspectsof EIA with model TOR of that Sector,technologicaloptions with clea=ner production,
monitoring of environmental quality, post clearancemonitoring protocol, lelated regulations,
and procedureof obtaining EC.
Challengesand deficienciesin the municipal solid waste system in India include partial
segregation of recyclable waste and no system of primary waste collection at dootstep.
However, there are suggestedpracticesto both minimize the environmental impacts of landfills
and to move towards good combustion practicesby way of incineration technology. Although,
the conventional technologies are being improved continuously, but major thrust should be
given for improvemeni o{ unconventional technologieswhich promises use of renewablesource
of energy and are environmental friendly. To improve these technologies, industry and
educational institutions should join hands for the brighter future. India's industrial
competitivenessand environmental future depends on Industries such as Comrnon Municipal
Solid Waste Management Facilities adopting energy and resource efficient technologies.
Recyclingand reuseof materials is crihcal.
To keep pace with changing technologiesand needs of sustainable developmenf the

manual would require regular updating in the future. The manual will be available on the
MoEF website and we would appreciate receiving responsesfrom stakeholders for further
lmprovemen$.
I congratulatethe entire team of IL&FS EcosmartLtd., expertsfrom the sectorwho were

involved in the preparation of the Manuals, Chairman and members of the Core and Peer
Committees of various sectors and various Resource Persons whose inputs were indeed
valuable in the preparation and finalization of the Manuals.
v
(Jairam Ramesh)
1.
INTRODUCTION TO THE TECHNICAL EIA
GUIDANCE MANUALS PROJECT
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is a process of identifying, predicting,

evaluating and mitigating the biophysical, social, and other relevant impacts of
development proposals prior to major decisions being taken and commitments made.
These studies integrate the environmental concerns of developmental activities into the
processes of decision-making.
EIA has emerged as one of the successful policy innovations of the 20th Century in the
process of ensuring sustained development. Today, EIA is formalized as a regulatory tool
in more than 100 countries for effective integration of environmental concerns in the
economic development process. The EIA process in India was made mandatory and was
also given a legislative status through a Notification issued by the Ministry of
Environment and Forests (MoEF) in January 1994. The Notification, however, covered
only a few selected industrial developmental activities. While there are subsequent
amendments, the Notification issued on September 14, 2006 supersedes all the earlier
Notifications, and has brought out structural changes in the clearance mechanism.
The basic tenets of this EIA Notification could be summarized into the following:
̇ Pollution potential as the basis for prior environmental clearance instead of investment
criteria; and
̇ Decentralization of clearing powers to the State/Union Territory (UT) level Authorities
for certain developmental activities to make the prior environmental clearance process
quicker, transparent and effective.
Devolution of the power to grant clearances at the state level for certain category of the
developmental activities / projects is a step forward to fulfill the basic tenets of the re-
engineering i.e., quicker, transparent and effective process but many issues impede/hinder
its functional efficiency. These issues could be in technical and operational domains as
listed below:
Technical issues
̇ Ensuring level playing ground to avoid arbitrariness in the decision-making process

̇ Classification of projects which do not require public hearing and detailed EIA
(Category B2)
̇ Variations in drawing Terms of Reference (ToR) of EIA studies for a given
developmental activity across the States/UTs
̇ Varying developmental-activity-specific expertise requirement for conducting EIA
studies and their appraisal
̇ Availability of adequate sectoral experts, particularly within regulatory agencies and
both the Central and the State/Union Territory level and variations in competency
levels, leading to the requirement of setting up expert panels consisting of sectoral
experts from other agencies/organizations.

1-1
Introduction
̇ Inadequate data, data verification, cross checking tools and supporting institutional
framework
̇ Meeting time targets without compromising with the quality of assessments/ reviews
̇ Varying knowledge and skill levels of regulators, consultants and experts
̇ Newly added developmental activities for prior environmental clearance, etc.
Operational issues
̇ State level /UT level EIA Authorities (SEIAA/UTEIAA) are formulated for the first
time and many are functioning
̇ Varying roles and responsibilities of involved organizations
̇ Varying supporting institutional strengths across the States/UTs
̇ Varying manpower availability (in terms of expertise and experience), etc.
1.1 Purpose
The purpose of developing the sector-specific technical EIA guidance manuals (TGM) is
to provide clear and concise information on EIA to all the stakeholders i.e., the project
proponent, the consultant, the reviewer, and the public. The TGMs are organized to cover
following:
Chapter 1 (Introduction): This chapter provides a brief introduction on the EIA, basic
tenets of EIA Notification, technical & operational issues in the process of clearance,
purpose of the TGMs, project implementation process and additional information.
Chapter 2 (Conceptual facets of an EIA): Provides an overall understanding to the

conceptual aspects of control of pollution and EIA for the developmental projects. This
basic understanding would set the readers at same level of understanding for proper
interpretations and boundaries for identifying the environmental interactions of the
developmental projects and their significance for taking measures of mitigation. This
chapter covers the discussion on environment in EIA context i.e., sustainable
development, Objectives of EIA, types and basic principles of EIA, project cycle for
common municipal solid waste management, understanding on type of environmental
impacts and the criteria for the significance analysis.
Chapter 3 (Common Municipal Solid Waste Management): The purpose of this

chapter is to provide the reader precise information on all the relevant aspects of the waste
management, which is essential to realize the likely interaction of such developmental
activities on the receiving environment. Besides, this Chapter gives a holistic
understanding on the sources of pollution and the opportunities of the source control.
The specific coverage which provides precise information on the common municipal solid
waste management include (i) introduction to common municipal solid waste
management and its Indian scenario, (ii) elements of common municipal solid waste
management (iii) technological options of common municipal solid waste management,
(iv) major concerns and exposure pathways, (v) financial aspects and (vi) the summary of
applicable national regulation for this developmental activity.
Chapter 4 (Operational aspects): The purpose of this chapter is to facilitate the stake-
holders to extend clear guidance on coverage of legislative requirements, sequence of

1-2
Introduction
procedures for obtaining the EIA clearance and each step-wise provisions and
considerations.
The coverage of the Chapter include provisions in the EIA Notification regarding
common municipal solid waste management, screening (criteria for categorization of B1
and B2, siting guidelines, etc.), scoping (pre-feasibility report, guidance for filling form 1,
identification of valued environmental components, identification of impacts, etc.),
arriving at terms of reference for EIA studies, impact assessment studies (EIA team,
assessment of baseline quality of environment, impact prediction tools, significance of
impacts), social impact assessment, risk assessment considerations, typical mitigation
measures, designing considerations for environmental management plan, structure of EIA
report for incorporation of study findings, process of public consultation, project
appraisal, decision making process and post-clearance monitoring protocol.
Chapter 5 (Roles and responsibilities of various organizations involved in the

process of prior environmental clearance): The purpose of this Chapter is to brief the
stakeholders on the institutional mechanism and roles & responsibilities of the stake-
holders involved in the process of prior environmental clearance. The Coverage of the
Chapter include (i) roles and responsibilities of the stakeholders, (ii) organization specific
functions, (iii) constitution, composition and decision making process of SEIAA and (iv)
EAC & SEAC and (v) other conditions which may be considered.
For any given sector, each topic listed above could alone be the subject of a lengthy
volume. However, in order to produce a manageable document, this project focuses on
providing summary information for each topic. This format provides the reader with a
synopsis of each issue. Text within each section was researched from many sources, and
was condensed from more detailed sources pertaining to specific topics.
The contents of the document are designed with a view to facilitate addressing of the
relevant technical and operational issues as mentioned in the earlier section. Besides,
facilitates various stakeholders involved in the EIA clearance process i.e.
̇ Project proponents will be fully aware of the procedures, common ToR for EIA
studies, timelines, monitoring needs, etc., in order to plan the projects/studies
appropriately.
̇ Consultants across India will gain similar understanding about a given sector, and also
the procedure for EIA studies, so that the quality of the EIA reports gets improved and
streamlined
̇ Reviewers across the States/UTs will have the same understanding about the sector
and would able to draw a benchmark in establishing the significant impacts for the
purpose of prescribing the ToR for EIA studies and also in the process of review and
appraisal.
̇ Public who are concerned about new or expansion projects, can use this manual to get
a basic idea about the manufacturing/production details, rejects/wastes from the
operations, choice of cleaner/control technologies, regulatory requirements, likely
environmental and social concerns, mitigation measures, etc., in order to seek
clarifications appropriately in the process of public consultation. The procedural
clarity in the document will further strengthen them to understand the stages involved
in clearance and roles and responsibilities of various organizations.
̇ In addition, these manuals would substantially ease the pressure on reviewers at the
scoping stage and would bring in functional efficiency at the central and state levels.

1-3
Introduction
1.2 Project Implementation
The Ministry of Environment & Forests (MoEF), Government of India took up the task of
developing sector-specific technical EIA guidance manuals for all the developmental
activities listed in the re-engineered EIA Notification. The Infrastructure Leasing and
Financial Services Ecosmart Limited (IL&FS Ecosmart), has been entrusted with the task
of developing these manuals for 27 industrial and related sectors. Common Municipal
Solid Waste Management Facility (CMSWMF) is one of these sectors, for which this
manual is prepared.
The ability to design comprehensive EIA studies for specific industries depends on the
knowledge of several interrelated topics. Therefore, it requires expert inputs from
multiple dimensions i.e., administrative, project management, technical, scientific, social,
economic, risk etc., in order to comprehensively analyze the issues of concern and to
draw logical interpretations. Thus, Ecosmart has designed a well-composed
implementation framework to factor inputs of the experts and stakeholders in the process
of finalization of these manuals.
The process of manual preparation involved collection & collation of the secondary
available information, technical review by sectoral resource persons and critical review
and finalization by a competent Expert Committee composed of core and sectoral peer
members.
The MoEF appreciates the efforts of Ecosmart, Expert Core and Peer Committee,
resource persons and all those who have directly and indirectly contributed to this
Manual. .
1.3 Additional Information
This TGM is brought out by the MoEF to provide clarity to all the stakeholders involved
in the ‘Prior Environmental Clearance’ process. As such, the contents and clarifications
given in this document do not withstand in case of a conflict with the statutory provisions
of the Notifications and Executive Orders issued by the MoEF from time-to-time.
TGMs are not regulatory documents. Instead, these are the tools designed to assist in
successful completion of an EIA.
For the purpose of this project, the key elements considered under TGMs are: conceptual
aspects of EIA; developmental activity-specific information; operational aspects; and
roles and responsibilities of involved stakeholders.
This manual is prepared considering the Notification issued on 14th September, 2006 and
its amendments as on 1st December, 2009. For recent updates, if any, may please refer
the website of the MoEF, Government of India i.e., http://moef.nic.in/index.php.

1-4
2.
CONCEPTUAL FACETS OF EIA
It is an imperative requirement to understand the basic concepts concerned to the

pollution control and the environmental impact assessment in an overall objective of the
sustainable development. This Chapter highlights the objectives, types & principles of
EIA, type of impacts their significance analysis, in order to provide consistent
understanding to the reader before assessing the development of activity-specific
environmental concerns in Chapter 3 and identification & prediction of significant
impacts in order to design mitigation measures as detailed in Chapter 4.
2.1 Environment in EIA Context
“Environment” in EIA context mainly focuses, but is not limited to physical, chemical,
biological, geological, social, economical, and aesthetic dimensions along with their
complex interactions, which affect individuals, communities and ultimately determines
their forms, character, relationship, and survival. In EIA context, ‘effect’ and ‘impact’
can often be used interchangeably. However, ‘impact’ is considered as a value judgment
of the significance of an effect.
Sustainable development is built on three basic premises i.e., economic growth,

ecological (and environmental) balance and social progress. Economic growth achieved
in a way that does not consider the environmental concerns, will not be sustainable in the
long run. Therefore, sustainable development needs careful integration of environmental,
economic, and social needs in order to achieve both an increased standard of living in
short term, and a net gain or equilibrium among human, natural, and economic resources
to support future generations in the long term.
It is necessary to understand the links between environment and development in order to

make choices for development that will be economically efficient, socially equitable and
responsible, as well as environmentally sound.
Figure 2-1: Inclusive Components of Sustainable Development

2-1
Conceptual Facets of EIA
2.2 Objectives of EIA
Objectives of EIA include the following:
Ü To ensure environmental considerations are explicitly addressed and incorporated

into the development decision-making process;
Ü To anticipate and avoid, minimize or offset the adverse significant biophysical, social
and other relevant effects of development proposals;
Ü To protect the productivity and capacity of natural systems and the ecological
processes which maintain their functions; and
Ü To promote development that is sustainable and optimizes resource use as well as
management opportunities
2.3 Types of EIA
Environmental assessments could be classified into four types i.e. strategic environmental
assessment (SEA), regional EIA, sectoral EIA and project level EIA. These are precisely
discussed below:
Strategic environmental assessment
SEA refers to systematic analysis of the environmental effects of development policies,

plans, programmes and other proposed strategic actions. SEA represents a proactive
approach to integrate environmental considerations into the higher levels of decision-
making – beyond the project level, when major alternatives are still open.
Regional EIA
EIA in the context of regional planning integrates environmental concerns into

development planning for a geographic region, normally at the sub-country level. Such
an approach is referred to as the economic-cum-environmental (EcE) development
planning. This approach facilitates adequate integration of economic development with
management of renewable natural resources within the carrying capacity limitation to
achieve sustainable development. It fulfils the need for macro-level environmental
integration, which the project-oriented EIA is unable to address effectively. Regional
EIA addresses the environmental impacts of regional development plans and thus, the
context for project-level EIA of the subsequent projects, within the region. In addition, if
environmental effects are considered at regional level, then cumulative environmental
effects of all the projects within the region can be accounted.
Sectoral EIA
Instead of project-level-EIA, an EIA should take place in the context of regional and
sectoral level planning. Once sectoral level development plans have the integrated
sectoral environmental concerns addressed, the scope of project-level EIA will be quite
minimal. Sectoral EIA helps in addressing specific environmental problems that may be
encountered in planning and implementing sectoral development projects.

2-2
Project level EIA
Project level EIA refers to the developmental activity in isolation and the impacts that it
exerts on the receiving environment. Thus, it may not effectively integrate the cumulative
effects of the development in a region.
From the above discussion, it is clear that EIA shall be integrated at all the levels i.e.
strategic, regional, sectoral and the project level. Whereas, the strategic EIA is a
structural change in the way the things are evaluated for decision-making, the regional
EIA refers to substantial information processing and drawing complex inferences. The
project-level EIA is relatively simple and reaches to meaningful conclusions. Therefore
in India, project-level EIA studies take place on a large scale and are being considered.
However, in the re-engineered Notification, provisions have been incorporated for giving
a single clearance for the entire industrial estate for e.g., Leather parks, pharma cities etc.,
which is a step towards the regional approach.
As we progress and the resource planning concepts emerge in our decision-making

process, the integration of overall regional issues will become part of the impact
assessment studies.
Thus the SEA, Regional EIA, and Sectoral EIA evaluate environmental, social and
ecological effects on a larger scale and may be considered as tools for the development of
framework of planning at country, sub-country and regional levels, while the project level
EIA focuses on developmental activity of a proposed project in a given location. In
identifying the project (site as well as the proposed activities), due consideration to the
urban land use planning issues should be given.
2.4 Basic EIA Principles
By integrating the environmental impacts of the development activities and their

mitigation early in the project planning cycle, the benefits of EIA could be realized in all
stages of a project, from exploration and planning, through construction, operations,
decommissioning, and beyond site closure.
A properly-conducted-EIA also lessens conflicts by promoting community participation,

informing decision makers, and also helps in laying the base for environmentally sound
projects. An EIA should meet at least three core values:
̇ Integrity: The EIA process should be fair, objective, unbiased and balanced
̇ Utility: The EIA process should provide balanced, credible information for decision-
making
̇ Sustainability: The EIA process should result in environmental safeguards
Ideally an EIA process should be:
̇ Purposive - should inform decision makers and result in appropriate levels of

environmental protection and community well-being.
̇ Rigorous - should apply ‘best practicable’ science, employing methodologies and
techniques appropriate to address the problems being investigated.
̇ Practical - should result in providing information and acceptable and implementable
solutions for problems faced by proponents.

2-3
̇ Relevant - should provide sufficient, reliable and usable information for development
planning and decision making.
̇ Cost-effective - should impose minimum cost burdens in terms of time and finance on
proponents and participants consistent with meeting accepted requirements and
objectives of EIA.
̇ Efficient - should achieve the objectives of EIA within the limits of available
information, time, resources and methodology.
̇ Focused - should concentrate on significant environmental effects and key issues; i.e.,
the matters that need to be taken into account in making decisions.
̇ Adaptive - should be adjusted to the realities, issues and circumstances of the
proposals under review without compromising the integrity of the process, and be
iterative, incorporating lessons learned throughout the project life cycle.
̇ Participative - should provide appropriate opportunities to inform and involve the
interested and affected publics, and their inputs and concerns should be addressed
explicitly in the documentation and decision making.
̇ Inter-disciplinary - should ensure that appropriate techniques and experts in the
relevant bio-physical and socio-economic disciplines are employed, including use of
traditional knowledge as relevant.
̇ Credible - should be carried out with professionalism, rigor, fairness, objectivity,
impartiality and balance, and be subject to independent checks and verification.
̇ Integrated - should address the interrelationships of social, economic and biophysical
aspects.
̇ Transparent - should have clear, easily understood requirements for EIA content;
ensure public access to information; identify the factors that are to be taken into
account in decision making; and acknowledge limitations and difficulties.
̇ Systematic - should result in full consideration of all relevant information on the
affected environment, of proposed alternatives and their impacts, and of the measures
necessary to monitor and investigate residual effects.
2.5 Project Cycle
The generic project cycle including that of CMSWMF has six main stages:
1. Project concept
2. Pre-feasibility
3. Feasibility
4. Design and engineering
5. Implementation
6. Monitoring and evaluation
It is important to consider the environmental factors on an equal basis with technical and
economic factors throughout the project planning, assessment and implementation phases.
Environmental considerations should be introduced at the earliest in the project cycle and
must be an integral part of the project pre-feasibility and feasibility stage. If the
Environmental considerations are given due respect in site selection process by the
project proponent, the subsequent stages of the environmental clearance process would

2-4
get simplified and would also facilitate easy compliance to the mitigation measures
throughout the project life cycle.
A project’s feasibility study should include a detailed assessment of significant impacts

and the EIA include the detailed prediction and quantification of impacts and delineation
of Environmental Management Plan (EMP). Findings of the EIA study should preferably
be incorporated in the project design stage so that the project as well as the site
alternatives is studied and necessary changes, if required, are incorporated in the project
design stage. This practice will also help the management in assessing the negative
impacts and in designing cost-effective remedial measures. In general, EIA enhances the
project quality and improves the project planning process.
2.6 Environmental Impacts
Environmental impacts resulting from proposed actions can be grouped into following
categories:
̇ Beneficial or detrimental
̇ Naturally reversible or irreversible
̇ Repairable via management practices or irreparable
̇ Short term or long term
̇ Temporary or continuous
̇ Occurring during construction phase or operational phase
̇ Local, regional, national or global
̇ Accidental or planned (recognized before hand)
̇ Direct (primary) or Indirect (secondary)
̇ Cumulative or distinct (single)
The category of impact as stated above, and the significance will facilitate the Expert
Appraisal Committee (EAC)/State Level EAC (SEAC) to take a look at the ToR for EIA
studies, as well as, in decision making process about the developmental activity.
Figure 2-2: Types of Impacts

2-5
The nature of impacts could fall within three broad classifications i.e., direct, indirect and
cumulative, based on the characteristics of impacts. The assessment of direct, indirect
and cumulative impacts should not be considered in isolation or considered as separate
stages in the EIA. Ideally, the assessment of such impacts should form an integral part of
all stages of the EIA. The TGM does not recommend a single method to assess the types
of impacts, but suggests a practical framework/approach that can be adapted and
combined to suit a particular project and the nature of impacts.
2.6.1 Direct impacts
Direct impacts occur through direct interaction of an activity with an environmental,

social, or economic component. For example, migration or transport of leachate
containing suspended solids and pathogens from the waste disposal site into a nearby
water body may lead to degradation in water quality in terms of high biological oxygen
demand (BOD) or dissolved oxygen (DO) or rise of water toxins polluting the ground and
surface waters. Another example of direct impact would be emissions of methane and
carbon dioxide gases which shall aggravate the ambient air pollution concentrations.
2.6.2 Indirect impacts
Indirect impacts on the environment are those which are not a direct result of the project,
often produced away from or as a result of a complex impact pathway. The indirect
impacts are also known as secondary or even third level impacts. For example, health
impacts due to toxic gas emissions, contamination of soils due to leachate that is
generated, odours from the solid waste, noise due to constructions at the facility, etc.
Some of the impacts are characterized as socio-economic (third level) impacts. The
indirect impacts may also include growth-inducing impacts and other effects related to
induced changes to the pattern of land use or additional road network, population density
or growth rate (e.g. around a disposal site). In the process, air, water and other natural
systems including the ecosystem may also be affected. Indirect impacts could be both
positive and negative, for example: on one hand, the proposed project may increase the
potential for employment and development of ancillary industry and on the other because
of the pollution potential and on aesthetic considerations, the land values may diminish in
the immediate surroundings of the proposed disposal site.
2.6.3 Cumulative impacts
Cumulative impact consists of an impact that is created as a result of the combination of

the project evaluated in the EIA together with other projects causing related impacts.
These impacts occur when the incremental impact of the project is combined with the
cumulative effects of other past, present and reasonably foreseeable future projects.
Figure 2-3 depicts the same. Respective EAC may exercise their discretion on a case-by-
case basis for considering the cumulative impacts.

2-6
Figure 2-3: Cumulative Impact
2.6.4 Induced impacts
The cumulative impacts can be due to induced actions of projects and activities that may
occur if the action under assessment is implemented such as growth-inducing impacts and
other effects related to induced changes to the pattern of future land use or additional road
network, population density or growth rate (e.g., excess growth may be induced in the
zone of influence around the disposal facility, (particularly poorer sections of the
community), and in the process causing additional effects on air, water and other natural
ecosystems). Induced actions may not be officially announced or be part of any official
plan. Increase in workforce (due to growth of formal or informal ancillary industry like
rag picking, recycling, etc.) and nearby communities contributes to this effect.
They usually have no direct relationship with the action under assessment, and represent
the growth-inducing potential of an action. New roads leading from those constructed for
a project, increased recreational activities (e.g., hunting, fishing), and construction of new
service facilities are examples of induced actions.
However, the cumulative impacts due to induced development or third level or even
secondary indirect impacts are difficult to be quantified. Because of higher levels of
uncertainties, these impacts cannot normally be assessed over a long time horizon. An
EIA practitioner usually can only guess as to what such induced impacts may be and the
possible extent of their implications on the environmental factors. Respective EAC may
exercise their discretion on a case-by-case basis for considering the induced impacts.
2.7 Significance of Impacts
This TGM establishes the significance of impacts first and proceeds to delineate the
associated mitigation measures. So the significance here reflects the “worst-case
scenario” before mitigation is applied, and therefore provides an understanding of what
may happen if design measures of mitigation fails or are not as effective as predicted. For
establishing significance of different impacts, understanding the responses and interaction
of the environmental system is essential. Hence, the impact interactions and pathways are
to be understood and established first. Such an understanding will help in the assessment
process to quantify the impact as accurately as possible. Complex interactions,
particularly in the case of certain indirect or cumulative impacts, may give rise to non-
linear responses which are often difficult to understand and therefore their significance is
difficult to assess. It is hence understood that indirect or cumulative impacts are more
complex than the direct impacts. Currently the impact assessments are limited to direct
impacts. In case mitigation measures are delineated before determining significance of
the effect, the significance represents the residual effects.

2-7
However, the ultimate objective of an EIA is to achieve sustainable development. The

development process shall invariably cause some residual impacts even after
implementing an EMP effectively. Environmentalists today are faced with a vital, not-
easy-to-answer question—“What is the tolerable (or reasonable) level of environmental
impact within the sustainable development framework?” As such, it has been recognized
that every ecosystem has a threshold for absorbing deterioration and a certain capacity for
self-regeneration. These thresholds based on concept of carrying capacity are as follows:
̇ Waste emissions from a project should be within the assimilative capacity of the local
environment to absorb without unacceptable degradation of its future waste absorptive
capacity or other important services.
̇ Harvest rates of renewable resource inputs should be within the regenerative capacity
of the natural system that generates them; depletion rates of non-renewable inputs
should be equal to the rate at which renewable substitutes are developed by human
invention and investment.
The aim of this model is to curb over-consumption and unacceptable environmental
degradation. But because of limitation in available scientific basis, this definition
provides only general guidelines for determining the sustainable use of inputs and
outputs. To establish the level of significance for each identified impact, a three-stage
analysis may be referred:
̇ First, an impact is qualified as being either negative or positive.

̇ Second, the nature of impacts such as direct, indirect, or cumulative is determined
using the impact network
̇ Third, a scale is used to determine the severity of the effect; for example, an impact is
of low, medium, or high significance.
It is not sufficient to simply state the significance of the effect. This determination must
be justified, coherent and documented, notably by a determination methodology, which
must be described in the methodology section of the report.
2.7.1 Criteria/methodology to determine the significance of the identified

impacts
The criteria can be determined by answering some questions regarding the factors
affecting the significance. This will help the EIA stake-holders, the practitioner in
particular, to determine the significance of the identified impacts eventually. Typical
examples of such factors include the following:
̇ Exceeding threshold Limit: Significance may increase if a threshold is exceeded. e.g.,

Emissions of particulate matter exceed the permissible threshold.
̇ Effectiveness of mitigation: Significance may increase as the effectiveness of
mitigation measures decreases. e.g., control technologies, which may not assure
consistent compliance to the requirements.
̇ Size of study area: Significance may increase as the zone of effects increases.
̇ Incremental contribution of effects from action under review: Significance may
increase as the relative contribution of an action increases.
̇ Relative contribution of effects of other actions: Significance may decrease as the
significance of nearby larger actions increase.

2-8
̇ Relative rarity of species: Significance may increase as species becomes increasingly

rare or threatened.
̇ Significance of local effects: Significance may increase as the significance of local
effects is high.
̇ Magnitude of change relative to natural background variability: Significance may
decrease if effects are within natural assimilative capacity or variability.
̇ Creation of induced actions: Significance may increase as induced activities also
highly significant.
̇ Degree of existing disturbance: Significance may increase if the surrounding
environment is pristine.
For determining significance of impacts, it is important to remember that secondary and
higher order effects can also occur as a result of a primary interaction between a project
activity and the local environment. Wherever a primary effect is identified, the
practitioner should always think if secondary or tertiary effects on other aspects of the
environment could also arise.
The EIA should also consider the effects that could arise from the project due to induced
developments, which take place as a consequence of the project. Ex. Population density
and associated infrastructure and jobs for people attracted to the area by the project. It
also requires consideration of cumulative effects that could arise from a combination of
the effects due to other projects with those of other existing or planned developments in
the surrounding area. So the necessity to formulate a qualitative checklist is suggested to
test significance, in general.

2-9
3.
ABOUT COMMON (CENTRALIZED) MUNICIPAL
SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT FACILITY INCLUDING
BEST PRACTICES AND POLLUTION CONTROL
TECHNOLOGIES
3.1 Introduction to the Municipal Solid Waste Management
Municipal solid waste (MSW) includes waste from households, non-hazardous solid
waste from industrial, commercial and institutional establishments (excluding bio-medical
waste in present context), market waste, yard waste, agricultural wastes and street
sweepings. Industrial and community hazardous waste and infectious waste, is not
considered as MSW and should be collected and processed separately. MSW
(Management and Handling) Rules 2000 defines MSW as “commercial and residential
wastes generated in municipal or notified areas in either solid or semi-solid form
excluding industrial hazardous wastes but including treated bio-medical wastes”. Various
other definitions related to MSW, which are defined in MSW Rules 2000, are given in
Annexure I. MSW management encompasses the functions of collection, transfer &
transportation, processing & recycling, and disposal of MSW.
Safe and cost-effective management of MSW is a significant environmental challenge for

modern society. Inadequately managed waste disposal has the potential to affect the
health and environment.
Ideally MSW management should incorporate the principles of waste minimization,

recycling, resource recovery as well as an integrated processing & disposal facility,
leading to effective service delivery in a sustainable manner.
Management of solid waste is required at all stages from waste generation to the final
disposal. An integrated solid waste management plan would consist of:
̇ understanding the current waste management practices

̇ identifying waste management needs
̇ setting priorities for actions required
̇ identifying budget needs
̇ coordinating with different stakeholders
̇ measuring progress in terms of targets achieved
̇ modifying priorities as the plan develops
̇ communicating and coordinating with the external agencies/local agencies to achieve
the targets
For the purpose of EIA Notification, common municipal solid waste management
facilities may be referred as centralized MSW facility for an given town, city, region. It is
further to mention a common facility need not have surrounding ULBs included.

3-1
CMSWMF
3.1.1 Solid waste management in Indian scenario
The rapid urbanization is changing the nature of solid waste management from a low
priority, localized issue to a pervasive social and environmental problem with risks to
public health and environment.
MSW management is constrained by institutional weakness, lack of proper funding, lack

of proper management and operational systems, public apathy, lack of municipal will to
become financially self-sufficient through municipal taxation, etc.
In Indian towns, MSW storage is at a centralized place. Individuals deposit their waste in
bins/enclosures located at street corners at specific intervals. The containers generally are
constructed of metal, concrete, or brick masonry. Indiscriminate littering of roads and
drains is also common in most cities and towns. Community storage may reduce the cost
of waste collection, but chances of littering remains. Scavenging of the wastes by rag-
pickers and stray animals lead to further scattering of solid waste.
It is often perceived by the municipal authorities that the lack of civic awareness among
city residents is proving to be a major hurdle in maintaining the cleanliness. The problem
is most acute in slums and in areas where the lower and middle income groups reside.
Because of the poor conditions for temporary storage of wastes, in some areas, NGOs are
involved in making arrangements for waste collection from households leading to
improvement in street cleanliness.
Different types of vehicles, varying from bullock carts to compactors, are used for
transportation of waste. However, the general-purpose open body trucks of 5 to 9 tones
capacity are in common use. In smaller towns, tractor-trailers are used despite being
slow. In few cities, compactor vehicles are also being used. The waste is transported
mostly by municipal vehicles; though, in some large towns, private vehicles are also hired
to augment the fleet size. The maintenance of the vehicles is carried out in the general
municipal workshop along with other municipal vehicles where usually the municipal
refuse vehicles do not receive the priority. Most of these workshops have facilities for
minor repairs only. Although preventive maintenance is necessary to maintain collection
fleet in proper operating condition, this aspect is often neglected. Transfer stations are
available only in few metropolitan cities.
Several thousands of urban dwellers in India make their living upon waste processing by
working in small industries, which recycle plastics, tin cans, bottles, bones, hair, leather,
glass, metal etc., recovered from MSW. Most of the material containing metals, unsoiled
paper, plastics, glass, cardboard, etc. are marketable and hence recycled by householders
themselves or by the rag-pickers. By the time waste reaches the community bins, it
contains only a small portion of recyclable material and consists mainly of vegetable/fruit
peelings, scraps of soiled paper and plastic, used toiletries, and inert material such as sand
and stones, etc.
The larger proportion of organic matter in MSW indicates the desirability of biological
processing of waste such as composting. Though composting has been the prevalent
biological processing practiced in India, there have been problems due to transportation,
poor acceptance by farmers (may be because of quality concerns), marketing, price etc.
Recently efforts are being taken to popularize waste segregation and composting.
Characteristics of the Indian MSW bring out the fact that a self-sustaining combustion
reaction cannot be obtained with a majority of Indian MSW and auxiliary fuel will be
required to aid waste combustion.

3-2
CMSWMF
In majority of urban centers, waste is being disposed of in low-lying areas. The disposal
sites are selected on the basis of their proximity to the collection areas and new disposal
sites are normally identified only when the existing ones are filled. In most cases, the
waste is simply dumped at such sites and, except in the major cities, bulldozers are rarely
used for compaction at the disposal site. Even in these cities, they are used mainly for
leveling of the deposited waste. Proper weighing, filling and soil layering are not
practiced in many areas. Provisions for leachate and gas control do not exist at many
places. A soil cover is rarely provided, except at the time of final closure of the site.
Most of the disposal sites are unfenced and the waste picking is commonly in vogue,
posing problems in the operation of the sites. It is a common practice to light a fire on the
dumpsite by the rag-pickers either to reduce the menacing flies and volume or odour and
facilitate waste picking.
In view of the difficulty in acquiring land for establishing waste management and disposal
facilities, it is imperative that the existing dumpsites are redesigned to receive present and
future wastes. As haphazard dumping across the dumpsites has been a common practice,
and contamination of the surrounding areas is not uncommon, those dumpsites need to be
rehabilitated and redesigned to recover space for future wastes. The rehabilitation
measures should include measures to contain the contaminant migration and where
possible lining the base of the fill and design it to receive future wastes for a period of 20
years of more through innovative designs and well planned operations and maintenance.
3.1.2 MSW – A growing challenge
Over the next two decades, growing urbanization in India will result in a massive increase
of waste. By the year 2021, the urban population is expected to represent 41% of the
overall population. A study conducted by the CPCB on management of MSW in the
country estimates that waste generation from the present 48 million tones (MT) per year
is expected to increase to 300 MT per year, by the year 2047 (490 g per capita to 945 g
per capita). The estimated requirement of land for disposal would be 169.6 square
kilometer (km2) in 2047 as against 20.2 km2 in 1997 (CPCB 2000a).
̇ India produces 48.0 MT of MSW annually at present.

̇ Urban population increasing between 3 – 3.5 % per annum.
̇ Per capita waste generation in India is increasing by 1.3 % per annum.
̇ Yearly increase of waste generation in India is around 5%.
To tackle the waste generated in urban areas, the urban local bodies are investing around
35 -50 % of its available funds, spending about Rs. 500-1500 per ton on solid waste
management. Hence there is an urgent need to increase efficiency for better service
delivery and optimization.
Land disposal of solid wastes has been practiced for centuries. Municipal, industrial,
agricultural and urban activities produce huge amounts of wastes, which require safe and
permanent secured disposal. In view of growing challenge of solid waste management in
the country, the Central Government has incorporated solid waste management as one of
the components in the Jawaharlal Nehru National Urban Renewal Mission (JNNURM)
programme, initiated by the Central Government for extending financial resources. Many
cities are getting benefit from this massive programme.

3-3
CMSWMF
3.1.2.1 Issues and indicators
There are several aspects of solid waste management: technical, financial, institutional
and social. Each of these aspects has certain issues, which need to be deliberated upon to
achieve sustainable and effective waste management. The implementation and progress
can be monitored by evolving certain indicators, which are discussed below:
A. Technical issues
̇ Inadequate technical expertise and planning capability in most of the urban local
bodies (ULBs)
̇ Technical expertise available with some of the metro and mega cities is not fully
utilized and not given due weightage in decision making
̇ Inadequate solid waste management plans in the system at local and national levels
̇ Low priority for research and development in solid waste management sector
̇ Selection of appropriate technology for handling and disposal of solid waste is often
left open in the tenders
̇ Considerable work is required to be done on recycling, parameters of health and safety
of recycled products, etc.
̇ Competitive market not yet developed for procurement of plant and equipment for
processing MSW and other solid waste materials
Indicators
̇ Quality and extent (coverage) of service provided

̇ Impact on health and environment
B. Financial issues
̇ ULBs are unable to generate adequate funds from their own sources, such as municipal
taxes (as mandated by the 74th Constitutional Amendment Act)
̇ Good financial management and planning for the available resources by the local
government
̇ Additional support from users through user charges as supplement to property tax
C. Institutional issues
̇ Coordination of solid waste management projects and activities by dedicated

department / cell in each ULB
̇ Inadequate coordination between the relevant agencies
̇ Enforcement of applicable Rules and regulations by the ULB
̇ Provision of clear mandates and sufficient resources to fulfill the mandates by the
ULBs
̇ Only environment friendly sustainable options to be implemented by local government

3-4
CMSWMF
̇ Nodal department in the State Government (Municipal Administration / Urban

Development) should provide guidance and oversee implementation of applicable
Rules
Indicators
̇ Self-sufficiency within the ULBs for tackling MSW management
D. Social issues
̇ Lack of public awareness and school education programmes

̇ Lack of genuine interest amongst the public and other stakeholders
̇ Low paid employment for waste workers
̇ Waste workers have very low social status
Indicators
̇ Public cooperation
̇ Social equity for the waste workers
3.2 Elements of MSW Management
The activities associated with the management of MSW from the start of waste generation
to final disposal can be grouped into the six functional elements:
̇ waste generation
̇ waste storage at source
̇ waste segregation
̇ collection (primary and secondary)
̇ transportation
̇ processing and recycling
̇ disposal of reject material
̇ rehabilitation of the existing dumpsites to mitigate the pollution potential
3.2.1 Waste generation
Waste generation encompasses activities, in which materials (in their present form) are
identified valueless and are either thrown away or gathered for disposal. Waste generation
is, at present, an activity that is not very controllable. In future, however, more control is
likely to be exercised over the generation of wastes. Reduction of waste at source,
although not controlled by solid waste managers, is now included in system evaluations
as a method of limiting the quantity of waste generated.
Currently, proponents of most MSW projects estimate the waste generation rates based on
average per capita rates provided by the CPCB. More accurate estimates of waste
generation rates and analysis of waste characteristics would be required to evaluate
options for the design of waste diversion systems, waste processing and disposal
facilities.

3-5
CMSWMF
3.2.1.1 Quantity of solid waste
It is estimated that solid waste generated in small, medium and large cities and towns is
about 0.1 kg, 0.3 – 0.4 kg and 0.5 kg per capita per day respectively.
As per the Ministry of Urban Development’s (MoUD) manual on solid waste

management (year 2000) the estimated waste generation in the country is 100,000 TPD.
CPCB in assistance with NEERI has survey records of waste generation and
characteristics for 59 cities (35 Metro Cities and 24 State Capitals: 2004-05) of the
country. The list of these waste generation rates and waste characterizations are given in
Annexure II.
3.2.1.2 Composition of solid waste
It is very important to understand the sources of MSW and the typical composition,
before reviewing the choice of technologies.
MSW composition can vary substantially with location and time depending on many
factors, including socio-economic, climatic conditions, living standards, waste collection,
and disposal methods, sampling and sorting procedures. MSW is heterogeneous in nature
and consists of number of different materials derived from various types of activities
which includes residential, commercial, and non-hazardous industrial waste but exclude
combustion ash, hazardous waste, sludge, and industrial process wastes. A diagram
depicting the typical sources of MSW is given in Figure 3.1.
Figure 3-1: Type and Composition of MSW

3-6
CMSWMF
It can be seen from the Figure 3-1, that there are number of sources for MSW. Depending
on the serving area, the source may vary and accordingly the final composition of MSW.
Waste composition categories include organic material (biodegradable) and inorganic
material (non-biodegradable). Inorganic portion is mostly occupied by inert material but
also include paper, plastics, glass, paper, plastics, glass, rubber, etc.
3.2.1.3 Characteristics of MSW
Physical Characteristics
Physical characteristics of MSW are density, moisture content, size of the waste
constituents, calorific value, etc.
The density of solid waste may vary during transportation of waste from its source to
disposal points. Density of waste is an important measure which is used to define all the
elements of the solid waste management system such as storage, transportation and
disposal facilities required. Compaction of waste increases the density in order to
accommodate larger quantities of waste within the available space.
Moisture content of solid wastes is usually expressed as the weight of moisture per unit
weight of wet material. Moisture increases the weight of solid waste, thereby increasing
the cost of collection and transportation. Therefore moisture content is a critical
component in the economic feasibility of waste treatment and processing methods by
incineration.
Wet weight − Dry weight

Moiture Content (% ) = × 100
Wet weight
Size of waste constituents is important in the design of mechanical separators and

shredders and also in waste treatment process.
Calorific value is the amount of heat generated from combustion of a unit weight of a
substance, expressed as kcal/kg and determined using a bomb calorimeter. Calorific value
indicates its suitability for incineration.
Chemical Characteristics
Knowledge of chemical characteristics of waste is essential in understanding the behavior

of waste all through the waste management system and also in selecting and determining
the efficiency of any treatment process. Further, the characteristics of leachate that could
potentially contaminate the surrounding water resources depend on the waste
characteristics. Chemical characteristics include (i) chemical; (ii) bio-chemical; and (iii)
toxic characteristics.
̇ Chemical characteristics include pH, Nitrogen, Phosphorus and Potassium (N-P-K),

total Carbon, C/N ratio, etc.
̇ Bio-Chemical characteristics include carbohydrates, proteins, natural fibre, and
biodegradable factor, etc.
̇ Toxicity characteristics include heavy metals, pesticides, insecticides, Toxicity test for
Leachates (TCLP), etc.

3-7
CMSWMF
Knowledge of chemical characteristics is essential in selecting and designing the waste

processing and disposal facilities.
3.2.2 Waste handling, sorting, storage, and processing at the source
The second functional element in the solid waste management system is waste handling,
sorting, storage, and processing at the source. Waste handling and sorting involves the
activities associated with management of wastes until they are placed in storage
containers for collection. Handling also encompasses the movement of loaded containers
to the point of collection. Sorting of waste components is an important step in the
handling and storage of solid waste at the source. For example, the best place to separate
waste materials for reuse and recycling is at the source of generation. Households are
becoming more aware of the importance of separating newspaper and cardboard,
bottles/glass, kitchen wastes and ferrous and non-ferrous materials. On-site storage is of
primary importance because of public health concerns and aesthetic consideration.
Unsightly makeshift containers and even open ground storage, both of which are
undesirable, are often seen at many residential and commercial sites. The cost of
providing storage for solid wastes at the source is normally borne by the household in the
case of individuals, or by the management of commercial and industrial properties.
Processing at the source involves activities such as backyard waste composting.
3.2.3 Collection and storage of MSW
Collection and storage of MSW is an important issue which has great impact on the
overall solid waste management. Community / municipal storage based system was
mostly used in our cities. Lately, there is increased stress on door-step collection for
better service delivery and controlling littering as well as unauthorized dumping of
municipal garbage.
The functional element of collection includes not only the gathering of solid wastes and
recyclable materials, but also the transport of these materials, after collection, to the
location where the collection vehicle is emptied. This location may be materials
processing facility, a transfer station, or a landfill disposal site.
3.2.3.1 Door-to-door collection
Current practices of waste collection in residential areas differ from city to city and even
sometimes within the city. Door-to-door collection is not widely practiced. Door-to-door
(or house-to-house collection is the responsibility of the ULBs as per Schedule II,
compliance criteria 1. The local authorities should arrange for primary collection of
waste from sources of waste generation. Door-to-door collection of waste can be carried
out with handcarts, tricycles or any small motorized vehicles having bell or horns as a
means of announcing the arrival of collection staff with active public participation.
Wastes from private societies, multistoried buildings, commercial complexes, etc. are
collected through community bins. Lane wise or door step or community bin waste
collection can be followed for slum areas. Based on the density of population in the area,
work can be assigned either to the sweeper or tricycle staff for collecting wastes. Local
authorities are vested with the responsibility for planning the collection of waste in a
productive manner.
NGOs, private operators may be encouraged by local authorities to collect biodegradable

or recyclable wastes from door steps by making contractual arrangement either with the

3-8
CMSWMF
local bodies or directly with the residents to reduce the financial burden on local bodies.
NGOs may be activated to organize the rag pickers for collection of recyclable waste
either from doorstep in case waste segregation at source by improving the quality of life
and reduce health risk to rag pickers or from streets, bins, and dump yard if not
segregated thereby providing employment to the rag pickers.
Measures, which could be followed for collection of segregated waste include:
̇ Collection of segregated waste

̇ Participation of NGO/private company in collecting wastes from door steps by
reducing the financial burden of local bodies
̇ Use of bells or horns by the tricycle staff with public participation without loss of time
̇ Improving the quality of life of rag pickers from segregating waste at source
̇ Proper use of community bins
̇ Waste collection through tricycles, motorized vehicles
̇ Collection of recyclable waste by rag pickers from shops and establishments soon as
they open in the morning
̇ Collection of vegetable, fruit, meat, fish wastes from the markets on a daily basis
̇ Collection of hotel and restaurant waste on a full cost recovery basis and door step
service may be contracted by local bodies if desired.
̇ Collection of garden waste on weekly basis.
̇ Collection of waste from marriage halls, community halls and commercial centers
daily on full cost recovery basis.
̇ Collection of construction and demolition waste on rate per ton basis as prescribed by
the local bodies. These charges should be paid in advance before removing the waste.
̇ Dairy and cattle shed waste is collected daily and sent to specified municipal storage
containers nearby at regular intervals by local bodies.
3.2.3.2 Segregation of waste
Waste segregation is the first step towards waste diversion and reduction. In order that
the MSW management systems and waste treatment facilities work efficiently and for
extending the life of the waste disposal facilities, it is imperative that waste is properly
segregated early in the systems management. To encourage citizens, municipal
authorities shall organize awareness programmes for segregation of wastes and shall
promote recycling or reuse of segregated materials.
Municipal authorities shall undertake phased programme to ensure community

participation in waste segregation. For this, regular meetings at quarterly intervals may be
arranged by the municipal authorities with representatives of local resident’s welfare
association (RWAs), NGOs and representatives of other informal sector (such as rag
pickers). In the MSW management, the informal sector plays a very important role and it
should be recognized and efforts to improve their work environment could go a long way
is establishing sustainable MSW management systems.
̇ Segregation at the collection point/source reduces the cost of processing and disposal
̇ Separation at site by rag pickers for recycling

3-9
CMSWMF
̇ Incentives for segregation otherwise punitive action
3.2.4 Sorting, processing and transformation of solid waste
The sorting, processing and transformation of solid waste materials is the fourth
functional element. The recovery of sorted materials, processing of solid waste and
transformation of solid waste that occurs primarily in locations away from the source of
waste generation are encompassed by this functional element. At present, sorting of
commingled (mixed) wastes usually occur at a materials recovery facility, transfer
stations, combustion facilities, and disposal sites. Sorting often includes the separation of
bulky items, separation of waste components by size using screens, manual separation of
waste components, and separation of ferrous & non-ferrous metals. . In order to save on
costs of transportation, sorting is best done at the source and different waste items are
collected separately and transported to respective processing facilities by the ULBs or
their designated agents.
The recyclable wastes, if handled and managed properly, could form a major part of
revenue resource. The existence of large number of rag pickers and some of the thriving
recycling industries in many of the large cities is evidence to this fact. The municipal
authorities should recognise this fact and establish appropriate mechanisms for collection
and sale of the recyclable materials without impacting the livelihood of the rag pickers
community and the related industry.
Waste processing is undertaken to recover conversion of products and energy. The

organic fraction of MSW can be transformed by a variety of biological and thermal
processes.
Waste transformation is undertaken to reduce the volume, weight, size or toxicity of

waste without resource recovery. Transformation may be done by a variety of
mechanical (e.g. shredding) / thermal (e.g. incineration) / chemical (e.g. encapsulation)
techniques.
3.2.5 Transfer and transport
The functional element of transfer and transport involves two steps:
̇ the transfer of wastes from the smaller collection vehicles such as tricycles to the
larger transport equipment, usually at transfer station and
̇ the subsequent transportation of wastes from transfer station to the processing or
disposal site.
Transfer station
A transfer station is a solid waste processing site where solid waste is transferred from
one vehicle to another vehicle or to storage device for temporary storage until transferred
to a permanent disposal site approved or permitted by the appropriate Authority or any
other appropriate Authority having jurisdiction over the location of the permanent
disposal site. Location of transfer stations should be well identified after examining traffic
routes for the transportation of wastes for smooth traffic movement and safety of the local
community. To know the waste generation rates and waste characterization regular field
investigations and inspections can be carried out at these transfer stations. The transfer
stations could be designed in a manner that recyclable wastes that are not picked at the

3-10
CMSWMF
primary collection points are segregated, stored and sold or transported to relevant
processing facilities. Transfer stations shall be well equipped with appropriate facilities
and equipments to handle these activities and to avoid pollution.
In general, it is observed that waste collection and transportation costs to 70-90% of the
municipal MSW management budget, leaving a paltry portion for waste processing and
disposal. Hence, in order to achieve economic sustainability, the proponents of IMSWM
systems should need to pay special attention to these two functional elements in
optimising their costs and also develop revenue earning systems for appropriate
processing and treatment facilities.
3.2.6 Disposal
The final functional element in the solid waste management system is disposal. Today
the disposal of wastes by landfilling or uncontrolled dumping of commingled (mixed)
wastes is the ultimate activity of solid waste management, whether they are residential
wastes collected and transported directly to a landfill site, residual materials from
materials recovery facilities, residue from the combustion of solid waste, rejects of
composting, or other substances from various solid waste-processing facilities. Currently,
in a large number of cities do not have any processing facilities and the municipalities
tend to haphazard dumping of wastes all over the dumpsite(s).
In order to mitigate potential impacts of waste disposal, a MSW landfill is to be designed

as an engineered facility used for disposing solid wastes on land without creating
nuisance or hazard to public health or safety, such as breeding of rodents, insects and
contamination of surrounding natural environment, including groundwater and surface
water resources and air quality.
3.3 Technological Aspects
Considering India’s diversity in-respect of cultural, socio-political, geographical,

meteorological and economical aspects; it is unlikely that a single model for MSW
management is acceptable for application across the country. While the location specific
considerations largely influence the choice of applicable technology, there are generic
factors which are more or less in common. The MSW consists of biodegradable and non-
biodegradable waste. Non-biodegradable portion is mostly occupied by inert material but
also include paper, plastics, glass etc., which have either recycling potential.
Therefore, an integrated solution include, proper segregation of the MSW at the source, as
promoted in few pockets i.e. either at the source (preferable) or at the transfer stations and
processing centre, the organic portion can be sent for composting for use as a soil
conditioner/bio fertilizer and the inerts after recovery of valued portion (plastic, glass,
paper etc.) can be sent for landfilling. However, at all the locations, there may not be a
demand for the compost material or the acceptability is less, in such situations, the
intrinsic energy value of the MSW can be tapped by converting it into boiler chargeable
pellets (refuse derived fuel (RDF)). There are also well controlled direct incineration
facilities available in developed countries, where the heat is recovered in the form of hot
water networking, steam supply to the nearby industries etc. As such, when the
composting opportunity is limited, one can explore bio-methanation plants, having least
power consumption and the degradable portion could be converted into methane, which
can then be converted into energy.

3-11
CMSWMF
While there are number of technological options (refer Figure 3-2), each has its distinct
merits and limitations, which guide us to choose appropriate technology for a given local
condition.
Despite the best efforts to reduce, reuse and recycle, there will always be residual waste
requiring disposal. The alternative treatment and disposal technologies are:
̇ Recycle/Reuse
̇ Composting
̇ Anaerobic digestion / Biomethanation
̇ Pelletisation / Refuse Derived Fuel (RDF)
̇ Pyrolysis and Gasification
̇ Incineration
̇ Landfills - Sanitary Landfill / Bioreactor landfill / Secured landfill (for inert waste)
Among the various treatment (or waste diversion) and disposal options as mentioned
above, MoEF has notified composting (windrow composting, vermi composting),
anaerobic digestion, incineration, pelletization and landfill technologies and has given
relevant standards for compost quality, leachate disposal, incineration operations and
emissions and landfill specifications.
Figure 3-2: Technological Options for MSW Management

Note: * Segregation could be site/location/area specific (at source, transportation, collection
points or at disposal locations)
3.3.1 Landfill
Landfills are vital components of any well-designed MSW management system. They are
ultimate repositories of a city’s MSW after all other MSW management options have
been exercised. In many cases, landfill is the only MSW management option available
after the MSW is collected. The safe and effective operation of landfills depends on sound
planning, administration, and management of the entire MSW management system.

3-12
CMSWMF
As per the Municipal Solid Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, strict measures have
been imposed to discourage unscientific land filling/dumping, as these pose problems of:
̇ Pollution in surface run-off during rainfall and leachate discharges to surface water
channels
̇ Pollution of soil/groundwater/down stream aquifers
̇ Unhygienic/unsanitary condition in surrounding area
Landfill can be of the following types:
̇ Sanitary landfill/bioreactor landfill/engineered sanitary landfill – Mixed waste with

landfill gas recovery, leachate collection system and storm water management system
̇ Secured MSW landfill – Inert waste without landfill gas recovery
̇ Monofills – Only one kind of waste
Over the course of years, landfills have evolved from open dumps to highly engineered
facilities designed to isolate waste from the environment. Moisture content which can be
optimized with leachate recirculation has been found to be most critical factor affecting
MSW biodegradation in landfills.
Within the landfill ecosystems, biological, chemical and physical processes promote the
biodegradation of organic wastes in the MSW. The sanitary landfills usually include
environmental barriers such as landfill liners and covers, which exclude moisture that is
essential to waste biodegradation. Consequently, wastes are contained in a “dry tomb”
and remain intact for long periods of time ranging from 30 to 200 years, possibly in
excess of life of the landfill barriers and covers. Liner failure could happen in
conventional dry landfill sometime in future, which can cause serious groundwater and
surface water contamination.
3.3.1.1 Sanitary landfill
Sanitary landfill is the process of dumping of solid waste in a scientifically designed land
area spreading waste in thin layers, compacting to the smallest volume and covering with
soil on daily basis. Sanitary landfill would be good option for disposal of existing/mixed
waste which cannot be segregated. Landfill gas such as methane from the anaerobic
conditions prevailing in the landfill due to the presence of organic material in mixed
waste can be recovered. The facilities at the sanitary landfill include leachate collection
and treatment system, storm water management system avoiding ground and surface
water pollution.
The overall approach to the development of any sanitary or engineered landfill is

formulated to satisfy the regulatory requirements of MoEF, CPHEEO guidelines and with
the objectives of Environmental protection and cost effectiveness. The landfill so
designed should be aimed to minimize the following:
̇ The ingress of water into the landfill

̇ The production of leachate, its subsequent outflow and uncontrolled dispersions into
surrounding aquatic environment
̇ The accumulation, migration and uncontrolled release of landfill gas into the
atmosphere

3-13
CMSWMF
Landfill design concepts and considerations
̇ Collection of Baseline data such as temperature, rainfall, population, socio-economic

status, terrain features, soil characteristics, geological parameters, ground water table,
flood plains, transportation, etc.
̇ Waste management studies generated within the locality – Waste composition,
chemical and physical characteristics, etc.
̇ Field investigations on handling, collection , transportation and disposal of waste
̇ Pre-feasibility studies on availability of methane gases from the proposed landfill
̇ Selection of landfill method based on design life and other baseline factors
−landfill above ground level, landfill below ground level, slope landfill, valley
landfills, combination of slope with others
̇ Estimates on quantity and quality of leachate generated based on precipitation
̇ Defining the landfill foot print area based on the quantity/volume of existing and new
waste and preparing a layout plan
−The layout plan may include access roads, Weigh Bridge, leachate collection
system, waste processing area, storm water management system, administrative
office building, temporary storage and transfer area for waste, drainage facilities,
landfill gas collection and management facilities, safety provisions, etc.
̇ Developing operating methodology – Cell or phase wise operation for progressive use
of landfill
̇ Selection of base liners - it is recommended that for all MSW landfills the following
single liner system be adopted as a minimum requirement
̇ Leachate drainage layer of 30 cm thick made of granular soil having permeability
greater than 10-2 cm/sec
−Protection layer of silty soil of 20 to 30 cm thick
−Geomembrane of thickness 1.5 mm or more
−Compacted clay barrier of 1 m thickness having permeability of less than 10-7
cm/sec
̇ Selection of final covers - vegetative cover, gas venting layer, drainage layer with
appropriate thicknesses
̇ Final cover should be provided a slope of 3 to 5 % for proper surface water drainage.
̇ Designing leachate collection system including perforated HDPE pipes, drainage
layer, leachate collection sumps, leachate trenches, located with appropriate slopes to
maximize the leachate flow in the pipes
− Leachate drainage layer is usually 30 cm thick with slope of 2% or higher
− The pipe spacing is governed by the requirement that the leachate head should not
be greater than drainage layer thickness
− Design of wells/side slopes risers for leachate removal
− Design of holding tank
− Estimating size of pipes, sumps and pumps
− Deciding the leachate management option – leachate discharge to waste water
treatment system, recirculation within the landfill for faster decomposition of
biodegradable waste, evaporation of leachate, treatment of leachate based on its
characteristics,

3-14
CMSWMF
̇ Landfill gas collection and management system with a safe gas venting system to
collect the gas consisting of HDPE pipes. The gas control system involves the
following features
−A containment system which encloses the gas within the site and prevents
migration outside the landfill
− A system (passive or active) for collecting and removing landfill gas from within
the landfill and in particular from the perimeter of the landfill
− A system for flaring or utilizing the collected gas with adequate back up facilities
− Gas vents will be placed 30 to 75 m on the landfill cover and level of methane
will be monitored regularly.
̇ Designing storm water management system for the maximum rainfall intensity to
avoid surface water pollution and include storm water ponds, swales, etc based the
annual rainfall, slope of the area,
̇ Stability of the landfill - stability analysis shall be conducted for the following cases
− Stability of excavated slopes
− Stability of liner system along excavated slopes
− Stability of temporary waste slopes constructed to their full height
− Stability of slopes of above ground portion of completed landfills
− Stability of cover systems in above ground landfills
̇ Equipments for landfill site operations – Weigh bridge, tipper, Compactor, JCB, etc.
their number would depend on the quantity of waste to be handled.
̇ Site infrastructure – Administrative office, store room, Parking area, Weigh Bridge,
access roads, waste segregation area, vehicle cleaning area, waste inspection and
transfer, site fencing, green belt, lighting, etc.
̇ Environmental monitoring plan to ensure optimal performance of the landfill –
Monitoring of environmental parameters like – surface water quality, ground water
quality, leachate quality, ambient air quality during the active and post closure period.
̇ Location criteria for Landfills as per CPHEEO/MSW guidelines
− No landfill within 200 m of a lake or pond
− No landfill within 100 m from river
− No landfill within flood prone areas
− No landfill within 200m of right of way of any state or National Highway.
− No landfill within 500 m from a notified habitant area.
− No landfill within 300 m of public park
− No landfills within wetlands
− No landfill within 20 km of an airport or airbase.
− No landfill in a coastal regulation zone
− No landfill in potentially unstable zones
− Landfill should have a buffer zone around it up to a distance prescribed by the
regulatory agencies.
− Exclude the areas with unstable geological features such as weak soils (organic
soils or soft clay or clay-sand mixtures or soils that lose strength with compaction
or with wetting, etc.)
− Exclude the areas with high population, unique archaeological, historical,
paleontogical and religious interests
− Exclude areas of ground water recharge and extremely high water table zone
− Exclude areas prone to natural hazards (such as volcanic activity, seismic
disturbance and landslides)

3-15
CMSWMF
− Exclude areas with subsidence (such as owing to subsurface mines; water, oil or
gas withdrawal; or solution-prone subsurface)
− Exclude agricultural/forest areas
In exceptional cases, the committee may consider certain sites if it has reasons to believe
that the proposed mitigation measures can ensure anticipated impacts within the
acceptable limits.
3.3.1.2 Bioreactor landfill
Today, the “bioreactor landfill” is one idea that has gained significant attention. A
bioreactor landfill is a sanitary landfill that uses enhanced microbiological processes to
transform and stabilize the readily and moderately decomposable organic waste
constituents within 5 to 10 years of bioreactor process implementation. The bioreactor
landfill significantly increases the extent of organic waste decomposition, conversion
rates and process effectiveness over what would otherwise occur within the landfill. The
“bioreactor landfill” provides control and process optimization, primarily through the
addition of leachate or other liquid amendments, the addition of sewage sludge or other
amendments, temperature control, and nutrient supplementation. Beyond that, bioreactor
landfill operation may involve the addition of air. Based on waste biodegradation
mechanisms, different kinds of “bioreactor landfills” including anaerobic bioreactors,
aerobic bioreactors, and aerobic-anaerobic (hybrid) bioreactors have been constructed and
operated worldwide.
Figure 3-3: Schematic Diagram of Bioreactor Landfill

Aerobic landfill processes are analogous to wet composting operations in which
biodegradable materials are rapidly biodegraded using air, moisture, and increased
temperatures created by biodegradation. First liquid is pumped under pressure into the
waste mass through injection wells in order to maintain moisture content between 50%
and 70% by weight. Once optimal moisture conditions have been reached, air injection
commences. Blowers typically are used to force air into the waste mass through a network
of perforated wells that have been installed in the landfill. The rates of injection of air and
leachate into the landfill are similar to the air and moisture application rates used in many
composting systems. The aerobic process continues until most of the easily and
moderately degradable compounds have been degraded and the compost temperature
gradually decreases during the final phase of “curing” or maturation of the remaining
organic matter.

3-16
CMSWMF
Aerobic bioreactor landfills are operationally more intense than anaerobic bioreactor
landfills; however, post closure costs would be substantially lower due to reductions in
LFG generation and cover settlement.
Anaerobic bioreactor landfills tend to stabilize the landfilled waste rapidly by the addition
of moisture (through recirculation of leachate to uniformly wet the waste mass. Landfill
degradation of MSW frequently is rate-limited by insufficient moisture. The maximum
methane production in landfills occurs at moisture content of 60-80% wet weight, for
which reason, most landfills are well below the optimum moisture content for methane
production. In addition, the liquid absorptive capacity of the waste, in general, is about
16-29% or about 150-300 litres/m3 of waste which represents a large potential capacity
for leachate storage.
Leachate can be injected into the waste via horizontal trenches, vertical wells, surface
infiltration ponds, spraying, and prewetting of waste. Anaerobic bioreactor landfills
initially should be carefully monitored. If the waste is wetted too rapidly, a buildup of
volatile organic acids might lower the leachate pH, inhibiting the methane-producing
bacteria population and reducing the rate of biodegradation. Leachate parameters (such
as pH, volatile organic acids, and alkalinity) and LFG parameters (such as methane
content) are direct indicators of an established methane-producing bacteria population.
Optimal conditions for methane-producing bacteria are a pH of greater than 6.5. A high
volatile organic acids-to-alkalinity ratio (>0.25) indicates that the leachate might have a
low buffering capacity and conditions could soon inhibit methane generation.
The gas content of anaerobic bioreactors is similar to that of conventional landfills, with
methane and carbon dioxide each making up approximately 50% of the total LFG
volume. When the methane content of the LFG exceeds approximately 40%, the
methane-producing bacteria population can be considered established. A decrease in the
methane gas content below 40% is a possible indication that the waste is becoming too
wet or dry. Once the methane-producing bacteria population has become established, the
rate of leachate recirculation may be increased.
Bioreactor landfills are receiving a great deal of attention from environmental

professionals because they offer a sustainable way to achieve increased waste degradation
along with benefits such as reductions in post-closure management. As a result of a
reduced period for landfill leachate and improvement potential for more rapid land reuse
for a recreational facility or industrial park and high volumes of gas is generated which
can be recovered as a potential source of energy. Bioreactor landfills have advantages
over traditional landfills. They reduce the cost of removing and disposing leachate, which
is used on site. Anaerobic bioreactors begin producing methane much more quickly than
landfills designed to inhibit degradation. Bioreactors also gain space as the waste
degrades, meaning more waste can be added.
Table 3-1: Typical Constituents of Municipal Landfill Gas

Constituent Range (Percentage or Concentration)
Major Constituents
Methane 30 to 60 %
Carbon Dioxide 34 to 60 %
Nitrogen 1 to 21 %
Oxygen 0.1 to 2 %
Hydrogen Sulphide 0 to 1 %

3-17
CMSWMF
Constituent Range (Percentage or Concentration)

Major Constituents
Carbon Monoxide 0 to 0.2 %
Hydrogen 0 to 0.2 %
Ammonia 0.1 to 1 %
Trace Constituents
Acetone 0 to 240 ppm
Benzene 0 to 39 ppm
Vinyl Chloride 0 to 44 ppm
Toluene 8 to 280 ppm
Chloroform 0 to 12 ppm
Dichloromethane 1 to 620 ppm
Diethylene Chloride 0 to 20 ppm
Vinyl Acetate 0 to 240 ppm
Trichloroethane 0 to 13 ppm
Perchloroethane 0 to 19 ppm
Others Variable
Source: CPHEEO Manual
3.3.1.3 Secured MSW landfill for inerts
A secured landfill is a carefully engineered depression in the ground (or built on top of
the ground) into which wastes are dumped to avoid pollution to the surrounding
environment. Secured MSW landfill should be restricted to non-biodegradable, inert
waste and other waste not suitable for recycling or for biological processing.
The important features that should be considered before designing a landfill are given in
Schedule III - “Specifications for Landfill sites” of MSW rules 2000 (refer Annexure
III). These include:
̇ Site Selection
̇ Facilities at the site
̇ Specifications for land filling
̇ Pollution prevention
̇ Water quality monitoring
̇ Plantation at landfill site
̇ Closure of landfill site and post care
̇ Special provisions for hilly areas
3.3.2 Composting
Composting is an organic method of producing compost manure by decomposition and

stabilization of organic matter. Composting process (Figure 3-4) is commonly used
method and results in the production of stable compost product reduced in size (when
compared to initial size) and free from offensive odors. Compost is particularly useful as
organic manure which contains plant nutrients (nitrogen, phosphorous and potassium) as
well as micro nutrients which can be utilized for the growth of plants. Composting can be
carried out in two ways - aerobically (with the presence of oxygen) or anaerobically

3-18
CMSWMF
(without the presence of oxygen) or vermi-composting or by any other biological

mechanism.
Figure 3-4: Schematic of Composting Process
By controlling some of the composting influencing factors, natural composting process

could be accelerated. These influencing factors also have impact on quality of compost
produced. Some of the important factors in the composting process are temperature, C/N
ratio, phosphorous, sulphur, moisture, particle size, oxygen flow, etc.
̇ Temperature: Optimum temperature for aerobic composting - 70ºC. High temperature

results in increase rate of biological activity and faster stabilization of the material.
Very high temperature results Nitrogen loss. High temperatures ensure destruction of
pathogens and parasites.
̇ C/N ratio: Optimum ratio is 30. To bring down the ratio sewage and sludge will be
added. To increase the ratio straw, sawdust, paper will be added.
̇ Phosphorous: One of the essential nutrients for plant growth and determines the
quality of compost. Phosphorous concentration might increase as composting
proceeds.
̇ Sulphur: Presence of Sulphur in sufficient quantities can lead to the production of
volatile, odorous compounds. The major sources of Sulphur are two amino acids
(cysteine and methionine). Under well-aerated conditions, the sulfides are oxidized to
sulfates, but under anaerobic conditions, they are converted to volatile organic sulfides
or to H2S, leading to a bad odor. Some compounds like carbon disulfide, carbonyl
sulfide, methyl mercaptum, diethyl sulfide, dimethyl sulfide, and dimethyl disulfide
might also lead to bad odors.
̇ Moisture: Optimum 50 to 60%, very high moisture content will result anaerobic
condition. Higher moisture content is essential for mechanical operated system and the
waste contains high percentage of fibrous material.
̇ Oxygen and aeration: In case of aerobic process, helps to decompose the organic
matter at a faster rate. However, care must be taken not to provide more oxygen which
might dry the system and slow down the composting process.

3-19
CMSWMF
̇ Particle size: Smaller particles produce homogenous particle size which helps to
maintain optimum temperatures. But too fine particle may not allow air to flow into
the piles.
High quality compost would have the following physical and chemical properties.
Table 3-2: Physical and Chemical Properties of High Quality Compost

Property Values
Physical Properties
Density 500-800 g/L
Water content 30-45%
Granulation size fine grained 4-12m, coarse grained 12-40 mm
Low content of foreign substances and Foreign substances < 0.5% stones < 5%
stones
Chemical Properties
Nutrient content should be within the N: 0.5 to 1.8
following values (% TS / % Dry P2O5: 0.4 to 1.0
Matter)
K2O: 0.6 to 1.8
MgO: 0.7 to 3.0
CaO: 3.0 to 12.0
Salinity 1.0-8.0 g kCl/L
pH 7–8
Content of organic matter Measured as ignition loss - 20-50%
Matured compost - 20% organic matter
Raw compost - >40% organic matter
Low content of heavy metals Lead : 50 to 100
Cadmium: 0.1 to 1.0
Chrome: 26 to 60
Copper: 30 to 50
Nickel: 10 to 30
Mercury: 0.1 to 0.5
Zinc: 150 to 350
There are various methods of composting and the approach in selecting the appropriate
method of composting depends on time to complete composting, the material and volume
to be decomposed, space available, the availability of resources (labour, finances, etc.)
and the quality of finished product required. In general composting process consists of
four decomposition phases when a suitable environment is provided:
̇ Mesophilic phase (I): In this phase slightly rotted material exists, in which mainly
bacterial degradation of easily degradable substances takes place. The temperature
rises up to 42oC.
̇ Thermophilic phase (II): In this phase fresh compost is produced where further
degradation of easily degradable materials as well as degradation of cellulose, caused
by thermophilic fungi and bacteria. The temperature in this phase rises up to 65oC
which causes self limitation or decrease in reproduction of micro organisms.

3-20
CMSWMF
̇ Cooling phase (III): Finished compost is produced in this phase, where degradation of
cellulose by fungi and bacteria, and formation of humus substances takes place. A
decrease in microbial activity and temperature occur in this phase.
̇ Maturing phase (IV): Matured compost is produced in this phase, with further decrease
of temperature to the surrounding temperature. Very low microbial activity with
further formation of humus substances and stabilization take place.
3.3.2.1 Aerobic composting
In aerobic process, aerobic micro-organisms oxidize organic compounds to carbon-

dioxide, nitrite and nitrate. This carbon is used as a source of energy while nitrogen is
recycled (high nitrogen waste will grow bacteria). Due to this exothermic reaction the
temperature of the mass rises and thus the organic waste will break down quickly and is
free from odour. Aerobic process needs high maintenance in monitoring air, moisture and
high temperatures in the system. Some of the basic aerobic composting techniques are
indore composting, windrow composting, vermi composting, in-vessel composting, etc.
Aerobic composting of MSW is commonly carried out in windrows.
i. Indore method
In this method composting is done in pits which involves filling of alternate layers of
MSW and night soil. The pit will be completely filled and a final soil layer is laid to
prevent fly breeding, entry of rain water and for conservation of released energy.
However, to ensure aerobic condition the material is turned at specific intervals for which
a 60 cm strip on the longitudinal side of the pit is kept vacant. For starting the turning
operation, the first turn is manually given using long handled rakes 4 to 7 days after
filling. The second turn is given after 5 to 10 more days. Further turning is normally not
required and the compost is ready in 2 to 4 weeks. This method stabilizes the material in
shorter time and needs lesser space. As no odorous gases are generated in this process, it
is environment friendly & hence commonly preferred. While the organic matter is
stabilized during the composting process, the moisture content also changes. The non
decomposable materials are rejected. Hence the quantity of compost is much lesser than
the input and is normally around 50% and the exact value depends upon the
characteristics of the input material.
ii. Windrow composting
Windrow composting is widely used in India at a large scale as the climatic condition is
arid. Therefore, in areas where higher ambient temperatures are available, composting in
open triangular or trapezoidal windrows is to be preferred. Windrow composting is the
process of decomposing organic materials to form stabilized organic matter. It is defined
as the controlled, heat dependent, microbiological process of decomposing organic
materials into a biologically stable, humus-rich material. Compost is used in agriculture,
horticulture, home gardening, land reclamation, wetland mitigation, and erosion
prevention to help rebuild soil organic matter and to provide a good medium for plant
growth. The major obstacles to this technology is the limited markets for compost used
and environmental concerns about industrial or toxic wastes that may enter the waste
stream and end up in the compost.
Windrow area should be with an impermeable base made from concrete of compacted
clay of 40 to 50 cm thick. The permeability co-efficient should be less than 10(-7) cm/sec.
A slope of 1-2 % should be maintained in the base. The base should be circled with a

3-21
CMSWMF
lined drain for collection of leachate or surface runoff. Windrow composting is a two
phase process.
Phase I: Rotting
̇ This phase starts with transferring the mechanically treated waste to a specific area
designed especially for windrows. A coarse material such as wood chips is spread over
that area to enhance ventilation and drainage at the bottom of the windrow, and to
prevent saturation that might cause anaerobic conditions.
̇ Triangular or trapezoidal windrows are made parallel to each other with enough
distance in between. The length and the number of windrows would depend on the
quantity of organic waste that the plant is receiving. However, the following
dimensions shall be maintained.
− Length of windrow = 100 - 130 m
− Width of windrow = 3 m (base)
− Height of windrow = 1.5 m
̇ Turning of waste and addition of water by special machine to provide the oxygen and
water necessary for aerobic decomposition. Air can be pumped into the waste for good
ventilation (forced aeration). The waste remains in windrows for 12 weeks to
decompose with turning and addition of water twice a week during the first three
weeks and once a week for the remaining period. Windrows should be covered with
special cover to prevent evaporation but without preventing air intrusion.
Phase II: Rotting
̇ In this phase, the fresh compost produced in the first phase is transferred to another
area and piled up and kept to mature for a period of four weeks, without turning and
water addition. Matured and dry compost (water content = 25 - 30%) is produced.
̇ The matured compost is separated into two fractions, fine and coarse by sieving. The
fine fraction is packed in suitable quantities according to it purpose of used. The
coarse fraction is sold without packaging.
Figure 3-5: Steps in Composting

3-22
CMSWMF
Figure 3-6: Composting Procedure
iii. Vermi-composting
In vermi-composting, the aerobic decomposition of organic matter is by using micro-

organisms. It is the use of selected species of earthworms to help decompose and
transform organic wastes into useful compost. In this method, earthworms play important
role in fragmenting, mixing and aerating the waste. There are various methods of vermi-
composting, making it impossible to present a definitive guide to best practice.
Vermi-composting is carried out at relatively low temperatures (under 25°C), compared

with composting, where pile temperatures can exceed 70°C. With vermi-composting it is
vitally important to keep low temperature; otherwise the earthworms will be killed. It is
the joint action between earthworms and the aerobic microorganisms that thrive in these
lower temperatures (mesophilic) that breaks down the waste. Hence it is common with
vermi-composting systems to apply waste frequently in thin layers, a few centimeters
thick, to beds or boxes containing earthworms in order to prevent overheating and to help
keep the waste aerobic. It is difficult to directly compare composting with vermi-
composting in terms of the time taken to produce stable and mature compost products.
With vermi-composting, particles of waste spend only a few hours inside the earthworm’s
gut and most of the decomposition is actually carried out by microorganisms either before
or after passing through the earthworm. Hence, earthworms accelerate waste
decomposition rather than being the direct agent.
With in-vessel and windrow composting it usually takes at least six to twelve weeks to
produce stable compost and research suggests that vermi-composting takes around the
same time. However, processing rates crucially depend on many factors such as the
system being used, the processing temperature and other factors, the nature of the wastes
and the ratio of earthworms to waste.
One advantage that vermi-composting has over other composting procedures is that a net
excess of earthworms can be produced and these may be harvested for a variety of
purposes. It should be noted that it can take many months or even years to build up a large
working population of earthworms capable of vermi-composting significant quantities of
waste. Vermi-composting does have one serious disadvantage and this relates to the
destruction of human and plant pathogens that can be present in some wastes. Destruction
of most pathogens is more easily achieved in windrow composting due to the high
operating temperatures and the intense microbial reactions taking place. Although the

3-23
CMSWMF
destruction of human pathogens has also been shown to be very effective with vermi-
composting, elimination of pathogens requires very effective management of the vermi-
composting process. It is often recommended that wastes, such as sewage sludge, which
are known to contain human pathogens, are either pre-composted before vermi-
composting or else the resulting casts should be sterilized before use.
Scientific and technical aspects of vermi-composting
A number of factors affect the life cycle of earthworms and hence determine the rate of
waste processing, vermi-compost output and the number of earthworms that are produced.
In particular, temperature, moisture, waste characteristics and earthworm density are all
important. There is little doubt that maintaining vermi-composting systems at a constant
temperature of around 20°C would give maximum vermi-compost output and ensure
maximum earthworm growth and reproduction. In Indian conditions, if vermi-composting
is carried out they are likely to produce significantly lower higher than for beds operating
under optimum conditions.
Earthworms prefer material that is fairly damp, in the range 70-90% moisture. Hence
there is usually more of a need to add more moisture to the waste material before and
during vermi-composting compared with traditional composting. Since moisture is not
driven off by high temperatures, as with composting, the finished vermi-compost can be
quite moist, and often the conversion of waste to vermi-compost results in only a small
weight loss, typically around 10%.
Earthworms will process more waste and will grow and reproduce more quickly when fed
with some wastes. Sewage sludge, animal manures, paper pulps, processed food slurries,
brewery waste, mixed household waste, garden and vegetable wastes and many other
biodegradable materials have been used on a large scale to produce vermi-compost and to
breed earthworms. Vermi-composting is similar to traditional composting in the sense
that materials with carbon to nitrogen (C: N) ratios in the range 15 – 35:1 are considered
to be suitable. In general, fresh, finely shredded organic materials which, decompose
easily will sustain the greatest numbers and diversity of microorganisms and this in turn
will result in rapid decomposition and produce the highest earthworm growth and
reproduction. The density of earthworms in any vermi-composting system is related to the
rate of waste processing and if vermi-compost production is the main aim then it is
advisable to maintain a high density of mature earthworms. However, high earthworm
densities will eventually reduce the number of earthworms produced, by regulating
growth and reproduction. Hence, if the main aim is to produce a net surplus of
earthworms, comparatively low densities of immature earthworms should be used.
Equally, regular harvesting of earthworms and cocoons should be carried out to maintain
this low density at all times.
iv. Rapid composting methods
Traditional composting methods take as long as 4 to 8 months to produce finished

compost, while rapid composting process offer possibilities for reducing the processing
period up to three weeks. A variety of approaches and their combinations have been used
to hasten the composting process, which include active windrows, passive windrows,
aerated static windrow, in-vessel composting, vermin-composting, etc. Most of these
methods are based on aerobic process.

3-24
CMSWMF
(a) Active windrows
Organic waste is placed in long windrows and turned manually or mechanically by front
end loaders or turners. The optimum height and width of the windrows depends on the
type of equipment used to turn them. The mechanical equipment is so selected to compact
the composting material and results in less composting periods and good consistent
quality product. Frequency of turning can be determined by knowing the temperature
within the windrows.
(b) Passive windrows
Compost in windrows is produced by natural aeration over long periods of time. Porosity
of the initial mix, uniform product mixing and particle size greatly improve the speed of
the process and product quality. This method eliminates the need for turning by supplying
air to the composting materials through perforated pipes (with pipe ends open) embedded
in each windrow. Air flows into the pipes and through the windrow because of the
chimney effect created as the hot gases rise upward out of the windrow. The windrow
should be well insulated with covering material. As the composting material is not turned
after the windrows are formed, they must be thoroughly mixed before they are placed in
the windrow. During construction of windrow, compaction should be avoided while
mixing of materials. Aeration pipes are placed on top of the compost base. When the
composting period is completed, the pipes are simply pulled out, and the base material is
mixed with the compost.
(c) Aerated static windrows
Compost is produced in windrows with mechanical aeration and air is supplied through
perforated plastic pipes, aeration cones or a perforated floor. Aeration is accomplished
either by forcing or drawing air through the compost pile. Aeration systems can be
relatively simple using electrical motors, fans and ducting, or they can be more
sophisticated incorporating various sensors and alarms. This system of aeration requires
electricity at the site and appropriate ventilation fans, ducts and monitoring equipment.
The monitoring equipment determines the timing, duration and direction of airflow. The
pile should be placed after the floors are first covered with a layer of a bulking agent,
such as wood chips or finished compost. The material to be composted is then added and
a topping layer of finished compost applied to provide insulation.
(d) In-vessel composting
In-vessel composting refers to a group of methods which confine the composting

materials within a building, container, or vessel. In-vessel methods rely on a variety of
forced aeration and mechanical turning techniques to speed up the composting process.
There are a variety of in-vessel methods with different combinations of vessels, aeration
devices, and turning mechanisms. Some of the in-vessel methods are bin/box, channels,
rotating drums, etc.
Aeration of the material is accomplished by continuous agitation using aerating machines

which operate in concrete bays or by fans providing air flow from ducts built into
concrete floors. The main advantages of the in-vessel system over other methods are;
more efficient composting process and a decreased number of pathogens resulting in a
safer and more valuable end product. In-vessel composting can maintain a rapid
decomposition process year-round regardless of external ambient conditions.

3-25
CMSWMF
Disadvantages of the enclosed vessel method include high capital and operational costs
due to the use of computerized equipment and skilled labour. In-vessel composters are
generally more automated than active or static pile systems and can produce a top quality
finished product on a consistent basis.
3.3.2.2 Anaerobic composting
Anaerobic composting is also called anaerobic digestion or bio-gasification. This

technology is the biological conversion of biodegradable organic materials in the absence
of oxygen at temperatures lower than 93°C. Therefore very slow working bacteria will be
growing which does not require any air and the compost may take long period to break
down. This breakdown process is carried out by anaerobic micro organisms that convert
carbon-containing compounds to a biogas (primarily methane and carbon dioxide). A
very small quantity of energy is released during this process and the temperature of the
composting mass does not raise much. This is a reduction process and final product is
subjected to minor oxidation when applied on land. The residue is a stabilized organic
material that can be used as a soil amendment. Anaerobic composts may have awful
smell. Anaerobic digestion is suitable for the bio-degradables, including food wastes, yard
waste, animal wastes, and some paper fibers. Bangalore method is an example of
anaerobic composting
Bangalore Method
This is an anaerobic method conventionally carried out in pits. Formerly the waste was
anaerobically stabilized in pits where alternate layers of MSW and night soil were laid.
The pit is completely filled and a final soil layer is laid to prevent fly breeding, entry of
rain water into the pit and for conservation of the released energy. The material is allowed
to decompose for 4 to 6 months after which the stabilized material is taken out and used
as compost. The Bangalore method requires longer time for stabilization of the material
and hence needs larger land space. The gases generated in this anaerobic process also
pose smell & odour problems.
3.3.3 Biomethanation / anaerobic digestion
Biomethanation of MSW in India is gaining importance at a considerable amount, but

only a few local government bodies could initiate this technology, as the capital
investment is very high for the biomethanation plant. Biomethanation is the process of
conversion of organic matter in the waste (liquid or solid) to biomethane (sometimes
referred to as “biogas”) and manure by microbial action in the absence of air, known as
“anaerobic digestion”.
The solid waste and the slaughterhouse waste is first mixed with raw sewage and
conveyed to the primary digester. Effluent from the primary digester is sent to the
secondary digester after stabilization. The raw gas generated from the primary and the
secondary digester is then sent to the gas balloons for storage purpose. The excess
effluent from the secondary digester will be re-circulated back to the primary digester for
further generation of gas. The gas thus stored in the gas balloon is passed through a
scrubber where gases like H2S and SO2 and moisture are removed from the gas. This
clean gas is conveyed under pressure to the Power Generating Engine to produce power
supply. The excess sludge from the secondary digester is conveyed to the centrifuge to
separate the liquid and solids for further disposal.

3-26
CMSWMF
Production of Methane from MSW by this process involves three basic steps:
̇ First step involves preparation of organic fraction of MSW, which includes receiving,
sorting, separation and size reduction.
̇ Second step involves addition of moisture & nutrients (e.g., sewage sludge), blending,
pH adjustment to about 6.7, heating of the slurry to between 55 to 60oC, and anaerobic
digestion in a reactor with continuous flow, in which the contents are well mixed for a
period of time varying from 5 to 10 days.
̇ Third step involves capture, storage and if necessary, separation of gas components
evolved during digestion process.
3.3.4 Pelletization and refuse derived fuel
Pellets are formed from the combustible portion of MSW. Pelletization initially involves
segregation of waste into high and low calorific value materials and then shredded and
compacted into pellets with the required bulk density and later can be dried to get the
appropriate heat value. These pellets so produced have a calorific value of 4000 Kcal/kg
of the product which is quite close to that of coal and therefore is a good substitute for
coal, wood, etc. to RDF plant. Comparatively, pellets have advantages over coal and are
clean, energy efficient, eco-friendly fuel for coal based industries, power generating
industries. Additional advantage of Pellets is easy storage and transportation.
RDF can be produced from MSW through a sequence of processes consisting of:
̇ Separation at source
̇ Sorting or mechanical separation
̇ Size reduction (shredding, chipping and milling)
̇ Blending
̇ Drying and pelletizing
̇ Packaging
̇ Storage
The MSW is initially dried to reduce its moisture content. It is then screened to remove
inerts such as sand, silt and soil. It is then processed to remove and separate
incombustible materials such as glass, metal and other contraries and wet organic matter
such as garden and food waste containing high moisture and high ash material.
Sometimes the waste is further subjected to air separation and then shredded. The reduced
size material can be directly used in boilers on site. If the material is to be used offsite, it
is usually densified into pellets and then transported to the place where it is to be used.
RDF can be burned for fuel by itself or co-fired with other fuels.
Previously, few RDF plants were setup with coal fired boilers when RDF was used along
with coal but now due to strict emission standards it is burnt in dedicated boilers designed
and built specifically for RDF.
Some of the options of using RDF from MSW to energy include:
̇ Co-combustion in coal fired boilers

̇ Co-incineration in cement kilns
̇ Co-gasification with coal or biomass

3-27
CMSWMF
3.3.5 Incineration
Incineration is a process of controlled combustion for burning of wastes and residue

containing combustible material. Carbon-dioxide, water vapor, ash and non-combustible
materials are end products. The heat generated during incineration is recovered and
utilized for production of steam, heating water and generating electricity. Incineration is
highly exothermic. Incineration is used to achieve maximum volume reduction of solid
waste and when there is shortage of landfilling facilities.
The emissions from incineration of solid waste are of health concern; however it is not
practiced frequently in developing countries. Incineration being a notified technology in
the Ministry, as per MoEF MSW rules 2000, incinerators shall meet the operating and
emission standards as listed in Table 3.3. In order to achieve the emission standards
suitably designed pollution control devices shall be installed or retrofitted with the
incinerator. It is also to be noted that chlorinated plastics shall not be taken for
incineration and also low sulphur fuel or diesel shall be used as fuel in the incinerator.
Table 3-3: Operating and Emission Standards for Incinerators
Operating Standards
Combustion Efficiency At least 99%
Computation of C.E = (%CO2 x 100) / (%CO2 + %CO)
Combustion Efficiency
Emission Standards
Parameters Concentration mg/Nm3 at (12% CO2 Correction)
Particulate Matter 150 mg/Nm3
Nitrogen Oxides 450 mg/Nm3
HCl 50 mg/Nm3
Minimum stack height 30m
above the ground
Volatile Organic Not > 0.01%
Compounds in ash
Figure 3-7: Cross Section of a Mass Burn Incineration Plant

Source: Cardiff University, Waste Research Station

3-28
CMSWMF
Note: 1. Waste holding area/pit; 2. Grab; 3. Feed hoppers; 4. Moving grate; 5. Hydraulic arm to
push the waste; 6. Air holding chamber; 7. Ash quenching; 8. Boiler; 9. Flue gas cleaning system;
10. Flue gas cleaning system; 11. Stack.
It is unlikely that specialized high temperature incineration or waste to energy plant

would be economic for the small refuse volumes. More basic methods of incineration
such as pit incinerators may be appropriate for burning selected waste materials in order
to reduce volumes to landfill.
3.3.6 Pyrolysis and Gasification
Pyrolysis
MSW is initially shredded, screened and separated from incombustible matter before
using in Pyrolysis process. Pyrolysis is a thermal process where organic materials present
in the waste are broken down under pressure and at temperatures greater than 925°F in
the absence of oxygen to become gas comprising smaller molecules (Syngas). Along with
syngas, char and oil are also produced. The gases produced comprise carbon monoxide
(25%), hydrogen and hydrocarbons (15%) and carbon dioxide and nitrogen (60%). Then,
syngas is cleaned and burned in internal combustion (IC) engine generator sets or turbines
to produce electricity.
The syngas produced can be utilized in boilers, gas turbines, or internal-combustion

engines to generate electricity or be further processed into organic chemicals.
Thermal cracking and condensation reactions produce gaseous, liquid and solid fractions.
Three major component fractions resulting from Pyrolysis are:
̇ Gas Stream - Syngas comprising of H2, CH4, CO,

̇ Tar and/or oil stream - liquid at room temperature containing chemicals such as acetic
acid, acetone and methanol
̇ A char consists of almost pure Carbon plus any inert material that may have entered
the process.
NEERI studies reveal that out of the heat contained in the waste, 67 -75% is recovered.
However, when the heat recovered is compared to that provided as input, there is a heat
loss due to endothermic nature of reaction. Table 3-4 provides the results of one such a
typical study.
Table 3-4: Case Study – Pyrolysis of Indian MSW

Input
1 Heat energy in 1 kg dry MSW 2775 kcal/kg
2 External electrical energy - 4300 kcal. 20% heat losses: Net 3440 kcal/kg
heat transferred - 0.8 x 4300
Total 6215 kcal/kg
Output
1 0.35 kg Char + 0.25 kg Oil + 0.30 kg Gas + 0.10 kg water = Total
2 (2100 kcal) + (2000 kcal)+ (1200 kcal) = 5300 kcal
3 Net heat loss (Endothermic Effect) = 6215 - 5300 = 0915 kcal

3-29
CMSWMF
4 So, 915 X 100 / 6215 = 91500 / 6215 = 14.8% of input

5 Energy recovery = Heat Value of product - external heat input 1860
(5300 kcal - 3440 kcal)from an input of 2775 kcal from MSW
6 % recovery of energy = 1860/2775 67%
The proportion of these constituents changes with the rate of heating, maximum
temperature and retention at maximum temperature. It is known that the high temperature
pyrolysis yields a larger proportion of gas and lesser proportion of liquids.
In developed countries, paper, plastics etc. form more than 50% of the waste resulting in a
large proportion of gaseous as well as liquid products which have a heating value and can
be easily used. However, the Indian MSW has a low projection of paper, plastics, etc. and
hence its successful adoption is difficult. In developed countries a substantial proportion
of the total cost is often spent on processing. Unfortunately, more than 80% of the total
cost of MSW Management in India is spent on collection and transportation, and the
expenditure on processing is meager.
Gasification
Gasification is the partial combustion of organic matter in the presence of restricted

quantity of oxygen or air at high temperatures (than Pyrolysis). The gas so produced is
producer gas. The producer gas is cleaned and burned in internal combustion (IC) engine
generator sets or turbines to produce electricity.
The processes are carried out at a temperature between 500°C -1000°C to produce three
component streams:
̇ Gas - Producer gas which is a mixture of combustible gases such as H2, CO, CO2 and
CH4 and some hydrocarbons
̇ Liquid - It contains tar, pitch, light oil and low boiling organic chemicals like acetic
acid, acetone, methanol etc.
̇ Char - It consists of elemental carbon along with the inert materials in the incoming
waste.
3.3.7 Recycling/reuse
Recycling refers to the collection, separation, processing, or use of materials that would
otherwise become solid waste. The activities included under the term recycling are
numerous, including the initial collection of materials; marketing those raw materials;
producing products from those materials; and use of those products in the marketplace.
Some of the materials from MSW that would be recycled are plastics, metals, paper,
glass, rubber, rags, leather, etc. the recovery of the materials will reduce the need to use
natural resources directly and may reduce emissions from extraction and processing of
raw materials. On the other hand, there could be environmental or health effects from
reprocessing materials which have been taken out of the waste stream. These could offset
the benefits of recycling to some extent.
3.3.8 Comparative analysis of technologies
A comparative analysis of the available technologies is summarized in Table 3-5.

3-30
CMSWMF
Table 3-5: Comparative Analysis of the Available Energy Technologies
Item Composting Sanitary/ Bio-Methanation Incineration Pelletisation Pyrolysis

Bioreactor
Landfill
Requirement for segregation Very high Low Very High Low High High
Potential for Direct Energy No
Moderate No Yes No Yes
Recovery
Overall efficiency in case of a High
Low High Low Low Moderate
small set up
Efficiency in case of high High Moderate to
High Very low low Low
moisture High
Land requirement High Moderate in case
of bioreactor
landfill because,
at least in theory,
the landfilled
material can be
removed once
Low to Moderate Low Low Moderate
the
contamination
potential from
the landfill is
negligible and
same site can be
reused.
Ability to tackle bio-medical No Yes (to some
No No Yes No
and low-hazard waste extent)
Concerns for toxicity of -
Low - High - -
product
Leachate Pollution High, if not Moderate to Moderate to high in case None None None
routed properly high depending effluent is not properly

3-31
CMSWMF
for treatment upon the leachate treated or utilized

recycling and
control systems
Concern for Atmospheric Moderate High (not easy to Moderate (easy to
Low Low Moderate
Pollution control) control)
Capital Investment High High High High Moderate unknown
Table 3-6: Influencing Parameters and Constraints of Various MSW Technologies
Technology Influencing Parameters Limitations Benefits Environmental Concerns

̇ Segregation of organics ̇ Receiving of ̇ Reduces volume of organic waste fraction ̇ The final product which is
from MSW unsegregated waste of MSW by 50 to 75 % used as manure in fields
̇ Quantity of organic ̇ No yield consistency ̇ Stabilizes organic fraction of MSW can contaminate the soil if
matter (varying compsot ̇ Potential usable product as output not tested for toxic
̇ Moisture content quality) ̇ Potential of co-composting operations with elements before sale.
̇ Market demand ̇ Slow process other waste streams ̇ Emissions of Particulate
̇ Location of the facility ̇ Sound marketing ̇ Reduces organic waste to landfill thereby matter when
arrangements are reducing the production of leachate and moving/handling the
required gases from landfill waste
Composting
̇ Sensitive process – ̇ Highly useful product for crop ̇ Odour problems
requires good improvement
segregation and ̇ Value addition to waste resource
maintenance ̇ Sustainable approach
̇ Limited acceptance by
the farmers and
sometimes even by the
city parks and gardens
department
̇ Quantities of existing ̇ Land area requirement ̇ The gas produced can be utilized for power ̇ Greatly polluted surface
Landfill and future waste ̇ Significant transportation generation or as domestic fuel for direct runoff during rainfall
̇ Waste characterization costs to the landfill site thermal applications ̇ Soil and ground water
̇ Waste segregation ̇ Utilization of methane ̇ Reduced GHG emissions aquifers may get

3-32
CMSWMF

̇ Waste collection and may not be feasible for contaminated by polluted
transportation remote sites; leachate in the absence of
̇ Site selection/location ̇ Cost of pre-treatment to proper leachate collection
̇ Leachate estimates upgrade the gas may be and treatment system
̇ Potential for methane high; ̇ Spontaneous ignition due
gas ̇ Lack of financial to possible methane
̇ Lining for Landfill resources with municipal concentrations
̇ Quantity of new waste corporations/urban local ̇ In case of inefficient gas
in case of existing Bodies. recovery process yielding
landfills ̇ Lack of conducive policy from total amount of gas
guidelines from State actually generated, green
Govts. in respect of house gases may escape to
allotment of land, supply the atmosphere
of garbage and power
purchase / evacuation
facilities, etc.
̇ Quantities of existing ̇ Risk of fire and ̇ More rapid waste and leachate stabilization ̇
and future waste explosive gas mixtures than anaerobic bioreactor
̇ Waste characterization through addition of air to ̇ Landfill airspace savings (increased rate of
̇ Waste segregation landfill landfill settlement)
̇ Waste collection and ̇ Additional cost will be ̇ Reduction of methane, a GHG generation
transportation incurred supplying by 50-90%
̇ Site selection/location power required to add air ̇ Capability of reducing leachate volumes by
Aerobic Bioreactor Landfill ̇ Leachate generation to the landfill over that up to 100% due to evaporation
rate to maintain required for the ̇ Potential for landfill mining and
moisture content anaerobic bioreactor. sustainability
̇ Potential for methane ̇ Although methane ̇ Degradation of some recalcitrant chemicals
gas emission may decrease, and ammonia
̇ Lining for Landfill but other hazardous and
noxious chemicals e.g.
̇ Equipment efficiency
nitrous oxide may be
̇ Operational issues emitted

3-33
CMSWMF

̇ ̇ Increased cost of basic ̇ leachate storage within the waste mass, ̇
piping, pumps and ̇ landfill airspace savings (increased rate of
electricity for leachate landfill settlement),
recirculation ̇ more rapid waste stabilization than
̇ The generation of conventional landfills,
methane, a green house ̇ increased methane generation rates (200-
gas is increased 250% increase typical) and thus suitable
significantly increased for waste to energy programs,
and can lead to more ̇ potential for limited landfill mining, and
environmental problems ̇ lower postclosure costs.
if not properly handled.
̇ Greenhouse Gas Abatement
̇ Sealed system can result ̇ Environmental Protection
in plastic surface liners
̇ Leachate Strength Reduction
ballooning and tearing
̇ Rapid Settlement
̇ Rapid surface settlement
can result in ponding ̇ Reduced Postclosure Maintenance costs
Anaerobic Bioreactor and Lowe Risks
Landfill ̇ Short circuiting occurs
during leachate
recirculation, preventing
achievement of field
capacity for much of the
landfill
̇ Continuous pumping of
leachate at two to three
times the generation rate
is necessary to avoid
head on the liner build up
̇ A more permeable
intermediate cover may
be more efficient in
rapidly reaching field
capacity than leachate
recirculation

3-34
CMSWMF

̇ Low permeability
intermediate cover and
heterogeneity of the
waste leads to side seeps
̇ Accelerated gas
production may lead to
odors if not
accommodated by
aggressive LFG
collection
̇ Leachate infiltration and
collection piping are
vulnerable to irregular
settling and clogging
̇ Waste is less permeable
than anticipated
̇ Increased condensate
production led to short
circuiting of moisture
into landfill gas
collection pipes
̇ Storage must be provided
to manage leachate
during wet weather
periods
̇ Conversely, leachate
may not be sufficient in
volume to completely
wet waste, particularly
for aerobic bioreactors
̇ Increased internal pore
pressure due to high

3-35
CMSWMF

moisture content may
lead to reduced factor of
safety against slope
stability and must be
considered during the
design process
̇ Channeling leads to
immediate leachate
production, however
long term recirculation
increases uniform
wetting and declining
leachate generation as
the waste moisture
content approaches field
capacity
̇ Moisture Content ̇ Higher capital costs ̇ Completes natural cycle of carbon ̇ Gas handling
̇ Organic/Volatile matter ̇ Not suitable for wastes ̇ Recovery of energy & production of fully ̇ Fire & safety measures
̇ C/N ratio containing less stabilized organic manure ̇ Proper operation of drying
̇ Segregation of Organic biodegradable matter ̇ Control / Reduction of Greenhouse Gas beds
waste ̇ Non-availability of emissions like Methane ̇ Leachate collection &
̇ Quantity of organic segregated waste in the ̇ Complete destruction of Pathogens through treatment from sludge
matter municipality anaerobic digestion - No transmission of drying beds
Biomethanation / Anaerobic ̇ Market demand ̇ Lack of financial disease through vectors
Digestion resources with ULB’s ̇ Only pre-processing rejects - No post-
and municipal processing rejects
corporations ̇ Reduced burden on Landfills
̇ Requires waste ̇ Conversion efficiency: 60 to 70 %
segregation for ̇ Clean combustion, compact burning, high
improving digestion thermal efficiency and good degree of
efficiency control
̇ Environment friendly because of firewood

3-36
CMSWMF

savings and reduction in CO2 emissions
̇ Can be done on a small scale
̇ Generation of gaseous fuel
̇ Free from odor, fly menace, visible
pollution
̇ Production of biogas and high grade soil
conditioner
̇ Very low power requirement unlike
aerobic composting, where sieving and
turning of waste pile for supply of oxygen
is necessary
̇ Modular construction of plant and closed
treatment needs less land area
̇ Segregation of ̇ Competitive with large ̇ RDF can be processed to half the calorific ̇ Air pollution from
Organics from MSW mass burn plants value of coal emission of smaller
̇ Quantity of organic ̇ Requires secure markets ̇ Lower level of heavy metals in RDF quantities of organics,
matter for fuel ̇ RDF can be co-fired with other fuels in a particulates, and metals
̇ Moisture content ̇ Processing involves high variety of industrial boilers ̇ Water pollution from
Pelletization / Refuse Derived ̇ Market demand electrical power ̇ Process is self-sustaining with value leachate
Fuel ̇ Location of the facility consumption and addition
maintenance ̇ Resource recovery for economic gain
̇ Space requirement for ̇ Low risk technology
fuel production ̇ Low cost option for MSW treatment and
̇ Can cause damage to processing.
boilers and pipe work
than other fuels
̇ Calorific value ̇ Excessive moisture and ̇ Achieves maximum volume reduction ̇ Emissions - particulates,
̇ Moisture content inert content in waste ̇ Incineration is a standard hygienic SOx and NOx emissions,
Incineration ̇ Organic/volatile matter affects net energy operation compared to open burning chlorinated compounds,
Fixed carbon recovery; ̇ Heat generated can be utilized for ranging from HCl to
̇ Total Inerts ̇ Auxiliary fuel support production of steam / hot water / electricity organo-compounds such
may be necessary to – revenue generation as dioxins, and heavy

3-37
CMSWMF

sustain combustion; ̇ Less land is required and minimal burden metals
̇ High capital and O&M on landfills ̇ Toxic metals may
costs. ̇ Most suitable for high calorific value concentrate in ash;
̇ Most wastes which can waste, etc. ̇ Fumes from low
safely be burned (i.e. ̇ Relatively noiseless and odorless temperature incineration
vegetation, cardboard, ̇ Thermal energy recovery for direct heating of mixed municipal
paper) may be more or power generation refuse. These fumes will
useful if recovered for ̇ Can be located within city limits, reducing contain a number of toxic
mulching and soil cost of waste transportation compounds, e.g. from
improvement. burning of chlorinated
̇ Residual ash and metal plastics, solvents etc.
waste require disposal. These could be a hazard to
̇ Overall efficiency is low people living and working
for small power stations in close proximity and are
̇ Indian MSW has low generally undesirable in
calorific value; hence the environment. Care and
supplementary fuel is strict management of the
required for combustion waste to be burned in
and hence high fuel costs order to minimize
contamination with
undesirable waste types
will be required.
̇ Calorific Value ̇ Requires extensive pre- ̇ Efficient electricity generation through ̇ Air Emissions include
̇ Moisture Content treatment to be able to combustion of gas through engines acid gases, dioxins and
̇ Fixed Carbon handle MSW ̇ Potential to recycle a large proportion of furans, nitrogen oxides,
̇ Total Inerts ̇ Higher Capital Costs and residues depending on the process sulphur dioxide,
̇ Organic/Volatile matter more expensive O&M ̇ Smaller units more acceptable and part of particulates, cadmium,
Pyrolysis ̇ Requires extensive an integrated system mercury, lead and
̇ Segregation of Organic
waste pretreatment to handle ̇ Capable of being integrated with other hydrogen sulphide;
MSW processes such as the output from MBT / ̇ Some of the residues may
̇ Quantity of organic
matter ̇ High viscosity of Refuse Derived Fuel (RDF) production be hazardous in nature
̇ Market demand pyrolysis oil may be ̇ Reductions in metal volatization and
problematic for its

3-38
CMSWMF

transportation and particulates compared with MSE
burning combustion technologies
̇ Net energy recovery may ̇ Apart from generating power from the
suffer in case of wastes waste, the slurry produced from
with excessive moisture biomethanation technology acts as a good
fertilizer
̇ The quantity of waste gets reduced by
nearly 60 to 90 % depending upon the
waste composition.
̇ The quantity of residues is low, typically 3
% of the processed MSW. The bottom
ashes are inert material which could be
used as paving material.
̇ The energy can be utilized as power, heat,
or combined heat and power, or as process
steam.
̇ This process is cleaner than Incineration
̇ Compared to incineration, control of
atmospheric pollution can be dealt with in
a superior way, in techno-economic sense
̇ Calorific Value ̇ Economic performance - ̇ Converts larger fraction of organics into a ̇ Air emissions
̇ Organic/Volatile matter Costlier fuel gas
̇ Segregation of Organic ̇ Requires very rapid heat ̇ Clean way to handle fuel feedstocks that
waste transfer have many impurities
Gasification ̇ Quantity of organic
matter
̇ Market demand
̇ Moisture Content
̇ Fixed Carbon
̇ Total Inerts

3-39
CMSWMF
Table 3-7: Inputs and Outputs of Various MSW Technologies
Technology Description Inputs Outputs

Composting Composting is an organic method ̇ Segregated ̇ Compost material -
of producing compost manure by organic matter sent to Market
decomposition and stabilization of (enriched organic ̇ Wastewater to sewer
organic matter. wastes, green
̇ Vermi composting waste and
̇ Windrow composting putrescible
wastes)
̇ Aerobic composting
Landfill Landfill is a carefully engineered ̇ Unsegregated / ̇ Leachate collection
depression in the ground (or built Mixed waste (in and treatment
on top of the ground) into which case of existing ̇ Landfill gas
wastes are dumped to avoid waste dumps) collection
pollution to the surrounding ̇ Rehabilitation and
environment. Types of landfill are: redesigning of
̇ Sanitary landfill with gas existing
recovery, leachate collection dumptsites to
system and storm water mitigate existing
management system and future impacts
̇ Secured landfill without gas and to receive
recovery future waste.
̇ Bioreactor Landfill ̇ Segregated waste
(in case of new
waste) - inerts
Biomethanation Biomethanation is the process of ̇ Organic material, ̇ Biogas or Producer
/Anaerobic conversion of organic matter in the manure (wood, gas (CO, Hydrogen,
Digestion waste (liquid or solid) to agricultural waste, Nitrogen, Methane
biomethane (sometimes referred to animal manure, and carbon-dioxide
as biogas) and manure by microbial etc) gases from biological
action in the absence of air, known processes) – can be
as “anaerobic digestion.” used as dual-fuel in
diesel engines, only
fuel in spark engines,
in gas turbines,
cooking/heating
appliances
Pelletization / Pelletization initially involves ̇ Organic matter ̇ Fuel Pellets
Refuse Derived segregation of waste into high and ̇ Segregation of
Fuel low calorific value materials and organic waste in
then shredded and compacted into case of mixed
pellets with the required bulk (existing waste)
density and later can be dried to get waste
the appropriate heat value.
Incineration Incineration is a process of ̇ Organic/Volatile ̇ Ash
controlled combustion for burning matter ̇ Wastewater
of wastes and residue containing ̇ Flue gases
combustible material.
Pyrolysis Pyrolysis is a thermal process ̇ Carbon rich ̇ Residue / solid slag
where organic materials in the organic matter may be recycled or
waste are broken down under (sludge, plastics, disposed to landfill
pressure and at temperatures greater wood, tyres, Gases to be
than 496°C in the absence of agricultural combusted to get
oxygen to become gas comprising wastes, paper) electricity
of smaller molecules (Syngas)

3-40
CMSWMF
Technology Description Inputs Outputs

̇ Plasma pyrolysis
Gasification Gasification is the partial ̇ Output from ̇ Produces gas which
combustion of organic matter in the pyrolysis may be can be combusted to
presence of restricted quantity of fed into generate electricity,
oxygen or air at high temperatures gasification ̇ Carbon char and ash
̇ Plasma Arc Gasification process – recycled or sent to
disposal if no markets
are available
3.4 Major Concerns and Exposure Pathways
3.4.1 Major concerns
Major concerns associated with waste management are
̇ Leachate generation
̇ Breeding of domestic flies and their maggots
̇ Methane (CH4) and carbon-dioxide (CO2) gas emissions
̇ Vegetation damage
̇ Community health effects
̇ Fire hazards in waste dump
3.4.1.1 Leachate
Leachate and runoff from waste storage and processing areas may contain organic
material, phenols, nitrates, phosphorous, dissolved metals and other contaminants.
Therefore, leachate if not collected and treated can contaminate soil, ground and surface
water because of the following reasons:
̇ impact on underground soil

̇ ground water pollution through leachate migration from unlined landfill
̇ presence of heavy metals in leachate
̇ presence of toxic substances in ground water
̇ effect of leachate in underground water of the surrounding area, water becomes un-
potable
̇ harmful substances in near field ground water
̇ ammonia and nitrogen fluxation
Measures should be taken to prevent, minimize and control leachate generation. After
selecting any of the waste disposal alternatives, leachate is given prior importance and
leachate collection & treatment system should be designed to reduce the pollution to
ground & surface water bodies. Groundwater and leachate monitoring should be carried
out on a regular basis at defined locations within the waste disposal area. These
monitoring measures may include:
̇ Measuring quality and quantity of leachate generated

3-41
CMSWMF
̇ Examining groundwater monitoring wells located upgrade and downgrade ground

water flow for its chemical constituents
3.4.1.2 Breeding of flies, insets and rodents
Birds are attracted to landfill sites in large numbers, particularly where sites receive
appreciable amounts of food wastes. Usually only large birds such as eagles, gulls, etc.,
are regarded as a nuisance. Bird control techniques should be carefully planned taking
into account the species likely to be affected. Measures which can be used to mitigate bird
nuisance include the employment of good landfill practice, working in small active areas
and progressive prompt covering of waste, together with the use of bird scaring
techniques. Measures involving explosions or distress calls have inherent adverse
environmental impacts in terms of noise. These birds also create problems to aircraft
travel.
3.4.1.3 Methane and carbon-dioxide gas emissions
MSW contains significant portions of organic materials that produce a variety of gaseous
products when dumped, compacted, and covered in landfills. Anaerobic bacteria thrive in
the oxygen-free environment, resulting in the decomposition of the organic materials and
the production of primarily carbon dioxide and methane. Methane is likely to release out
of the landfill. Landfill gas facilities capture the methane (the principal component of
natural gas) and combust it for energy. Source separation and recycling drastically
reduces the generation of these gases.
Carbon dioxide and methane are the two major GHGs causing global warming. Carbon
dioxide and methane together are 81% of GHGs. Methane is 21 times more potent than
CO2 and therefore reduction of both gases is required.
General options with landfill gas:
̇ Flaring – loss of usable energy

̇ Boiler – produce heat
̇ Internal combustion engine – generates motive power
̇ Gas turbines – makes electricity
̇ Fuel cell – makes electricity
̇ Convert methane to methyl alcohol
̇ Clean it up enough to pipe it to other industries or into natural gas lines
3.4.1.4 Vegetation damage
There will be stress on vegetation due to release of landfill gas in the surrounding areaand
from potential contaminated (from solid waste) surface water.
3.4.1.5 Community health impacts
Community health impacts may include emissions from solid wastes and construction site
issues. Some of the impacts are listed below.

3-42
CMSWMF
̇ Occupational and health hazards amongst MSW workers

̇ Potential to create health hazards through disposal facilities
̇ Impact on human health because of biogas, leachate, contaminated runoff or hazardous
waste decomposition product
̇ Impact of odor and mosquito on human health through uncontrolled dumping
̇ Pollution of underground water and neighboring well water
̇ Acute and genetic toxicity of landfill leachate
̇ Impact on biological entities such as animals, birds and pathogens
̇ Health impacts due to burning of solid waste which may result in breathing problems,
burning of eyes, etc
̇ Uncollected garbage and litter spread beyond the waste management facility
3.4.1.6 Fire hazards in waste dump
Biodegradable wastes can be combustible and aerobic degradation can produce sufficient
heat to cause spontaneous combustion in certain circumstances. Waste in some instances
can contain ashes and other ignitable materials that burst into flame under wind
conditions or when in contact with flammables. In landfills methane is generated by
anaerobic digestion and can potentially ignite when encountered with ignition sources.
Methane in landfill gas can get trapped in underground cavities, and even move along
geologic discontinuities, to pose a risk of explosion.
3.4.2 Exposure pathways
Exposure pathway is the path due to which exposure of the receptor takes place.
Emissions from the solid waste (gaseous, solid as well as liquid effluents) can cause
damage to human health, aquatic and terrestrial ecology as well as material due to various
exposure routes (pathways). For example adverse effects of solid waste open dump on
human health can derive from the direct impact of noxious gases on the organism and/or
their indirect impact via the food chain and changes in the environment. Especially in
connection with high levels of fine particulates, noxious gases like methane, carbon
dioxide, SO2 and NOx can lead to respiratory diseases. The duration of exposure is
decisive. Injurious heavy metals (e.g., lead, mercury and cadmium) can enter the food
chain and, hence, the human organism by way of drinking water and vegetable and
animal products. Climatic changes such as warming and can occur due to greenhouse
effect of methane, CO2 and other trace gases, resulting in long-term detrimental effects on
human health.
3.5 Financial Aspects of Solid Waste Management
Almost every municipality in India is under financial pressure. The majority does not
have adequate accounting and budgeting system and does not operate on a financial
planning basis. This makes the process of understanding costs, commitments and
revenues difficult for management. Therefore to address this situation a proper financial
planning should be framed which addresses all the investment costs and revenues of the
system. Very few, if not no, municipalities maintain proper financial cost accounting
systems for different elements of solid waste management. For assessing economic

3-43
CMSWMF
sustainability of the MSW management systems, the municipalities have to develop

simple but effective financial management systems.
3.5.1 Investments or operating costs
3.5.1.1 Waste collection
As per “Overview and Challenges of Improving the Management of Solid Waste in India”
the collection costs of wastes range from Rs. 300 to 400 per tonne.
3.5.1.2 Waste transportation
the transportation costs of wastes range from Rs. 300 to 400 per ton and may vary from
place to place depending on the following factors.
̇ Total quantity generated per day

̇ Frequency of waste collection
̇ Quantity to be transported/day
̇ Shift operations
̇ Quantity per shift
̇ Distance to be covered per trip
̇ No. of trips vehicle can make (distance, loading/unloading system)
̇ Average weight carried by vehicle
̇ Number and type of vehicles
3.5.1.3 Disposal facilities
the treatment and disposal costs of wastes on an average (excluding land) range from Rs.
400 to 600 per ton. However, for planning purposes municipalities should investigate
options for both self owned and operated systems and contracted systems noting the high
uncertainties at present on realistic contract charges.
3.5.1.4 Operation and maintenance in MSW management
The municipalities will undergo annual expenditure on various activities such as handling
waste, supervision, primary collection, transportation, sweeping, processing and disposal.
Based on the type of disposal option the cost for maintenance of those facilities would
vary.
3.5.1.5 Monitoring the activities in MSW management
Based on the type of disposal option the monitoring costs for those facilities would vary.

3-44
CMSWMF
3.5.1.6 Training the Personnel
There shall be knowledge and skill development programmes to the key personnel in
MSW Management to improve their performance and competence. The training
programmes shall be organized by the training unit of the municipality. The expenses on
these training programmes will be borne by either the municipality or the private
company which is hired by the municipality/local bodies.
3.5.1.7 Awareness programmes in the community
The main objective of these programmes is to create awareness among people in the
community to give a value to MSW and have sustainable management of solid waste.
3.5.1.8 Organizational expenditure
One time establishment costs/recurring costs
3.5.2 Revenue generation
3.5.2.1 User charges
The value that people place on MSW management is the amount that they are prepared to
pay. The charges that a user may afford to pay may range between Rs. 30 to 50 per month
in case of households and can be directly collected from them based on the income level
groups or generation of wastes which ever is feasible option. The charges can be quite
high (> 600) for hotels when compared to residential houses.
3.5.2.2 Sale of recyclables
The basic recyclable wastes are glass, plastic, metals, synthetic rubber, leather, rags, etc.
These recyclables can be typically removed at the point of collection or at the disposal
facility which reduces the total volumes and provides income to the groups involved but
also reduces the nominal value of the overall waste.
3.5.2.3 Sale of compost
In India MSW has high organic content and composting would be one of the most
popular option where some of the private companies would be interested in taking waste
from municipalities and turn into compost on a commercial basis.
MSW composting facilities must be designed for flexibility. Changes in the regulatory
environment, in market specifications, and in the waste stream itself are likely to be
significant in future. With any new technology, "state of the art" is likely to have
ephemeral meaning for MSW composting facilities. This is particularly true with the
physical processing steps, where changes in the amount and type of waste collected and
the product quality required are likely to significantly impact optimal facility design. An
MSW composting facility must be able to adapt if it is to play a long term role in
responsible waste management. In order to market the compost produced from MSW the
following should be considered.

3-45
CMSWMF
̇ There must be a value addition of compost before marketing to make it a profitable

proposition.
̇ The composter should be provided with back ended transport subsidy to transport
compost in bulk within 50 km radius of compost plant for direct selling to farmers.
̇ Massive awareness generation campaign on utility of compost to the fertilizers.
̇ Examining the compost for toxic substances and its effect on soil and water quality
before its sale.
̇ Identifying the potential users to determine the type of compost that should be
produced.
3.5.2.4 Waste to energy
There are small waste to energy plants in India which work on commercial basis but
practically rely on Government subsidy both in capital and operational particularly in the
form of preferential power tariff imposed up on already financially weak power systems.
3.5.2.5 Carbon finance
Carbon finance through CDM (Clean Development Mechanism) of Kyoto protocol offers
significant opportunities in India for an array of GHG (Green House Gas) emission
reduction projects. MoEF, GoI has formulated the interim sustainable development
criteria (social, economic, environmental and technological well being), which need to be
met for CDM projects to gain approval in India. India already has environmental
regulations requiring investment projects to carry out EIAs in place. CDM projects would
need to abide by such national legislation and carry out the necessary EIAs.
Control of green house gases is a good practice for number of reasons including safety,
energy production, reducing green house gas effects. Methane is a powerful green house
gas that has financial incentives for its control in the context of climate change. There are
certain groups which gives only initial capital subsidy and other only payments for
reduction of carbon emissions during the operations.
The principle would be either capturing and destroying the methane or changing the
systems to prevent its generation and claiming for emission reductions. These emission
reductions once verified can be sold for cash on an increasingly open carbon market.
In theory the CDM works like this: an investor from an industrialized country, can invest
in, or provide finance for, a project in a developing country that reduces greenhouse gas
emissions so that they are lower than they would have been without the extra investment
– i.e. compared to what would have happened without the CDM under a business as usual
outcome. The investor then gets credits – carbon credits – for the reductions and can use
those credits to meet their Kyoto target. The envisaged project has to fulfill certain
eligibility criteria in order to be accepted as a CDM measure according to the Kyoto
Protocol.

3-46
CMSWMF
Figure 3-8: CDM Project cycle
The purpose of the CDM is to benefit both the investor and host countries by contributing
to sustainable development in the host developing countries and by allowing investor
countries to meet their GHG reduction targets at the lowest possible cost by taking
advantage of the lower marginal cost of reducing GHG emissions in developing countries.
It is the sole prerogative of the host country to confirm whether the project contributes to
its sustainable development.
Incase of MSW management following are the key areas for availing carbon finance:
̇ Conversion of carbonaceous matter into CO2 instead of methane by aerobic treatment

methods.
̇ Methane collected in the anaerobic treatment processes could be used for beneficial
applications and gets finally converted in to CO2 upon burning/flaring.
̇ Carbonaceous matter having calorific value can be availed as energy by thermal
oxidation. This process also converts carbon into CO2
For specific details on CDM benefits from MSW management, UNFCC website may be
referred. Table 3-8 shows indicative estimates of comparative and potential CF revenues
for various MSW treatment technologies.
Table 3-8: Indicative Carbon Revenues Potential using Various MSWM

Technologies
MSW Treatment CO2 Emissions Potential Emission Carbon Finance for
and Disposal (t CO2 E/t MSW) Reductions Treatment of MSW
Options (t CO2 E/t MSW) Rs/t MSW
Assuming landfill - - -
without LFG
recovery as baseline
Landfill with LFG 0.20 – 0.25 0.95 – 1.20 175 – 200
recovery and flare
Landfill with LFG 0.21 (may be less if More than 0.95 More than 175 Rs/ton
and energy energy component is

3-47
CMSWMF
MSW Treatment CO2 Emissions Potential Emission Carbon Finance for

and Disposal (t CO2 E/t MSW) Reductions Treatment of MSW
Options (t CO2 E/t MSW) Rs/t MSW
generation considered)
Composting 0 (may be less if More than 1.16 More than 200 Rs/ton
replacement of chemical
fertilizer is considered)
Bio-methanation 0 (may be less if energy More than 1.16 More than 225 Rs/ton
and fertilizer
components are
considered)
Source: Carbon finance business estimates
3.5.2.6 Royalty on waste
The private companies may take the responsibility of collecting the waste from certain
parts of the municipality and generate revenues from the waste and shall pay the fee to the
municipality for the same.
According to the report on “Overview and Challenges: Improving Management of Solid

Waste in India, Environment and Social Development Unit, South Asia Region, World
Bank, May 2006” pilot Action Plans were developed for three cities each in Karnataka
and Andhra Pradesh covering a range of size and circumstances. Some of the key
parameters from these Action Plans such as the cost per ton of MSW collected and the
ratio of workers to waste are summarized in the following Table 3-17. The data is
presented as ranges without identifying the uncertainties in some of the numbers.
Table 3-9: Summary of Key Parameters from Action Plans
Large Cities Mid size Towns Small Towns Typical

Parameters for (Above 1.5 (between 0.5- (less than 0.5 Range for
Benchmarking million) 1.5 million) million) Hilly Towns
MSW management expenditure
in Rs per capita per annum 165-175 150-180 120-150 350-400 *
MSW Management expenditure
as % of total municipal revenue
expenditure 15-25 15-25 20-40 25-45
MSW management cost per ton
(Rs) 900-1200 800-1200 800-1600 ** 2500-3000 #
Relative costs per ton by
size/population (taking mid-size
town as 1.00) 0.22-0.27 1.00-1.11 2.78-5.00 4.44-7.78 ##
Salaries as % of overall MSW
management costs 45-55 60-70 65-75 80-90
Ratio of worker per ton of waste
managed 3.5-4.5 2.5-6.0 2.5-5.0 8.0-16.0
Cost of primary collection as %
of total MSW management
expenditure 25-30 40-70 30-40 20-40
Cost of Transportation as % of
total MSW management 20-25 10-20 10-15 15-25

3-48
CMSWMF
Large Cities Mid size Towns Small Towns Typical

Parameters for (Above 1.5 (between 0.5- (less than 0.5 Range for
Benchmarking million) 1.5 million) million) Hilly Towns
expenditure
Cost of MSW management
contract as % of total MSW
management expenditure 35-40 25-30 5-10 <5
Notes:
* For hilly towns the municipal expenditure is generally high due to specific revenue importance
such as tourism and seasonal variation in population, etc.
** Higher percentage of MSW management expenditure is observed in smaller cities where sub
contracting of MSW management services as well as level of services is generally lower.
# Higher costs in hilly towns are attributed to difficult terrain and extreme climatic conditions.
## MSW management costs in hilly town varies significantly depending on geography and tourist
importance
Source: Overview and Challenges: Improving Management of Solid Waste in India, Environment
and Social Development Unit, South Asia Region, World Bank, May 2006.
3.6 Summary of Applicable National Regulations
3.6.1 General description of major statutes
A compilation of legal instruments which are applicable to CMSWM facilities is annexed

as Annexure IV.
3.6.2 General standards for discharge of environmental pollutants
General standards for discharge of environmental pollutants as per CPCB are given in
Annexure V.
3.6.3 Requirements for common MSW management facilities
In order to regulate the waste from different sources of waste generation in the
municipality, CPCB has notified Municipal Solid Waste (Management & Handling)
Rules, 2000 which are applicable to every municipal authority responsible for collection,
segregation, storage, transportation, processing and disposal of municipal solid.
Corresponding schedules in the rules are annexed as Annexure III.
The Rule contains four Schedules:
̇ Schedule-I: Implementation Schedule

̇ Schedule-II: Specifications relating to collection, segregation, storage, transportation,
processing and disposal of MSW.
̇ Schedule-III: Specifications for landfilling indicating; site selection, facilities at the
site, specifications for landfilling, Pollution prevention, water quality monitoring,

3-49
CMSWMF
ambient air quality monitoring, Plantation at landfill site, closure of landfill site and
post care.
̇ Schedule-IV: Waste processing options including; standards for composting, treated
leachates and incinerations.
3.6.4 FCO Standards for compost quality
To ensure adequate availability of right quality of fertilizers at right time and at right price
to farmers, the fertilizer was declared as an Essential Commodity and Fertilizer Control
Order (FCO) was promulgated under Section 3 of Essential Commodities Act, 1955 to
regulate, trade, price, quality and distribution of fertilizers in the country.
For the first time on the consistent demand of State Governments, the bio-fertilizers and
organic manures have been brought under the regulatory mechanism. In the Schedule III
& IV of FCO, 1985, the specification of important bio-fertilizers (namely; Phosphate
Solublizing Bacteria (PSB), Azotobactor, Azospirrillium, Rhizobium) have been
included. Fertilizer Control (Amendment) Order, 2006 was notified, in which organic
manure (namely Vermi Compost, City Compost & Press mud) has been notified besides
their tolerance limit, method of sampling and analysis. However, this particular
amendment is yet to be made applicable. FCO standards for compost quality are given in
Annexure VI.

3-50
4.
OPERATIONAL ASPECTS OF EIA
Prior environmental clearance process has been revised in the Notification issued on 14th
September, 2006, into following four major stages i.e., screening, scoping, public
consultation and appraisal. Each stage has certain procedures to be followed. This
section deals with all the procedural and technical guidance, for conducting objective-
oriented EIA studies, their review and decision-making. Besides, the Notification also
classifies projects into Category A, which requires prior environmental clearance from
MoEF and Category B from SEIAA/UTEIAA.
Consistency with other requirements
̇ Clearance from other regulatory bodies is not a pre-requisite for obtaining the prior
environmental clearance and all such clearances will be treated as parallel statutory
requirements.
̇ Consent for Establishment (CFE) and Prior Environmental Clearance are two different
legal requirements; a project proponent is required should acquire. Therefore, these
two activities can be initiated and proceeded with simultaneously.
̇ If a project falls within purview of CRZ and EIA Notifications, then the project
proponent is required to take separate clearances from the concerned Authorities.
̇ Rehabilitation and Resettlement (R&R) issues need not be dealt under the EIA
Notification as other statutory bodies deal with these issues. However, socio-
economic studies may be considered while taking environmental decisions.
4.1 Coverage of Common MSW Management Facility under the Purview

of Notification
All the new CMSWMF projects including expansion and modernization require prior
environmental clearance. Based on pollution potential, all these projects are classified
into Category B.
Besides there is general condition, when it applies, a Category B project will be treated as
Category A project. These conditions are discussed in subsequent sections.
The sequence of steps in the process of prior environmental clearance for Category A
projects and the Category B projects are shown in Figure 4.1 and Figure 4.2 respectively.
The time lines indicated against each stage are the maximum permissible time lines set in
the Notification for said task. In case the said task is not cleared/objected by the
concerned Authority, within the specified time, said task is deemed to be cleared, in
accordance tot eh proposal submitted by the proponent. Each stage in the process of prior
environmental clearance for the CMSWMF projects is discussed in subsequent sections.
In case of Expansion or Modernization of the developmental Activity:
̇ Any developmental activity, which has an issued EIA clearance (existing facility),
when undergoes expansion or modernization (change in process or technology) with
increase in handling capacity is required to submit new application for EIA clearance.

4-1
Operational Aspects of an EIA
Figure 4-1: Prior Environmental Clearance Process for Activities

Falling Under Category A
Technical EIA Guidance Manual for CMSWMF 4-2 September 2010

Figure 4-2: Prior Environmental Clearance Process for Activities

Falling Under Category B

4.2 Screening
Screening of the project shall be performed at the initial stage of the project development
so that proponents are aware of their obligations before deciding on the budget, project
design and execution plan.
This stage is applicable only for Category ‘B’ developmental activity i.e. if general
conditions are applicable for a Category B project, then it will be treated as Category A
project. Besides, screening also refers to the classification of Category B projects into
either Category B1 or Category B2. Category B1 projects require to follow all the stages,
that are applicable for a Category A project, but are processed at the SEIAA/UTEIAA.
Category B2 projects on the other hand, do not require either EIA or public consultation.
As per the Notification, classification of the Category B projects falls under the purview
of the SEAC. This manual provides certain guidelines to the stakeholders for
classification of Category B1 and Category B2.
4.2.1 Applicable conditions for Category B projects
General condition
̇ Any CMSWMF project (usually falling under Category B) will be treated as Category
A, if located in whole or in part within 10 km from the boundary of:
−Protected areas notified under the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972,
−Critically polluted areas as notified by the CPCB from time to time
−Eco-sensitive areas as notified under section 3 of the E(P) Act, 1986, such as
Mahabaleshwar Panchgani, Matheran, Panchmarhi, Dahanu, Doon valley and
− Inter-State boundaries and international boundaries - provided the requirement
regarding distance of 10 km of the inter-state boundaries can be reduced or
completely done away with by an agreement between the respective States/UTs
sharing the common boundary in case the activity does not fall within 10 km of
the areas mentioned above.
̇ If any of the conditions listed in above general condition applies, then a Category B
project will be treated as Category A
̇ The SEIAA shall base its decision on the recommendations of a State/UT level EAC
for the purpose of prior environmental clearance.
̇ In absence of a duly constituted SEIAA or SEAC, a Category B project shall be
appraised at Central level i.e. at the MoEF
̇ The EAC at the State/UT level shall screen the projects or activities in Category B.
SEAC shall meet at least once every month
4.2.2 Criteria for classification of Category B1 and B2 projects
The classification of Category B projects or activities into B1 or B2 (except the project or

activities listed in item 8(b) in the schedule to the EIA Notification, 2006) will be
determined based on whether or not the project or activity requires further environmental
studies for preparation of an EIA for its appraisal prior to the grant of prior environmental
clearance. The necessity of which will be decided, depending upon the nature and
location specificity of the project, by SEAC after scrutiny of the applications seeking
prior environmental clearance for Category B projects or activities.

The projects requiring an EIA report shall be included in Category B1 and remaining
projects will fall under Category B2 and will not require an EIA report and public
consultation.
Situation under which projects can be considered as B2:
̇ All MSW projects to be considered under B1 Category except projects dealing with
the capping of existing dump sites (including capturing of landfill gases for power
generation)
4.2.3 Application for prior environmental clearance
̇ The project proponent, after identifying the site and carrying out a pre-feasibility
study, is required to apply for the prior environmental clearance using Form 1 given in
Annexure VII. The proponent has to submit the filled in Form 1 along with the pre-
feasibility report and draft ToR for EIA studies to the concerned Authority i.e. MoEF,
Government of India for Category A projects and the SEIAA in case of Category B
projects. Please refer subsequent sections for the information on how to fill the Form
1, contents of pre-feasibility report and draft sector-specific ToRs.
̇ Prior environmental clearance is required before starting any construction work, or
preparation of land is started on the identified site/project or activity by the project
management, except for securing the land.
̇ If the application is made for a specific developmental activity, which has an inherent
area development component as a part of its project proposal and the same project also
attracts the construction and area development provisions under 8a and 8b of the
Schedule, then the project will be seen as a developmental activity other than 8a and
8b of the Schedule.
4.2.4 Siting guidelines
These are the guidelines, stakeholders may consider while siting the developmental
projects, to minimize the associated possible environmental impacts. While in some
situations, adhering to these guidelines is difficult and unwarranted. Therefore these
guidelines may be kept in the background, as far as possible, while taking the decisions.
Setting up of such facilities in critically polluted areas identified by MoEF from time-to-
time may be avoided to the maximum extent possible. Please refer Annexure VIII for
details of critically polluted industrial areas and clusters/potential impact zone.
Siting guideline specifications for landfill as per MSW rules 2000 include the following:
̇ In areas falling under the jurisdiction of ‘Development Authorities’ it shall be the

responsibility of such Development Authorities to identify the landfill sites and hand
over the sites to the concerned municipal authority for development, operation and
maintenance. Elsewhere, this responsibility shall lie with the concerned municipal
authority.
̇ Selection of landfill sites shall be based on examination of environmental issues. The
Department of Urban Development of the State or the Union territory shall co-ordinate
with the concerned organizations for obtaining the necessary approvals and clearances.
̇ The landfill site shall be planned and designed with proper documentation of a phased
construction plan as well as a closure plan.

̇ The landfill sites shall be selected to make use of nearby wastes processing facility.
Otherwise, wastes processing facility shall be planned as an integral part of the landfill
site.
̇ The existing landfill sites, which continue to be used for more than five years, shall be
improved in accordance of the specifications given in this Schedule.
̇ Biomedical wastes shall be disposed off in accordance with the Bio-medical Wastes
(Management and Handling) Rules, 1998 and hazardous wastes shall be managed in
accordance with the Hazardous Wastes (Management and Handling) Rules, 1989, as
amended from time to time.
̇ The landfill site shall be large enough to last for 20-25 years.
̇ The landfill site shall be away from habitation clusters, forest areas, water bodies,
monuments, National Parks, Wetlands and places of important cultural, historical or
religious interest.
̇ A buffer zone of no-development shall be maintained around landfill site and shall be
incorporated in the Town Planning Department’s land-use plans.
̇ Landfill site shall be away from airport including airbase. Necessary approval of
airport or airbase authorities prior to the setting up of the landfill site shall be obtained
in cases where the site is to be located within 20 km of an airport or airbase.
4.3 Scoping for EIA Studies
Scoping exercise is taken-up soon after the project contours are defined. The primary
purpose of scoping is to identify the concerns and issues which may affect the project
decisions. Besides, scoping defines EIA study requirements and boundaries of the EIA
study.
Scoping refers to the process by which the EAC, in case of Category ‘A’ projects or
activities, and SEAC in the case of Category ‘B1’ projects, including applications for
expansion and/or modernization of existing projects, determine ToR for EIA studies
addressing all relevant environmental concerns for the preparation of an EIA Report for a
particular project.
̇ Project proponent shall submit the application to the concerned authority. The
application (Form 1 as given in Annexure VII) shall be attached with pre-feasibility
report and proposed ToR for EIA Studies. The proposed sequence to arrive at the draft
ToR is discussed below:
– Precisely, the pre-feasibility report summarizes the project details and also the
likely environmental concerns based on the secondary information, which will be
availed for filling the Form 1.
– From the pre-feasibility report and the Form 1, valued environmental components
(VECs) may be identified for a given project (the receiving environment/social
components, which are likely to get effected due to the project
operations/activities).
– Once the project details from the pre-feasibility report & Form 1; and VECs are
identified, a matrix establishing the interactions which can lead to the
effects/impacts could be developed (Qualitative analysis).
– For each identified possible effect in the matrix, significance analysis could be
conducted to identify the impacts, which needs to be further studied (quantitative

analysis) in the subsequent EIA studies. All such points will become the part of
the draft ToR to be proposed by the project proponent along with the application
form. The draft ToR shall include applicable baseline parameters (annexure XI)
and impact prediction tools (annexure XIII) proposed to be applied.
– The information to be provided in pre-feasibility report, guidelines for filling
Form 1 and guidelines for developing draft ToR is summarized in the subsequent
sections.
– Authority consults the respective EAC/SEAC to reply to the proponent. The
EAC/SEAC concerned reviews the application form, pre-feasibility report and
proposed draft ToR by the proponent and make necessary additions/deletions to
make it a comprehensive ToR that suits the statutory requirements for conducting
the EIA studies.
̇ A site visit by sub-committees of EAC/SEAC concerned will be planned, only if
considered necessary by the EAC/SEAC concerned with the written approval of the
chairperson of EAC/SEAC concerned. Project proponent will facilitate such site visits
of the sub-committees.
̇ EAC/SEAC shall provide an opportunity to the project proponent for presentation and
discussions on the proposed project and related issues as well as the proposed ToR for
EIA studies. If the State Government desires to present its views on any specific
project in the scoping stage, it can depute an officer for the same at the scoping stage
to EAC, as an invitee but not as a member of EAC. However, non-appearance of the
project proponent before EAC/SEAC at any stage will not be a ground for rejection of
the application for the prior environmental clearance.
̇ In case of a new or expansion project in an identified problem area by the CPCB, then
the Ministry may invite representative SEIAA to present their views, if any at the stage
of scoping, to the EAC.
̇ The final set of ToRs for EIA Studies shall be conveyed to the proponent by the EAC/
SEAC within sixty days of the receipt of Form 1 and pre-feasibility report. If the
finalized ToR for EIA studies is not conveyed to the proponent within sixty days of the
receipt of Form 1, the ToR for EIA studies suggested by the proponent shall be
deemed as the final and will be approved for the EIA studies.
̇ The final ToR for EIA Studies shall be displayed on the websites of the MoEF/SEIAA.
̇ Applications for prior environmental clearance may be rejected by the concerned
Authority based on the recommendations by the concerned EAC or SEAC at the
scoping stage itself. In case of such rejection, the decision together with reasons for the
same shall be communicated to the proponent in writing within sixty days of the
receipt of the application.
̇ The final EIA report and the other relevant documents submitted by the proponent
shall be scrutinized by the concerned Authority strictly with reference to the approved
ToR for EIA studies.
4.3.1 Pre-feasibility report
The pre-feasibility report should include, but not limited to highlight the proposed project
information, keeping in view the environmental sensitivities of the selected site,
technology options, leachate treatment, etc. Information required in pre-feasibility report
varies from case to case even in the same sector depending upon the local environmental
setting within which the facility is located/proposed. However, the information which
may be furnished in the pre-feasibility report may include as under:

I. Executive summary
II. Project details: Description of the project including in particular;
̇ a description of the main characteristics of the waste management practices

̇ an estimate, by type and quantity, of expected residues and emissions (water, air and
soil pollution, noise, vibration, heat, radiation, etc.) resulting from the operation of the
proposed project.
̇ a description of the physical characteristics of the whole project and the land-use
requirements during the construction and operational phases
III. Selection of site based on least possible impacts
̇ An outline of the main alternatives studied by the developer and an indication of the
main reasons for this choice, taking into account the environmental effects.
IV. Anticipated impacts based on project operations on receiving environment
̇ A description of the aspects of the environment likely to be significantly affected by

the proposed project, including, in particular, population, fauna, flora, soil, water, air,
climatic factors, material assets, including the architectural and archaeological
heritage, landscape and the inter-relationship between the above factors.
̇ A description of the likely significant effects of the proposed project on the
environment resulting from:
− existence of the project
− emission of pollutants, the creation of nuisances
− project proponent’s description of the forecasting methods used to assess the
effects on the environment
V. Proposed broad mitigation measures which could effectively be internalized as
project components to have environmental and social acceptance of the proposed
site
̇ A description of key measures envisaged to prevent, reduce and where possible offset
any significant adverse effects on the environment
VI. An indication of any difficulties (technical deficiencies or lack of know-how)
encountered by the developer in compiling the required information
Details of the above listed points which may be covered in pre-feasibility report are listed
in Annexure IX.
4.3.2 Guidance for providing information in Form 1
The information given in specifically designed pre-feasibility report for this

developmental activity may also be availed for filling Form 1.
Form 1 is designed to help users identify the likely significant environmental effects of
proposed projects right at the scoping stage. There are two stages for providing
information under two columns:

̇ First - identifying the relevant project activities from the list given in Column 2 of
Form 1. Start with the checklist of questions set out below and complete Column 3 by
answering:
− Yes - if the activity is likely to occur during implementation of the project;
− No - if it is not expected to occur;
− May be - if it is uncertain at this stage whether it will occur or not.
̇ Second - Each activity for which the answer in Column 3 is “Yes” the next step is to
refer to the fourth column which quantifies the volume of activity which could be
judged as significant impact on the local environmental characteristics, and identify
the areas that could be affected by that activity during construction /operation /
decommissioning of the project. Form 1 requires information within 15 km around the
project, whereas actual study area for EIA will be as prescribed by respective
EAC/SEAC. Project proponent will need information will be needed about the
surrounding VECs in order to complete this Form 1.
4.3.3 Identification of appropriate valued environmental components
VECs are components of natural resources and human world that are considered valuable
and are likely to be affected by the project activities. Value may be attributed for
economic, social, environmental, aesthetic or ethical reasons. VECs represent the
investigative focal point for further EIA process. The indirect and/or cumulative effects
can be concerned with indirect, additive or even synergistic effects due to other projects
or activities or even induced developments on the same environmental components as
would be considered direct effects. But such impacts tend to involve larger scale VECs
such as within entire region, river basins or watersheds; and, broad social and economic
VECs such as quality of life and the provincial economy. Once VECs are identified then
appropriate indicators are selected for impact assessments on the respective VECs.
4.3.4 Methods for identification of impacts
There are various factors which influence the approach adopted for the assessment of
direct, indirect, cumulative impacts, etc. for a particular project. The method should be
practical and suitable for the project given the data, time and financial resources available.
However, the method adopted should be able to provide a meaningful conclusion from
which it would be possible to develop, where necessary, mitigation measures and
monitoring. Key points to consider when choosing the method(s) include:
̇ Nature of the impact(s)

̇ Availability and quality of data
̇ Availability of resources (time, finance and staff)
The method chosen should not be complex, but should aim at presenting the results in a
way that can be easily understood by the developer, decision maker and the public. A
comparative analysis of major impact identification methods is given in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1: Advantages and Disadvantages of Impact Identification Methods
Description Advantages Disadvantages

Checklists ̇ Annotate the environmental ̇ Simple to ̇ Do not
features that need to be understand and distinguish
addressed when identifying the use between direct

Description Advantages Disadvantages

impacts of activities in the ̇ Good for site and indirect
project selection and impacts
priority setting ̇ Do not link
̇ Simple ranking action and
and weighting impact
̇ The process of
incorporating
values can be
controversial
Matrices ̇ Identify the interaction between ̇ Link action to ̇ Difficult to
project activities (along one impact distinguish
axis) and environmental ̇ Good method for direct and
characteristics (along other displaying EIA indirect
axis)using a grid like table results impacts
̇ Entries are made in the cells ̇ Significant
which highlights impact potential for
severity in the form of symbols double-
or numbers or descriptive counting of
comments impacts
Networks ̇ Illustrate cause effect ̇ Link action to ̇ Can become
relationship of project activities impact very complex
and environmental ̇ Useful in if used beyond
characteristics simplified form simplified
̇ Useful in identifying secondary for checking for version
impacts second order
̇ Useful for establishing impact impacts
hypothesis and other structured ̇ Handles direct
science based approaches to and indirect
EIA impacts
Overlays ̇ Map the impacts spatially and ̇ Easy to ̇ Address only
display them pictorially understand direct impacts
̇ Useful for comparing site and ̇ Good to display ̇ Do not address
planning alternatives for routing method impact
linear developments ̇ Good siting tool duration or
̇ Can address cumulative effects probability
̇ Information incentive
GIS ̇ Maps the impacts spatially and ̇ Easy to ̇ Do not address
display them pictorially understand impact
̇ Useful for comparing site and ̇ Good to display duration or
planning alternatives for routing method probability
linear developments ̇ Good siting tool ̇ Heavy reliance
̇ Can address cumulative effects ̇ Excellent for on knowledge
̇ Information incentive impact and data
identification and ̇ Often complex
analysis and expensive
Expert ̇ Assist diagnosis, problem ̇ Excellent for ̇ Heavy reliance
System solving and decision making impact on knowledge
̇ Needs inputs from user by identification and and data
answering systematically analysis ̇ Often complex
developed questions to identify ̇ Good for and expensive
impacts and determine their experimenting
mitigability and significance
̇ Information intensive, high
investment methods of analysis

The project team made an attempt to construct an impact matrix considering major project
activities (generic operations) and stage-specific likely impacts which is given in Table 4-
2.
While the impact matrix is each project-specific, Table 4-2 may facilitate the stakeholders
in identifying a set of components and phase-specific project activities for determination
of likely impacts.

1
Physical ENVIRONMENT
2
Resources Soil COMPONENT
Land
factor
/ quality
especially
aggregates
Project
Parameter/
undeveloped
Construction
Erosion risks
Activities
Contamination
material-stone,
4
Detailed topographic survey
*
Land acquisition
*
*
Technical EIA Guidance Manual for CMSWMF

Site cleaning
Facility
7
*
PHASE I
CMSWM
Burning of waste s, refuse and cleared vegetation

8
*
Pre Construction
Site preparation / change in topography

9
*
*
Civil works such as earth moving and building of
structures including temporary structures
10
Heavy equipment operations
*
11
Disposal of construction waste

12
Landfill
Generation of sewerage
PHASE II
*
13
Influx of construction workers
*
*
Construction/ Establishment
14
Deforestation
15
Transportation of waste to the facility

16
Movement of vehicles
17
Water requirement at the facility
4-12
18
Influx of workers
19
disposal facilities
Temporary storage of waste

General operations at the
20
Separation of waste
*
*
21
Liners
Table 4-2: Matrix of Impacts
*
*
22
Drainage Layers
*
*
24
Waste handling and landfilling

Landfill
*
*
25
Leachate management
26
Landfill gas collection and management

PHASE III
*
*
27
Waste handling, mixing and processing

*
*
Leachate management
28
Operation and Maintenance
*
Composting
Compost storage
29
Drying and palletizing

30
RDF
*
31
Packaging and storage

32
Gas capturing and management

anation
Biometh
September 2010
*
33
Ash management
ration
Incine
PHASE I PHASE II PHASE III

Pre Construction Construction/ Establishment Operation and Maintenance
CMSWM Landfill General operations at the Landfill Composting RDF Biometh Incine
Facility disposal facilities anation ration
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
or agricultural
land
Water quality * * * * * * * * * *
Alteration of * *
hydraulic
regime
Alteration of * * * *
Water
surface run off

and interflow
Air quality * * * * * * * * * * * *
Noise and * * * * * * * * * *
Terrestrial Air
odour *
Terrestrial * * * * * * *
ecology/ land *
use
Flora
Aquatic * * * * * * * * *
Aquatic
ecology
Biological
*
Biota
Disturbance of * * * * * * *
Terrestrial Fauna
habitats by
noise or
vibration
Environmental * * * * * * * * * * * * *
hazards

4-13

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Creation of * * * * * * * * * * *
new economic *
activities and
status
Commercial * * * * * * * * * * *
value of *
properties
Conflict due to * * * * * *
negotiation
and/
compensation
payments
Social
Generation of * * * * * * * * *
temporary and
permanent
jobs
Economy
Effect on crops * *
Training in * * * * * * * * * *
new *
Public Education
technologies
and new skills
to workers
Political * * * * * * * *
Order
conflicts

4-14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Unrest, * * * * * * * * * *
demonstrations
& social
conflicts
Health Security and Infrastructure and
Conflicts with * * * * *
projects of
urban,
commercial or
Services
industrial
development
Road and fire * * * * * * * *
accidents *
Safety
Temporary * * * * * * * * * *
Chronic * * * * * * * * *
Land use and * * * *
quality
Recreation * * * * *
*
Aesthetics and * * * * * * *
human interest *
Cultural
Cultural status * * * * * * *

4-15
Note:
1. Above table represents a model for likely impacts, which will have to be arrived at on a case-to-
case basis considering VECs and significance analysis (Ref Section 2.9).
2. Project activities are shown as indicative. However, in Form 1 (application for EIA Clearance),
for any question for which answer is ‘Yes’, then the corresponding activity shall reflect in project
activities. Similarly ‘parameters’/’factors’ will also be changed within a component in order to
reflect the target species of prime concern in the receiving local environment.
4.3.5 Testing the Significance of Impacts
The following set of conditions may be used as the checklist for testing the significance of
the impacts and also to provide information in Column IV of Form 1.
̇ Will there be a large change in environmental conditions?

̇ Will new features be out-of-scale with the existing environment?
̇ Will the effect be unusual in the area or particularly complex?
̇ Will the effect extend over a large area?
̇ Will there be any potential for trans-frontier impact?
̇ Will many people be affected?
̇ Will many receptors of other types (fauna and flora, businesses, facilities) be
affected?
̇ Will valuable or scarce features or resources be affected?
̇ Is there a risk that environmental standards will be breached?
̇ Is there a risk that protected sites, areas, and features will be affected?
̇ Is there a high probability of the effect occurring?
̇ Will the effect continue for a long time?
̇ Will the effect be permanent rather than temporary?
̇ Will the impact be continuous rather than intermittent?
̇ If it is intermittent will it be frequent rather than rare?
̇ Will the impact be irreversible?
̇ Will it be difficult to avoid, or reduce or repair or compensate for the effect?
For each “Yes” answer in column 3, the nature of effects and reasons for it should be
recorded in the column 4. The questions are designed so that a “Yes” answer in column 3,
will generally point towards the need for analyzing for the significance and requirement
for conducting impact assessment for the effect.
4.3.6 Terms of reference for EIA studies
ToR for EIA studies in respect of the CMSWMF project may include, but not limited to
the following:
1. Executive summary of the project – a prima facie idea of the objectives of the
proposal, use of resources, justification, etc. In addition, it should provide a
compilation of EIA report including EMP and the post-project monitoring plan in
brief.
Project description
2. Justification for selecting the design period and capacities of waste processing
facilities (recovery, treatment and disposal).

4-16
Operational Aspects of EIA
3. Land requirement for the project including its break up for various purposes, its
availability and optimization.
4. Details on each unit in the facility describing its operations.
5. Details on the waste collection system – compliance to the statutory requirements
6. Details on site investigations – topographical surveys, geotechnical investigations
(soil bearing capacity, permeability, etc).
7. Details of the proposed solid waste management system covering following:
−Coverage area for collection of MSW including ULBs, if any
−Population projections
−Current waste generation rates and projections
−Expected quantity of MSW generation
−Current quantity of MSW collection
−Physical and chemical characteristics of MSW
−Details on MSW collection network
−Transportation of MSW – type of vehicles, frequency of transportation, distance
of transportation
− Details of bio-medical waste and hazardous industrial waste generation in the
serving area and their existing segregation and handling system
− Details on existing accumulated MSW at disposal sites
− Details on protocol for scientific renovation of existing landfill/disposal sites or
scientific capping of landfills. Provide detailed project reports with findings of
the field investigations on possible contamination, etc. engineering designs and
specifications
− Details on proposed recovery, treatment and disposal mechanism.
− Details on compliance to MSW rules
− Details on process flow diagram and specific operational features
− List of plant and equipment to be set up and vehicles to be used with clear
description of their environmental implication (emission, noise level, dust level,
leachate generation, etc.)
− Details of infrastructure facilities including stormwater drainage
− Source of water and electric power
− Precaution for avoiding unwanted material such as bio-medical waste
− Details of safety measures for health and environment
8. Details on proposed monitoring protocol and laboratory facilities for routine sampling
and analysis.
9. Details of design capacities of the storage facilities for recovered materials and
specific features
10. Specific details on leachate generation rates, collection, treatment and disposal
11. Details of the landfill operation – filling, layers, equipment, compaction levels, cross-
checking mechanism, stability considerations, trouble shooting mechanism, etc.
12. Details of proposed monitoring wells, locations, frequency of monitoring, parameters
etc.
13. Proposed financial model, creation of fund for future liabilities till 30 years of post
closure including monitoring, etc.
14. Fire fighting, safety and health protection measure in the project design and
operations

4-17
15. In case of expansion projects, compliance with the issued EIA clearance conditions
and ‘consent to operate’ conditions of existing facility may be described besides legal
cases against the existing project, if any.
16. Any litigation pending against the project and /or any direction /order passed by any
Court of Law related to the environmental pollution and impacts in the last two years,
if so, details thereof.
Description of the environment
17. The study area shall be up to a distance of 5 km from the boundary of the proposed
project site.
18. A map indicating the location of MSW facility, township and nearest villages,
industries and distance from the facility shall be included.
19. Location of the project site, nearest habitats as well as landfill to be demarcated on
the toposheet (1: 50000 scale).
20. Landuse for the study area based on satellite imagery including location of specific
sensitivities such as national parks / wildlife sanctuary / sensitive areas, etc.
21. Topography details of the project area.
22. Demography details of all the villages (population, list of existing industries, etc.)
falling within study area.
23. Baseline data of the study area w.r.t. different components of environment viz. air,
noise, water, land, and biology and socio-economic as per the guidance given in
Section 4.4.2. Actual monitoring of baseline environmental components shall be
strictly according to the parameters prescribed in the ToR after considering the
proposed coverage of parameters by the proponent in draft ToR and shall commence
after finalization of ToR by the competent Authority.
24. Geological features and geo-hydrological status of the facility.
25. Details on groundwater such as water depth, water quality, drainage pattern, yield
potential, etc.
26. Details on surface water quality of nearby water sources and other surface drains for
the parameters such as suspended solids*, BOD*, COD*, heavy metals*, pH*,
chlorides*, dissolved solids*, nitrate*, zinc*, sulphate*, phenolic compounds*, etc. (*
- as applicable)
27. Details on existing ambient air quality and expected emissions for PM10, PM 2.5,
CH4, fly index test, SO2*, NOx*, etc.) and evaluation of the adequacy of the proposed
pollution control devices to meet standards for point sources and to meet AAQ
standards. (* - as applicable)
28. Details on noise levels at sensitive/commercial receptors.
29. Site-specific meteorological data such as wind speed, wind direction, relative
humidity, temperature, rainfall, etc.
30. One season site-specific meteorological data.
31. Baseline monitoring network.
32. Ecological status (terrestrial and aquatic) of the study area such as habitat type and
quality, species, diversity, rarity, fragmentation, ecological linkage, age, abundance,
etc.

4-18
33. If any incompatible land use attributes fall within the study area, proponent shall
describe the sensitivity (distance, area and significance) and propose additional points
based on significance for review and acceptance by the EAC/SEAC. Incompatible
landuse attributes include:
− Public water supply areas from rivers/surface water bodies, from ground water
− Scenic areas/tourism areas/hill resorts
− Religious places, pilgrim centers that attract over 10 lakh pilgrims a year
− Protected tribal settlements (notified tribal areas where industrial activity is not
permitted)
− Monuments of national significance, World Heritage Sites
− Cyclone, Tsunami prone areas (based on last 25 years);
− Airport areas
− Any other feature as specified by the State or local government and other features
as locally applicable, including prime agricultural lands, pastures, migratory
corridors, etc.
34. If ecologically sensitive attributes fall within the study area, proponent shall describe
the sensitivity (distance, area and significance) and propose the additional points
based on significance for review and acceptance by the EAC/SEAC. Ecological
sensitive attributes include:
− National parks
− Wild life sanctuaries
− Tiger reserve/elephant reserve/turtle nesting ground
− Mangrove area
− Wetlands
− Reserved and Protected forests
− Any other closed/protected area under the Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972, any
other area locally applicable
− Any other eco-sensitive areas
35. If the location falls in Valley, specific issues connected to the natural resources
management shall be studied and presented.
36. If the location falls in CRZ area: A CRZ map duly authenticated by one of the
authorized agencies demarcating LTL, HTL, CRZ area, location of the project and
associate facilities w.r.t. CRZ, coastal features such as mangroves, if any.
– Provide the CRZ map in 1:10000 scale in general cases and in 1:5000 scale for
specific observations.
– Proposed site for disposal of dredged material and environmental quality at the
point of disposal/impact areas.
– Fisheries study should be done w.r.t. Benthos and Marine organic material and
coastal fisheries.
Anticipated environmental impacts and mitigation measures
37. Anticipated generic environmental impacts due to this project are indicated in Table
4-2, which may be evaluated for significance and based on corresponding likely
impacts VECs may be identified. Baseline studies may be conducted for all these
VECs and likely impacts will have to be assessed for their magnitude in order to
identify mitigation measures (please refer Chapter 4 of the manual for guidance).

4-19
38. Tools as given in Section 4.4.3 may be referred for the appropriate assessment of
environmental impacts and same may be submitted in draft ToR for consideration and
approval by EAC/SEAC.
39. While identifying the likely impacts, also include the following for analysis aof
significance and required mitigation measures:
− Impacts due to transportation of waste and transport system
− impacts due to leachate generation on groundwater, drainage and surroundings
− impacts due to breeding of domestic flies and their maggots
− impacts due to methane (CH4) and carbon-dioxide (CO2) gas emissions from the
existing waste on AAQ
− impacts on community health effects
− impacts due to fire hazards in waste dump
− impacts due to noise
40. For identifying the mitigation measures, please refer Chapter III for source control
and treatment. Besides typical mitigation measures which may also be considered are
discussed in Table 4-5.
41. Proposed measures for occupational safety and health of the workers.
42. Scheme for stormwater management within and around the proposed facility.
43. Incase of likely impacts from the proposed facility on the surrounding reserve forests,
Plan for the conservation of wild fauna in consultation with the State Forest
Department.
44. Action plan for greenbelt development including the details of species, width of
plantation, planning schedule, etc.
Analysis of alternative resources and technologies
45. Comparison of alternate sites considered and the reasons for selecting the proposed
site. Conformity of the site with the prescribed guidelines in terms of CRZ, river,
highways, railways, etc.
46. Details of improved technologies and better operating practices.
Environmental monitoring program
47. Monitoring of qualitative environmental parameters at source.

48. Monitoring of pollutants at receiving environment for all the appropriate notified
parameters for air quality, groundwater, surface water, etc.
49. Specific programme to monitor safety and health protection of workers. Specific
reference to improving rag pickers quality of life, health concerns, etc.
50. Programme for monitoring of pathogenic density and fly index test.
51. Appropriate monitoring network has to be designed and proposed, to assess the
possible residual impacts on VECs.
52. Yearly monitoring of the ground water quality in and around the MSW facility at
about 25 monitoring stations to record fluctuations and to report.
53. Details of in-house monitoring capabilities and the recognized agencies proposed for
conducting the monitoring.

4-20
Additional studies
54. Details on welfare measures for rag pickers, personal involved in MSW collection
and processing including health checkups.
55. Details on risk assessment and damage control during different phases of the project
and proposed safeguard measures.
56. Details on socio-economic development activities such as commercial property
values, generation of jobs, education, social conflicts, cultural status, accidents, etc.
57. Proposed plan to handle the socio-economic influence on the local community. The
plan should include quantitative dimension as far as possible.
58. Points identified in the public hearing and commitment of the project proponent to the
same. Detailed action plan addressing the issues raised, and the details of necessary
allocation of funds.
Environmental management plan
59. Administrative and technical organizational structure to ensure proposed post-project

monitoring programme for approved mitigation measures.
60. EMP devised to mitigate the adverse impacts of the project should be provided along
with item-wise cost of its implementation (Capital and recurring costs).
61. Allocation of resources and responsibilities for plan implementation.
62. Details of the emergency preparedness plan and on-site and off-site disaster
management plan.
Note:
Above points shall be adequately addressed in the EIA report at corresponding chapters, in
addition to the contents given in the reporting structure (Table: 4-6).
4.4 Environmental Impact Assessment
The generic approach for accomplishing EIA studies is shown in Figure 4.3. Each stage is
discussed, in detail in subsequent sections.

4-21
Figure 4-3: Approach for EIA Study
4.4.1 EIA team
The success of a multi-functional activity like an EIA primarily depends on constitution

of a right team at the right time (preferable at the initial stages of an EIA) in order to
assess the significant impacts (direct, indirect as well as cumulative impacts).
The professional Team identified for a specific EIA study should consist of qualified and
experienced professionals from various disciplines in order to address the critical aspects
identified for the specific project. Based on the nature and the environmental setting,
following professionals may be identified for EIA studies:
̇ Environmental management specialist/regulator

̇ Air and noise quality
̇ Toxicology/Occupational health
̇ Geology/geo-hydrology
̇ Ecologist
̇ Chemical engineer
̇ Transportation Specialist
̇ Safety and health specialist
̇ Social scientist, etc.
4.4.2 Baseline quality of the environment
EIA Notification 2006 specifies that an EIA Report should contain a description of the
existing environment that would be or might be affected directly or indirectly by the

4-22
proposed project. Environmental Baseline Monitoring (EBM) is a very important stage of

EIA. On one hand EBM plays a very vital role in EIA and on the other hand it provides
feedback about the actual environmental impacts of a project. EBM, during the
operational phase, helps in judging the success of mitigation measures in protecting the
environment. Mitigation measures, in turn are used to ensure compliance with
environmental standards, and to facilitate the needed project design or operational
changes.
Description of the existing environment should include natural, cultural, socio-economic

systems and their interrelationships. The intention is not to describe all baseline
conditions, but to focus the collection and description of baseline data on those VECs that
are important and are likely to be affected by the proposed industrial activity.
4.4.2.1 Objectives of EBM in EIA context
The term ‘baseline’ refers to conditions existing before development. EBM studies are
carried out to:
̇ identify environmental conditions which might influence project design decisions

(e.g., site layout, structural or operational characteristics);
̇ identify sensitive issues or areas requiring mitigation or compensation;
̇ provide input data to analytical models used for predicting effects;
̇ provide baseline data against which the results of future monitoring programs can be
compared.
At this stage of EIA process, the EBM is primarily discussed in the context of first
purpose wherein the feedback from EBM programs may be used to:
̇ determine available assimilative capacity of different environmental components

within the designated impact zone and whether more or less stringent mitigation
measures are needed
̇ improve predictive capability of EIAs
There are many institutional, scientific, quality control, and fiscal issues that must be
addressed in implementation of an environmental monitoring program. Careful
consideration of these issues in the design and planning stages will help avoid many of
the pitfalls associated with environmental monitoring programs.
4.4.2.2 Environmental monitoring network design
Monitoring refers to the collection of data through a series of repetitive measurements of

environmental parameters (or, more generally, to a process of systematic observation).
Design of the environmental quality monitoring programme design depends up on the
monitoring objectives specified for the selected area of interest. Types of monitoring and
network design considerations are discussed in Annexure X.
4.4.2.3 Baseline data generation
List of important physical environmental components and indicators of EBM are given in
Table 4-3.

4-23
Table 4-3: List of Important Physical Environment Components

and Indicators of EBM
Environmental Component Environmental Indicators
Climatic variables ̇ Rainfall patterns – mean, mode, seasonality
̇ Temperature patterns
̇ Extreme events
̇ Climate change projections
̇ Prevailing wind - direction, speed, anomalies
̇ Relative humidity
̇ Stability conditions and mixing height, etc.
Topography ̇ Slope form
̇ Landform and terrain analysis
̇ Specific landform types, etc.
Drainage ̇ Surface hydrology
̇ Natural drainage pattern and network
̇ Rainfall runoff relationships
̇ Hydrogeology
̇ Groundwater characteristics – springs, etc.
Soil ̇ Type and characteristics
̇ Porosity and permeability
̇ Sub-soil permeability
̇ Run-off rate
̇ Infiltration capacity
̇ Effective depth (inches/centimeters)
̇ Inherent fertility
̇ Suitability for method of sewage disposal, etc.
Geology ̇ Underlying rock type, texture
̇ Surgical material
̇ Geologic structures (faults, shear zones, etc.)
̇ Geologic resources (minerals, etc.)
Water ̇ Raw water availability
̇ Water quality
̇ Surface water (rivers, lakes, ponds, gullies) – quality,
water depths, flooding areas, etc.
̇ Ground water – water table, local aquifer storage
capacity, specific yeild, specific retention, water level
depths and fluctuations, etc.
̇ Coastal
̇ Floodplains
̇ Wastewater discharges
̇ Waste discharges, etc.
Air ̇ Ambient
̇ Respirable
̇ Airshed importance
̇ Odour levels, etc.
Noise ̇ Identiyfing sources of noise
̇ Noise due to traffic/transportation of vehicles
̇ Noise due to heavy euipment operations
̇ Duration and variations in noise over time, etc.
Coastal dynamics and ̇ Wave patterns
morphology ̇ Currents
̇ Shoreline morphology – near shore, foreshore

4-24
Environmental Component Environmental Indicators

̇ Sediment – characteristics and transport, etc.
Biological ̇ Species composition of flora and fauna
̇ Flora – type, density, exploitation, etc.
̇ Fauna – distribution, abundance, rarity, migratory, species
diversity, habitat requirements, habitat resilience,
economic significance, comemrcial value, etc.
̇ Fisheries – migratory species, species with commercial/
recreational value, etc.
Landuse ̇ Landuse pattern, etc.
Guidance for assessment of baseline components and attributes describing sampling

network, sampling frequency, method of measurement is given in Annexure XI.
Infrastructure requirements for EBM
In addition to devising a monitoring network design and monitoring plans/program, it is

also necessary to ensure adequate resources in terms of staffing, skills, equipment,
training, budget, etc., for its implementation. Besides assigning institutional
responsibility, reporting requirements, QA/QC plans and its enforcement capability are
essential. A monitoring program that does not have an infrastructural support and QA/QC
component will have little chance of success.
Defining data statistics/analyses requirements
The data analyses to be conducted are dictated by the objectives of the environmental
monitoring program. Statistical methods used to analyze data should be described in
detail prior to data collection. This is important because repetitive observations are
recorded in time and space. Besides, the statistical methods could also be chosen so that
uncertainty or error estimates in the data can be quantified. For e.g., statistical methods
useful in an environmental monitoring program include: 1) frequency distribution
analysis; 2) analysis of variance; 3) analysis of covariance; 4) cluster analysis; 5) multiple
regression analysis; 6) time series analysis; 7) the application of statistical models.
Use of secondary data
The EBM program for EIA can at best address temporal and/or spatial variations limited
to a limited extent because of cost implications and time limitations. Therefore analysis
of all available information or data is essential to establish the regional profiles. So all the
relevant secondary data available for different environmental components should be
collated and analyzed.
To facilitate stakeholders, IL&FS Ecosmart Ltd., has made an attempt to compile the list
of information required for EIA studies and sources of secondary data, which are given in
Annexure XIIA and Annexure XIIB.

4-25
4.4.3 Impact prediction tools
The scientific and technical credibility of an EIA relies on the ability of EIA practitioners
to estimate the nature, extent, and magnitude of change in environmental components that
may result from project activities. Information about predicted changes is needed for
assigning impact significance, prescribing mitigation measures, and designing &
developing EMPs and monitoring programs. The more accurate the predictions, the more
confident the EIA practitioner will be in prescribing specific measures to eliminate or
minimize the adverse impacts of development project.
Choice of models/methods for impact predictions in respect to air, noise, water, land,
biological and socio-economic environment are tabulated in Annexure XIII.
4.4.4 Significance of the impacts
Evaluating the significance of environmental effects is perhaps the most critical

component of impact analysis. The interpretation of significance bears directly on the
subsequent EIA process and also during prior environmental clearance on project
approvals and condition setting. At an early stage, it also enters into screening and
scoping decisions on what level of assessment is required and which impacts and issues
will be addressed.
Impact significance is also a key to choosing among alternatives. In total, the attribution
of significance continues throughout the EIA process, from scoping to EIS review, in a
gradually narrowing “cone of resolution” in which one stage sets up the next. But at this
stage it is the most important as better understanding and quantification of impact
significance is required.
One common approach is based on determination of the significance of predicted changes

in the baseline environmental characteristics and compares these w.r.t regulatory
standards, objective criteria and similar ‘thresholds’ as eco-sensitivity, cultural /religious
values. Often, these are outlined in guidance. A better test proposed by the CEAA
(1995) is to determine if ‘residual’ environmental effects are adverse, significant, and
likely (given under). But at this stage, the practice of formally evaluating significance of
residual impacts, i.e., after predicting the nature and magnitude of impacts based on
before-versus-after-project comparisons, and identifying measures to mitigate these
effects is not being followed in a systematic way.
i. Step 1: Are the environmental effects adverse?
Criteria for determining if effects are “adverse” include:
̇ effects on biota health

̇ effects on rare or endangered species
̇ reductions in species diversity
̇ habitat loss
̇ transformation of natural landscapes
̇ effects on human health
̇ effects on current use of lands and resources for traditional purposes by aboriginal
persons
̇ foreclosure of future resource use or production

4-26
ii. Step 2: Are the adverse environmental effects significant?
Criteria for determining ‘significance’ are to judge that the impacts:
̇ are extensive over space or time

̇ are intensive in concentration or proportion to assimilative capacity
̇ exceed environmental standards or thresholds
̇ do not comply with environmental policies, landuse plans, sustainability strategy
̇ adversely and seriously affect ecologically sensitive areas
̇ adversely and seriously affect heritage resources, other landuses, community lifestyle
and/or indigenous peoples traditions and values
iii. Step 3: Are the significant adverse environmental effects likely?
Criteria for determining ‘likelihood’ include:
̇ probability of occurrence, and

̇ scientific uncertainty
4.5 Social Impact Assessment
Social Impact Assessment (SIA) is an instrument used to analyze social issues and solicit
stakeholder views for the design of projects. SIA helps in making the project responsive
to social development concerns, including options that enhance benefits for poor and
vulnerable people while mitigating risk and adverse impacts. It analyzes distributional
impacts of intended project benefits on different stakeholder groups, and identifies
differences in assets and capabilities to access the project benefits.
The scope and depth of SIA should be determined by the complexity and importance of
the issues studied, taking into account the skills and resources available. SIA should
include studies related to involuntary resettlement, compulsory land acquisition, impact of
imported workforces, job losses among local people, damage to sites of cultural, historic
or scientific interest, impact on minority or vulnerable groups, child or bonded labour, use
of armed security guards. However, SIA may primarily include the following:
Description of the socio-economic, cultural and institutional profile
Conduct a rapid review of available sources of information to describe the socio-

economic, cultural and institutional interface in which the project operates.
Socio-economic and cultural profile: Describe the most significant social, economic and
cultural features that differentiate social groups in the project area. Describe their
different interests in the project, and their levels of influence. Explain specific effects that
the project may have on the poor and underprivileged. Identify any known conflicts
among groups that may affect project implementation.
Institutional profile: Describe the institutional environment; consider both the presence
and function of public, private and civil society institutions relevant to the operation. Are
there important constraints within existing institutions e.g. disconnect between
institutional responsibilities and the interests and behaviors of personnel within those
institutions? Or are there opportunities to utilize the potential of existing institutions, e.g.
private or civil society institutions, to strengthen implementation capacity.

4-27
Legislative and regulatory considerations
To review laws and regulations governing the project’s implementation and access of
poor and excluded groups to goods, services and opportunities provided by the project. In
addition, review the enabling environment for public participation and development
planning. SIA should build on strong aspects of legal and regulatory systems to facilitate
program implementation and identify weak aspects while recommending alternative
arrangements.
Key social issues
SIA provides baseline information for designing the social development strategy. The
analysis should determine the key social and institutional issues which affect the project
objectives; identify the key stakeholder groups in this context and determine how
relationships between stakeholder groups will affect or be affected by the project; and
identify expected social development outcomes and actions proposed to achieve those
outcomes.
Data collection and methodology
Describe the design and methodology for social analysis. In this regard:
̇ Build on existing data;

̇ Clarify the units of analysis for social assessment: intra-household, household level,
as well as communities/settlements and other relevant social aggregations on which
data is available or will be collected for analysis;
̇ Choose appropriate data collection and analytical tools and methods, employing
mixed methods wherever possible; mixed methods include a mix of quantitative and
qualitative methods.
Strategy to achieve social development outcomes
Identify the likely social development outcomes of the project and propose a Social
development strategy, including recommendations for institutional arrangements to
achieve them, based on the findings of the social assessment. The social development
strategy could include measures that:
̇ strengthen social inclusion by ensuring both poor and excluded groups and intended
beneficiaries are included in the benefit stream; offer access to opportunities created
by the project
̇ empower stakeholders through their participation in the design and implementation of
the project, their access to information, and their increased voice and accountability
(i.e. a participation framework); and
̇ enhance security by minimizing and managing likely social risks and increasing the
resilience of intended beneficiaries and affected persons to socioeconomic shocks
Implications for analysis of alternatives
Review proposed approaches for the project, and compare them in terms of their relative
impacts and social development outcomes. Consider what implications the findings of the
social assessment might have on those approaches. Should some new components be
added to the approach, or other components be reconsidered or modified?

4-28
If SIA and consultation processes indicate that alternative may have better development
outcomes, such alternatives should be described and considered, along with the likely
budgetary and administrative effects these changes might have.
Recommendations for project design and implementation arrangements
Provide guidance to project management and other stakeholders on how to integrate

social development issues into project design and implementation arrangements. As much
as possible, suggest specific action plans or implementation mechanisms to address
relevant social issues and potential impacts. These can be developed as integrated or
separate action plans, for example, as Resettlement Action Plans, Indigenous Peoples
Development Plans, Community Development Plans, etc.
Developing a monitoring plan
Through SIA process, a framework for monitoring and evaluation should be developed.
To the extent possible, this should be done in consultation with key stakeholders,
especially beneficiaries and affected people.
The framework shall identify expected social development indicators, establish

benchmarks, and design systems and mechanisms for measuring progress and results
related to social development objectives. The framework shall identify organizational
responsibilities in terms of monitoring, supervision, and evaluation procedures. Wherever
possible, participatory monitoring mechanisms shall be incorporated. The framework
should establish:
̇ A set of monitoring indicators to track the progress achieved. The benchmarks and
indicators should be limited in number, and should combine both quantitative and
qualitative types of data. The indicators for outputs to be achieved by the social
development strategy should include indicators to monitor the process of stakeholder
participation, implementation and institutional reform
̇ Indicators to monitor social risk and social development outcomes; and indicators to
monitor impacts of the project’s social development strategy. It is important to suggest
mechanisms through which lessons learned from monitoring and stakeholder feedback
can result in changes to improve the operation of the project. Indicators should be of
such a nature that results and impacts can be disaggregated by gender and other
relevant social groups
̇ Define transparent evaluation procedures. Depending on context, these may include a
combination of methods, such as participant observation, key informant interviews,
focus group discussions, census and socio-economic surveys, gender analysis,
Participatory Rural Appraisal (PRA), Participatory Poverty Assessment (PPA)
methodologies, and other tools. Such procedures should be tailored to the special
conditions of the project and to the different groups living in the project area; Estimate
resource and budget requirements for monitoring and evaluation activities, and a
description of other inputs (such as institutional strengthening and capacity building)
needed to be carried out.
4.6 Risk Assessment
Industrial accidents results in great personal and financial loss. Managing these
accidental risks in today’s environment is the concern of every sector including CMSWM

4-29
facilities, because either real or perceived incidents can quickly jeopardize the financial
viability of a business. Many facilities involve various manufacturing processes that have
the potential for accidents which may be catastrophic to the plant, work force,
environment, or public.
The main objective of risk assessment study is to propose a comprehensive but simple
approach to carry out risk analysis and conducting feasibility studies for industries,
planning and management of industrial prototype hazard analysis study in Indian context.
Risk analysis and risk assessment should provide details on Quantitative Risk
Assessment (QRA) techniques used world-over to determine risk posed to people who
work inside or live near hazardous facilities, and to aid in preparing effective emergency
response plans by delineating a Disaster Management Plan (DMP) to handle onsite and
offsite emergencies. Hence, QRA is an invaluable method for making informed risk-
based process safety and environmental impact planning decisions, as well as being
fundamental to any decision while siting a facility. QRA whether, site-specific or risk-
specific for any plant is complex and needs extensive study that involves process
understanding, hazard identification, consequence modeling, probability data,
vulnerability models/data, local weather and terrain conditions and local population data.
QRA may be carried out to serve the following objectives.
̇ Identification of safety areas

̇ Identification of hazard sources
̇ Generation of accidental release scenarios for escape of hazardous materials from the
facility
̇ Identification of vulnerable units with recourse to hazard indices
̇ Estimation of damage distances for the accidental release scenarios with recourse to
Maximum Credible Accident (MCA) analysis
̇ Hazard and Operability studies (HAZOP) in order to identify potential failure cases of
significant consequences
̇ Estimation of probability of occurrences of hazardous event through fault tree
analysis and computation of reliability of various control paths
̇ Assessment of risk on basis of above evaluation against the risk acceptability criteria
relevant to the situation
̇ Suggest risk mitigation measures based on engineering judgment, reliability and risk
analysis approaches
̇ Delineation / up-gradation of DMP
̇ Safety Reports: with external safety report/ occupational safety report
The risk assessment report may cover the following in terms of the extent of damage with
resource to MCA analysis and delineation of risk mitigations measures with an approach
to DMP.
̇ Hazard identification – identification of hazardous activities, hazardous materials,

past accident records, etc.
̇ Hazard quantification – consequence analysis to assess the impacts
̇ Risk presentation
̇ Risk mitigation measures
̇ DMPs

4-30
Figure 4-4: Risk Assessment – Conceptual Framework

Methods of risk prediction should cover all the design intentions and operating
parameters to quantify risk in terms of probability of occurrence of hazardous events and
magnitude of its consequence. Table 4-4 shows the predictive models for risk assessment.
Table 4-4: Choice of Models for Impact Predictions: Risk Assessment
Name Application Remarks

EFFECT Consequence Analysis for Visualization Heat load, press wave &
of accidental chemical release scenarios toxic release exposure
& its consequence neutral gas dispersion
Consequence Analysis for Visualization
WHAZAN
of accidental chemical release scenarios
& its consequence
EGADIS Consequence Analysis for Visualization Dense gas dispersion
of accidental chemical release scenarios
& its consequence
HAZOP and Fault For estimating top event probability Failure frequency data is
Tree Assessment required
Pathways reliability For estimating reliability of equipments Markov models
and protective system and protective systems
hazard analysis
Vulnerability Estimation of population exposure Uses probit equation for
Exposure models population exposure
F-X and F-N curves Individual / Societal risks Graphical Representation

4-31
Figure 4-5: Comprehensive Risk Assessment - At a Glance

4-32
4.7 Mitigation Measures
The purpose of mitigation is to identify measures that safeguard the environment and the
community affected by the proposal. Mitigation is both a creative and practical phase of
the EIA process. It seeks to find the best ways and means of avoiding, minimizing and
remedying impacts. Mitigation measures must be translated into action in right way and
at the right time, if they are to be successful. This process is referred to as impact
management and takes place during project implementation. A written plan should be
prepared for this purpose, and should include a schedule of agreed actions. Opportunities
for impact mitigation will occur throughout the project cycle.
4.7.1 Important considerations for mitigation methods
The responsibility of project proponents to ‘internalize’ the full environmental costs of

development proposals is now widely accepted under “Polluter Pay” principle. In
addition, many proponents have found that good design and impact management can
result in significant savings applying the principles of cleaner production to improve their
environmental performance.
̇ The predicted adverse environmental as well as social impacts for which mitigation
measures are required should be identified and briefly summarized along with cross
referencing them to the significance, prediction components of the EIA report or other
documentation.
̇ Each mitigation measure should be briefly described w.r.t the impact of significances
to which it relates and the conditions under which it is required (for example,
continuously or in the event of contingencies). These should also be cross-referenced
to the project design and operating procedures which elaborate on the technical aspects
of implementing the various measures.
̇ Cost and responsibilities for mitigation and monitoring should be clearly defined,
including arrangements for coordination among various authorities responsible for
mitigation.
̇ The proponent can use the EMP to develop environmental performance standards and
requirements for the project site as well as supply chain. An EMP can be implemented
through EMS for the operational phase of the project.
Prior to selecting mitigation plans it is appropriate to study the mitigation alternatives for
cost-effectiveness, technical and socio-political feasibility. Such mitigation measures
could include:
̇ avoiding sensitive areas such as eco-sensitive area e.g. fish spawning areas, dense
mangrove areas or areas known to contain rare or endangered species
̇ adjusting work schedules to minimize disturbance
̇ engineered structures such as berms and noise attenuation barriers
̇ pollution control devices such as scrubbers and electrostatic precipitators
̇ changes in fuel feed, manufacturing, process, technology use, or waste management
practices, etc.

4-33
4.7.2 Hierarchy of elements of mitigation plan
Figure 4-6: Elements of Mitigation

A good EIA practice requires technical understanding of relevant issues and the measures
that work in such given circumstances: The priority of selection of mitigation measures
should be in the order:
Step One: Impact avoidance
This step is most effective when applied at an early stage of project planning. It can be
achieved by:
̇ not undertaking certain projects or elements that could result in adverse impacts
̇ avoiding areas that are environmentally sensitive
̇ putting in place the preventative measures to stop adverse impacts from occurring, for
example, release of water from a reservoir to maintain a fisheries regime
Step Two: Impact minimization
This step is usually taken during impact identification and prediction to limit or reduce
the degree, extent, magnitude, or duration of adverse impacts. It can be achieved by:
̇ scaling down or relocating the proposal

̇ redesigning elements of the project
̇ taking supplementary measures to manage the impacts
Step Three: Impact compensation
This step is usually applied to remedy unavoidable residual adverse impacts. It can be
achieved by:
̇ rehabilitation of the affected site or environment, for example, by habitat

enhancement and restocking fish
̇ restoration of the affected site or environment to its previous state or better, as
typically required for mine sites, forestry roads and seismic lines
̇ replacement of the same resource values at another location. For example, by
wetland engineering to provide an equivalent area to that lost to drainage or infill.

4-34
Important compensation elements
Resettlement Plans: Special considerations apply to mitigation of proposals that displace

or disrupt people. Certain types of projects, such as reservoirs and irrigation schemes and
public works, are known to cause involuntary resettlement. This is a contentious issue
because it involves far more than re-housing people; in addition, income sources and
access to common property resources are likely to be lost. Almost certainly, a
resettlement plan will be required to ensure that no one is worse off than before, which
may not be possible for indigenous people whose culture and lifestyle is tied to a locality.
This plan must include the means for those displaced to reconstruct their economies and
communities and should include an EIA of the receiving areas. Particular attention
should be given to indigenous, minority and vulnerable groups who are at higher risk
from resettlement.
In-kind compensation
When significant or net residual loss or damage to the environment is likely, in kind
compensation is appropriate. As noted earlier, environmental rehabilitation, restoration or
replacement have become standard practices for many proponents. Now, increasing
emphasis is given to a broader range of compensation measures to offset impacts and
assure the sustainability of development proposals. These include impact compensation
‘trading’, such as offsetting CO2 emissions by planting forests to sequester carbon.
4.7.3 Typical mitigation measures
Choice of location for the developmental activity plays an important role in preventing
adverse impacts on surrounding environment. Detailed guidelines on siting of industries
are provided in Section 4.2. However, if the developmental activity produces any more
impacts, mitigation measures should be taken.
Previous subsections of the Section 4.7 could be precisely summarized into following:
̇ Impacts from a developmental project could have many dimensions. As most of the
direct impacts are caused by releases from developmental projects, often impact
control at source is the best opportunity to either eliminate or mitigate the impacts. In
other words, the best way to mitigate impacts is to prevent them from occurring.
Choice of raw materials/technologies/processes which produce least impact would be
one of the options to achieve it.
̇ In case, if it is not feasible to control impacts at source, various interventions to
minimize the adverse impacts may be considered. These interventions, primarily aim
at reducing the residual impacts on VECs of the receiving environment to the
acceptable concentrations.
̇ Degree of control at source and external interventions differs from situation-to -
situation and is largely governed by techno-economic feasibility. While the regulatory
bodies stress for further source control (due to high reliability), the project proponents
bargain for other interventions which may be relatively cost-effective than further
control at source (in any case project authority is required to meet the project-specific
standards by adopting the best practicable technologies. However, if the location
demands further control at source, then the proponents are required to adopt further
advanced control technologies i.e. towards best available control technologies). After
having discussions with the project proponent, EAC/SEAC reaches to an agreed level

4-35
of source control + other interventions (together called as mitigation measures in the

given context) that achieve the targeted protection levels for the VECs in the receiving
environment. These levels will become the principle clearance conditions.
̇ Chapter 3 of this technical EIA Guidance Manual offers elaborate information on
cleaner technologies, waste minimization opportunities, and control technologies for
various kinds of polluting parameters that emanate from this developmental activity.
This information may be used to draw appropriate control measures applicable at
source.
The choice of interventions for mitigation of impacts may also be numerous and depend
on various factors. Mitigation measures based on location-specific suitability and some
other factors are discussed in sub-sections 4.7.1 and 4.7.2. A few other measures which
may also be explored for mitigation of impacts are listed in Table 4-5.
Table 4-5: Typical Mitigation Measures
Impacts Typical Mitigation Measures

Soil erosion ̇ Windscreens, maintenance, and installation of ground cover
̇ Installation of drainage ditches
̇ Runoff and retention ponds
̇ Minimize disturbances and scarification of the surface, etc.
Resources – ̇ Optimization of resource use
fuel/construction ̇ Availing resources with least impact – eco-efficiency options are
material/ land use applicable
̇ Availing the resources which could be replenished by natural
systems, etc.
Deforestation ̇ Plant or create similar areas
̇ Initiate a tree planning program in other areas
̇ Donate land to conservationalist groups, etc.
Water pollution ̇ Conjunctive use of ground/surface water, to prevent flooding/water
logging/depletion of water resources. Included are land use pattern,
land filling, lagoon/reservoir/garland canal construction, and
rainwater harvesting and pumping rate.
̇ Minimise flow variation from the mean flow
̇ Storing of oil wastes in lagoons should be minimised in order to
avoid possible contamination of the ground water system.
̇ All effluents containing acid/alkali/organic/toxic wastes should be
properly treated.
̇ Collection and treatment of lechate, sewage and storm water run-off
̇ Increased recycling of treated lechate
̇ Monitoring of ground waters
̇ Use of biodegradable or otherwise readily treatable additives
̇ Neutralization and sedimentation of wastewaters, where applicable
̇ Dewatering of sludges and appropriate disposal of solids
̇ Construction of liners before disposing waste
̇ In case of oil waste, oil separation before treatment and discharge
into the environment
̇ By controlling discharge of sanitary sewage and industrial waste with
suspended solids into the environment
̇ By avoiding the activities that increases erosion or that contributes
nutrients to water (thus stimulating alga growth)
̇ For wastes containing high TDS, treatment methods include removal
of liquid and disposal of residue by controlled landfilling to avoid

4-36

any possible leaching of the fills
̇ All surface runoffs around mines or quarries should be collected
treated and disposed.
̇ Treated wastewater (such as sewage, industrial wastes, or stored
surface runoffs) can be used as cooling water makeup.
̇ Wastewater carrying radioactive elements should be treated
separately by means of de-watering procedures, and solids or brine
should be disposed of with special care.
̇ Develop spill prevention plans in case of chemical discharges and
spills
̇ Develop traps and containment system and chemically treat
discharges on site, etc.
Air Pollution ̇ Attenuation of pollution/protection of receptor through green
belts/green cover
̇ Use of particulate removal devices such as cyclones, setting
chambers, scrubbers, electrostatic precipitators, bag houses, etc.
̇ Use of gas removal devices using absorption (liquid as a media),
adsorption (molecular sieve), and catalytic converters
̇ Use of protected, controlled equipments such as oxygen masks,
houston astrodome, etc.
̇ Control of stationary source emission (including evaporation,
incineration, absorption, condensation, and material substitution)
̇ Dilution of odourant (dilution can change the nature as well as
strength of an odour), odour counteraction or neutralise (certain pairs
of odours in appropriate concentrations may neutralise each other),
odour masking or blanketing (certain weaker malodours may be
suppressed by a considerably stronger good odour).
̇ Regular monitoring of air polluting concentrations, etc.
Dust pollution ̇ Wetting of roadways to reduce traffic dust and reentrained particles
̇ Installation of windscreens to breakup the wind flow
̇ Burning of refuse on days when meteorological conditions provide
for good mixing and dispersion
̇ Providing dust collection equipment at all possible points
̇ Maintaining dust levels within permissible limits
̇ Provision for masks when dust level exceeds, etc.
Noise pollution ̇ Use of heavy duty muffler systems on heavy equipment
̇ Limiting certain activities
̇ By using damping, absorption, dissipation, and deflection methods
̇ By using common techniques such as constructing sound enclosures,
applying mufflers, mounting noise sources on isolators, and/or using
materials with damping properties
̇ Performance specifications for noise represent a way to insure the
procured item is controlled
̇ Use of ear protective devices.
̇ In case of steady noise levels above 85-dB (A), initiation of hearing
conservation measures, etc.
Biological ̇ Installation of systems to discourage nesting or perching of birds in
dangerous environments
̇ Increased employee awareness to sensitive areas, etc.
Social ̇ Health and safety measures for workers
̇ Development of traffic plan that minimizes road use by workers
̇ Upgradation of roads and intersections, etc.
Marine ̇ Water quality monitoring program

4-37

environment ̇ Appropriate system to barges/workboats for collection of liquid/solid
waste generated onboard
̇ Checking with the complainace conditions before discharging, etc.
4.8 Environmental Management Plan
A typical EMP shall be composed of the following:
1. summary of potential impacts of the proposal

2. description of recommended mitigation measures
3. description of monitoring programme to ensure compliance with relevant standards
and residual impacts
4. allocation of resources and responsibilities for plan implementation
5. implementation schedule and reporting procedures
6. contingency plan when impacts are greater than expected
Summary of impacts: The predicted adverse environmental and social impacts for which
mitigation measures are identified in earlier sections to be briefly summarized with cross
referencing to the corresponding sections in the EIA report.
Description of mitigation measures: Each mitigation measure should be briefly

described w.r.t the impact to which it relates and the conditions under which it is required.
These should be accompanied by/referenced to, project design and operating procedures
which elaborate on the technical aspects of implementing various measures.
Description of monitoring programme to ensure compliance with relevant standards

and residual impacts: Environmental monitoring refers to compliance monitoring and
residual impact monitoring. Compliance monitoring refers to meeting the project-specific
statutory compliance requirements (Ref. Applicable National regulations as detailed in
Chapter 3).
Residual impact monitoring refers to monitoring of identified sensitive locations with

adequate number of samples and frequency. The monitoring programme should clearly
indicate the linkages between impacts identified in the EIA report, measurement
indicators, detection limits (where appropriate), and definition of thresholds that signal
the need for corrective actions.
Allocation of resources and responsibilities for plan implementation: These should be

specified for both the initial investment and recurring expenses for implementing all
measures contained in the EMP, integrated into the total project costs, and factored into
loan negotiation.
The EMP should contain commitments that are binding on the proponent in different
phases of project implementation i.e., pre-construction or site clearance, construction,
operation, decommissioning.

4-38
Responsibilities for mitigation and monitoring should be clearly defined, including

arrangements for coordination between various factors responsible for mitigation. Details
should be provided w.r.t deployment of staff (detailed organogram), monitoring network
design, parameters to be monitored, analysis methods, associated equipments, etc.
Implementation schedule and reporting procedures: The timing, frequency and

duration of mitigation measure should be specified in an implementation schedule,
showing links with overall project implementation. Procedures to provide information on
progress and results of mitigation and monitoring measures should also be clearly
specified.
Contingency Plan when the impacts are greater than expected: There shall be a
contingency plan for attending the situations where the residual impacts are higher than
expected. It is an imperative requirement for all the project Authorities to plan additional
programmes to deal with the situation, after duly intimating the concerned local
regulatory bodies.
4.9 Reporting
Structure of the EIA report (Appendix III of the EIA Notification), applicable for
CMSWM facility is given in the Table 4.6. Each task prescribed in ToR shall be
incorporated appropriately in the contents in addition to the contents described in the
table.
Table 4-6: Structure of EIA Report

S.No EIA Structure Contents
1. Introduction ̇ Purpose of the report
̇ Identification of project & project proponent
̇ Brief description of nature, size, location of the project
and its importance to the country, region
̇ Scope of the study – details of regulatory scoping carried
out (As per Terms of Reference)
2. Project Description Condensed description of those aspects of the project (based
on project feasibility study), likely to cause environmental
effects. Details should be provided to give clear picture of the
following:
̇ Type of project
̇ Need for the project
̇ Location (maps showing general location, specific
location, project boundary & project site layout)
̇ Size or magnitude of operation (incl. Associated activities
required by or for the project)
̇ Proposed schedule for approval and implementation
̇ Technology and process description
̇ Project description including drawings showing project
layout, components of project etc. Schematic
representations of the feasibility drawings which give
information important for EIA purpose
̇ Description of mitigation measures incorporated into the
project to meet environmental standards, environmental
operating conditions, or other EIA requirements (as
required by the scope)
̇ Assessment of new & untested technology for the risk of

4-39
S.No EIA Structure Contents

technological failure
3. Description of the ̇ Study area, period, components & methodology
Environment ̇ Establishment of baseline for VECs, as identified in the
scope
̇ Base maps of all environmental components
4. Anticipated ̇ Details of Investigated Environmental impacts due to
Environmental project location, possible accidents, project design,
Impacts & Mitigation project construction, regular operations, final
Measures decommissioning or rehabilitation of a completed project
̇ Measures for minimizing and / or offsetting adverse
impacts identified
̇ Irreversible and irretrievable commitments of
environmental components
̇ Assessment of significance of impacts (Criteria for
determining significance, Assigning significance)
̇ Mitigation measures
5. Analysis of ̇ Incase, the scoping exercise results in need for
Alternatives alternatives:
(Technology & Site) ̇ Description of each alternative
̇ Summary of adverse impacts of each alternative
̇ Mitigation measures proposed for each alternative and
selection of alternative
6. Environmental ̇ Technical aspects of monitoring the effectiveness of
Monitoring Program mitigation measures (incl. measurement methodologies,
frequency, location, data analysis, reporting schedules,
emergency procedures, detailed budget & procurement
schedules)
7. Additional Studies ̇ Public consultation
̇ Risk assessment
̇ Social impact assessment, R&R action plans
8. Project Benefits ̇ Improvements in physical infrastructure
̇ Improvements in social infrastructure
̇ Employment potential –skilled; semi-skilled and
unskilled
̇ Other tangible benefits
9. Environmental Cost ̇ If recommended at the scoping stage
Benefit Analysis
10. EMP ̇ Description of the administrative aspects that ensures
proper implementation of mitigative measures and their
effectiveness monitored, after approval of the EIA
11. Summary & ̇ Overall justification for implementation of the project
Conclusion (This ̇ Explanation of how, adverse effects have been mitigated
will constitute the
summary of the EIA
Report)
12. Disclosure of ̇ Names of the Consultants engaged with their brief resume
Consultants engaged and nature of Consultancy rendered

4-40
4.10 Public Consultation
Public consultation refers to the process by which the concerns of local affected people
and others who have plausible stake in the environmental impacts of the project or
activity are ascertained.
̇ Public consultation is not a decision taking process, but is a process to collect views of
the people having plausible stake. If the SPCB/Public agency conducting public
hearing is not convinced with the plausible stake, then such expressed views need not
be considered.
̇ Public consultation involves two components, one is public hearing, and other one is
inviting written responses/objections through Internet/by post, etc., by placing the
summary of EIA report on the web site.
̇ All Category A and Category B1 projects require public hearing except the following:
− Once prior environmental clearance is granted to an industrial estates/SEZs/EPZs
etc., for a given composition (type and capacity) of industries, then individual
units including common MSW facilities within the industrial estate if any, will
not require public hearing
− Expansion of roads and highways, which do not involve any further acquisition of
land.
− All building/construction projects/area development projects/townships
− All Category B2 projects
− All projects concerning national defense and security or involving other strategic
considerations as determined by the Central Government
̇ Public hearing shall be carried out at the site or in its close proximity, district-wise, for
ascertaining concerns of local affected people.
̇ Project proponent shall make a request through a simple letter to the
Member Secretary of the SPCB/UTPCC to arrange public hearing.
̇ Project proponent shall enclose with the letter of request, at least 10 hard copies and 10
soft copies of the draft EIA report including the summary EIA report in English and in
the official language of the state/local language prepared as per the approved scope of
work, to the concerned Authority.
̇ Simultaneously, project proponent shall arrange to send, one hard copy and one soft
copy, of the above draft EIA report along with the summary EIA report to the
following Authorities within whose jurisdiction the project will be located:
− District magistrate/District Collector/Deputy Commissioner(s)
− Zilla parishad and municipal corporation or panchayats union
− District industries office
− Urban local bodies (ULBs)/PRIs concerned/development authorities
− Concerned regional office of the MoEF/SPCB
̇ Above mentioned Authorities except Regional office of MoEF shall arrange to widely
publicize the draft EIA report within their respective jurisdictions requesting the
interested persons to send their comments to the concerned regulatory authorities.
They shall also make draft EIA report for inspection electronically or otherwise to the
public during normal office hours till the public hearing is over.

4-41
̇ Concerned regulatory Authority (MoEF/SEIAA/UTEIA) shall display the summary of

EIA report on its website and also make full draft EIA report available for reference at
a notified place during normal office hours at their head office.
̇ SPCB or UTPCC concerned shall also make similar arrangements for giving publicity
about the project within the State/UT and make available the summary of draft EIA
report for inspection in select offices, public libraries or any other suitable location,
etc. They shall also additionally make available a copy of the draft EIA report to the
above five authorities/offices as mentioned above.
̇ The Member-Secretary of the concerned SPCB or UTPCC shall finalize the date, time
and exact venue for the conduct of public hearing within seven days of the date of the
receipt of the draft EIA report from the project proponent and advertise the same in
one major National Daily and one Regional vernacular Daily/Official State Language.
̇ A minimum notice period of 30 (thirty) days shall be provided to the public for
furnishing their responses.
̇ No postponement of the date, time, venue of the public hearing shall be undertaken,
unless some untoward emergency situation occurs and then only on the
recommendation of the concerned District Magistrate/District Collector/Deputy
commissioner, the postponement shall be notified to the public through the same
National and Regional vernacular dailies and also prominently displayed at all the
identified offices by the concerned SPCB/UTPCC
̇ In the above exceptional circumstances fresh date, time and venue for the public
consultation shall be decided by the Member-Secretary of the concerned SPCB/
UTPCC only in consultation with the District Magistrate/District Collector/Deputy
commissioner and notified afresh as per the procedure.
̇ The District Magistrate/District Collector/Deputy commissioner or his or her
representative not below the rank of an Additional District Magistrate assisted by a
representative of SPCB/UTPCC, shall supervise and preside over the entire public
hearing process.
̇ The SPCB/UTPCC shall arrange to video film the entire proceedings. A copy of the
videotape or a CD shall be enclosed with the public hearing proceedings while
forwarding it to the Regulatory Authority concerned.
̇ The attendance of all those who are present at the venue shall be noted and annexed
with the final proceedings
̇ There shall be no quorum required for attendance for starting the proceedings
̇ Persons present at the venue shall be granted the opportunity to seek information or
clarifications on the project from the proponent. The summary of the public hearing
proceedings accurately reflecting all the views and concerns expressed shall be
recorded by the representative of the SPCB/UTPCC and read over to the audience at
the end of the proceedings explaining the contents in the local/vernacular language and
the agreed minutes shall be signed by the District Magistrate/District Collector/Deputy
commissioner or his or her representative on the same day and forwarded to the
SPCB/UTPCC concerned.
̇ A statement of the issues raised by the public and the comments of the proponent shall
also be prepared in the local language or the official State language, as the case may
be, and in English and annexed to the proceedings.
̇ The proceedings of the public hearing shall be conspicuously displayed at the office of
the Panchayats within whose jurisdiction the project is located, office of the concerned

4-42
Zilla Parishad, District Magistrate/District Collector/Deputy commissioner, and the

SPCB or UTPCC. The SPCB or UTPCC shall also display the proceedings on its
website for general information. Comments, if any, on the proceedings, may be sent
directly to the concerned regulatory authorities and the proponent concerned.
̇ The public hearing shall be completed within a period of forty five days from date of
receipt of the request letter from the proponent. Therefore the SPCB or UTPCC
concerned shall send the public hearing proceedings to the concerned regulatory
authority within eight days of the completion of the public hearing. Simultaneously, a
copy will also be provided to the project proponent. The proponent may also directly
forward a copy of the approved public hearing proceedings to the regulatory authority
concerned along with the final EIA report or supplementary report to the draft EIA
report prepared after the public hearing and public consultations incorporating the
concerns expressed in the public hearing along with action plan and financial
allocation, item-wise, to address those concerns.
̇ Upon receipt of the same, the Authority will place executive summary of the report on
the website to invite responses from other concerned persons having a plausible stake
in the environmental aspects of the project or activity.
̇ If SPCB/UTPCC is unable to conduct the public hearing in the prescribed time, the
Central Government incase of Category A projects and State Government or UT
administration in case of Category B projects at the request of the SEIAA can engage
any other agency or authority for conducting the public hearing process within a
further period of 45 days. The respective governments shall pay the appropriate fee to
the public agency for conducting public hearing.
̇ A public agency means a non-profit making institution/body such as technical/
academic institutions, government bodies not subordinate to the concerned Authority.
̇ If SPCB/Public Agency authorized for conducting public hearing informs the
Authority, stating that it is not possible to conduct the public hearing in a manner,
which will enable the views of the concerned local persons to be freely expressed, then
Authority may consider such report to take a decision that in such particular case,
public consultation may not have the component of public hearing.
̇ Often restricting the public hearing to the specific district may not serve the entire
purpose, therefore, NGOs who are local and registered under the Societies Act in the
adjacent districts may also be allowed to participate in public hearing, if they so desire.
̇ Confidential information including non-disclosable or legally privileged information
involving intellectual property right, source specified in the application shall not be
placed on the website.
̇ The Authority shall make available on a written request from any concerned person the
draft EIA report for inspection at a notified place during normal office hours till the
date of the public hearing.
̇ While mandatory requirements will have to be adhered to, utmost attention shall be
given to the issues raised in the public hearing for determining the modifications
needed in the project proposal and the EMP to address such issues.
̇ Final EIA report after making needed amendments, as aforesaid, shall be submitted by
the proponent to the concerned Authority for prior environmental clearance.
Alternatively, a supplementary report to draft EIA and EMP addressing all concerns
expressed during the public consultation may be submitted.

4-43
4.11 Appraisal
Appraisal means the detailed scrutiny by the EAC/SEAC of the application and the other
documents like the final EIA report, outcome of the public consultation including public
hearing proceedings submitted by the proponent for grant of prior environmental
clearance.
̇ The appraisal shall be made by EAC to the Central Government or SEAC to SEIAA.
̇ Project proponent either personally or through consultant can make a presentation to
EAC/SEAC for the purpose of appraising the features of the project proposal and also
to clarify the issues raised by the members of the EAC/SEAC.
̇ On completion of these proceedings, concerned EAC/SEAC shall make categorical
recommendations to the respective Authority, either for grant of prior environmental
clearance on stipulated terms & conditions, if any, or rejection of the application with
reasons.
̇ In case EAC/SEAC needs to visit the site or obtain further information before being
able to make categorical recommendations, EAC/SEAC may inform the project
proponent accordingly. In such an event, it should be ensured that the process of prior
environmental clearance is not unduly delayed to go beyond the prescribed timeframe.
̇ Upon the scrutiny of the final report, if EAC/SEAC opines that ToR for EIA studies
finalized at the scoping stage are covered by the proponent, then the project proponent
may be asked to provide such information. If such information is declined by the
project proponent or is unlikely to be provided early enough so as to complete the
environmental appraisal within prescribed time of 60 days, the EAC/SEAC may
recommend for rejection of the proposal with the same reason.
̇ Appraisal shall be strictly in terms of ToR for EIA studies finalized at the scoping
stage and the concerns expressed during public consultation.
̇ This process of appraisal shall be completed within 60 days from the receipt of the
updated EIA and EMP reports, after completing public consultation.
̇ The EIA report will be typically examined for following:
– Project site description supported by topographic maps & photographs – detailed
description of topography, land use and activities at the proposed project site and
its surroundings (buffer zone) supported by photographic evidence.
– Clarity in description of drainage pattern, location of eco-sensitive areas,
vegetation characteristics, wildlife status - highlighting significant environmental
attributes such as feeding, breeding and nesting grounds of wildlife species,
migratory corridor, wetland, erosion and neighboring issues.
– Description of the project site – how well the interfaces between the project
related activities and the environment have been identified for the entire project
cycle i.e. construction, operation and decommissioning at the end of the project
life.
– How complete and authentic are the baseline data pertaining to flora and fauna
and socio-economic aspects?
– Citing of proper references, with regard to the source(s) of baseline data as well
as the name of the investigators/investigating agency responsible for collecting
the primary data.

4-44
– How consistent are the various values of environmental parameters with respect
to each other?
– Is a reasonable assessment of the environmental and social impact made for the
identified environmental issues including project affected people?
– To what extent the proposed environmental plan will mitigate the environmental
impact and at what estimated cost, shown separately for construction, operation
and closure stages and also separately in terms of capital and recurring expenses
along with details of agencies that will be responsible for the implementation of
environmental plan/ conservation plan.
– How well the concerns expressed/highlighted during public hearing have been
addressed and incorporated in the EMP giving item wise financial provisions and
commitments (in quantified terms)?
– How far the proposed environmental monitoring plan will effectively evaluate the
performance of EMP? Are details for environmental monitoring plan provided in
the same manner as the EMP?
– Identification of hazard and quantification of risk assessment and whether
appropriate mitigation plan has been included in the EMP?
– Does the proposal include a well formulated time bound green belt development
plan for mitigating environmental problems such as fugitive emission of dust,
gaseous pollutants, noise, odour, etc?
– Does EIA make a serious attempt to guide the project proponent for minimizing
the requirement of natural resources including land, water energy and other non
renewable resources?
– How well has the EIA statement been organized and presented so that the issues,
their impact and environmental management strategies emerge clearly from it and
how well organized was the power point presentation made before the expert
committee?
– Is the information presented in the EIA adequately and appropriately supported
by maps, imageries and photographs highlighting site features and environmental
attributes?
4.12 Decision Making
The Chairperson reads the sense of the Committee and finalizes the draft minutes of the
meeting, which are circulated by the Secretary to all expert members invited to the
meeting. Based on the response from the members, the minutes are finalized and signed
by the Chairperson. This process for finalization of the minutes should be so organized
that the time prescribed for various stages is not exceeded.
Approval / Rejection / Reconsideration
̇ The Authority shall consider the recommendations of concerned appraisal Committee

and convey its decision within 45 days of the receipt of recommendations.
̇ If the Authority disagrees with the recommendations of the Appraisal Committee, then
reasons shall be communicated to concerned Appraisal Committee and proponent
within 45 days from the receipt of the recommendations. The Appraisal Committee
concerned shall consider the observations of the Authority and furnish its views on the

4-45
observations within further period of 60 days. The Authority shall take a decision
within the next 30 days based on the views of appraisal Committee.
̇ If the decision of the Authority is not conveyed within the time, then the proponent
may proceed as if the prior environmental clearance sought has been granted or denied
by the regulatory authority in terms of the final recommendation of the concerned
appraisal Committee. For this purpose, the decision of the Appraisal Committee will
be a public document, once the period specified above for taking the decision by the
Authority is over.
̇ In case of the Category B projects, application shall be received by the Member
Secretary of the SEIAA and clearance shall also be issued by the same SEIAA.
̇ Deliberate concealment and/or submission of false or misleading information or data
which is material to screening or scoping or appraisal or decision on the application
shall make the application liable for rejection, and cancellation of prior environmental
clearance granted on that basis. Rejection of an application or cancellation of a prior
environmental clearance already granted, on such ground, shall be decided by the
regulatory authority, after giving a personal hearing to the applicant, and following the
principles of natural justice.
If approved
̇ The Concerned MoEF/SEIAA will issue a prior environmental clearance for the
project.
̇ The project proponent should make sure that the award of prior environmental
clearance is properly publicized in at least two local newspapers of the district or state
where the proposed project is located. For instance, the executive summary of the prior
environmental clearance may be published in the newspaper along with the
information about the location (website/office where it is displayed for public) where
the detailed prior environmental clearance is made available. The MoEF and
SEIAA/UTEIAA, as the case may be, shall also place the prior environmental
clearance in the public domain on Government Portal. Further copies of the prior
environmental clearance shall be endorsed to the Heads of local bodies, Panchayats
and Municipal bodies in addition to the relevant offices of the Government.
̇ The prior environmental clearance will be valid from the start date to actual
commencement of the production of the developmental activity.
̇ Usual validity period will be 5 years from the date of issuing environmental clearance,
unless specified by EAC/SEAC.
̇ A prior environmental clearance issued to a project proponent can be transferred to
another legal person entitled to undertake the project, upon application by the
transferor to the concerned Authority or submission of no-objection of the transferor
by the transferee to the concerned Authority for the concurrence. In this case,
EAC/SEAC concurrence is not required, but approval from the concerned authority is
required to avail the same project configurations, validity period transferred to the new
legally entitled person to undertake the project.
4.13 Post-clearance Monitoring Protocol
The MoEF, Government of India will monitor and take appropriate action under the EP
Act, 1986.

4-46
̇ In respect of Category A projects, it shall be mandatory for the project proponent to

make public the environmental clearance granted for their project along with the
environmental conditions and safeguards at their cost by advertising it at least in two
local newspapers of the district or State where the project is located and in addition,
this shall also be displayed in the project proponents website permanently.
̇ In respect of Category B projects, irrespective of its clearance by MoEF/SEIAA, the
project proponent shall prominently advertise in the newspapers indicating that the
project has been accorded environment clearance and the details of MoEF website
where it is displayed.
̇ The MoEF and the SEIAA/UTEIAA, as the case may be, shall also place the
environmental clearance in the public domain on Government Portal.
̇ Copies of environmental clearance shall be submitted by the project proponents to the
Heads of the local bodies, Panchayats and Municipal bodies in addition to the relevant
offices of the Government who in turn have to display the same for 30 days from the
date of receipt.
The project proponent must submit half-yearly compliance reports in respect of the
stipulated prior environmental clearance terms and conditions in hard and soft copies to
the regulatory authority concerned, on 1st June and 1st December of each calendar year.
All such compliance reports submitted by the project management shall be public
documents. Copies of the same shall be given to any person on application to the
concerned regulatory authority. Such compliance report shall also be displayed on the
web site of the concerned regulatory Authority.
The SPCB shall incorporate EIA clearance conditions into consent conditions in respect
of Category A and Category B projects and in parallel shall monitor and enforce the
same.

4-47
Stakeholders’ Roles and Responsibilities
5.
STAKEHOLDERS’ ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
Prior environmental clearance process involves many stakeholders i.e., Central

Government, State Government, SEIAA, EAC at the National Level, SEAC, Public
Agency, SPCB, the project proponent, and the public.
̇ Roles and responsibilities of the organizations involved in different stages of prior

environmental clearance are listed in Table 5-1.
̇ Organization-specific functions are listed in Table 5-2.
In this Chapter, constitution, composition, functions, etc., of the Authorities and the
Committees are discussed in detail.
Table 5-1: Roles and Responsibilities of Stakeholders Involved in

Prior Environmental Clearance
Stage MoEF/ EAC/ Project EIA Consultant SPCB/ Public and
SEIAA SEAC Proponent Public Interest
Agency Group
Screening Receives Advises the Submits Advises and
application MoEF/ application assists the
and takes SEIAA (Form 1) and proponent by
advice of provides providing
EAC/ necessary technical
SEAC information information
Scoping Approves Reviews Submits the Prepares ToR
the ToR, the ToR, draft ToR to
communic visits the SEIAA and
ates the proposed facilitates the
same to site, if visit of the
the project required EAC/SEAC
proponent and members to the
and places recommend project site
the same s the ToR
in the to the
website MoEF/
SEIAA
EIA Report Reviews Submits Prepares the EIA Reviews Participates
& Public and detailed EIA report EIA report in public
Hearing forwards report as per the Presents and and hearings and
copies of finalized ToR appraises the conducts offers
the EIA Facilitates the likely impacts public comments
report to public hearing and pollution hearing in and
SPCB by arranging control measures the manner observations
/public presentation on proposed in the prescribed .
agency for the project, EIA public hearing Submits Comments
conducting and EMP – proceeding can be sent
public takes note of s and directly to
hearing objections and views of SEIAA
Places the updates the SPCB, to through
summary EMP the Internet in

5-1
of EIA accordingly Authority response to

report in and the the summary
the website project placed in the
Conveys proponent website
objections as well
to the
project
proponent
for update,
if any
Appraisal Receives Critically Submits Provides
and updated examines updated EIA, technical advise
Clearance EIA the reports, EMP reports to to the project
Takes presentation MoEF/SEIAA. proponent and if
advice of of the Presents the necessary
EAC/ proponent overall EIA and presents the
SEAC, and EMP including proposed
approves appraises public concerns measures for
EIA and MoEF/ to EAC/SEAC mitigation of
attaches SEIAA likely impacts
the terms (recommen (terms and
and dations are conditions of
conditions forwarded clearance)
to MoEF/
SEIAA)
Post- Implements Conducts Incorporate
clearance environmental periodic s the
Monitoring protection monitoring clearance
measures conditions
prescribed and into
submits appropriate
periodic consent
monitoring conditions
results and
ensures
implement
ation
Table 5-2: Organization-specific Functions

Organization Functions
Central ̇ Constitutes the EAC
Government ̇ Considering recommendations of the State Government, constitutes the SEIAA &
SEAC
̇ Receives application from the project proponent in case of Category A projects or
Category B projects attracting general condition
̇ Communicates the ToR finalized by the EAC to the project proponent.
̇ Receives EIA report from the project proponent and soft copy of summary of the
report for placing in the website
̇ Summary of EIA report will be placed in website. Forwards the received responses
to the project proponent
̇ Engages other public agency for conducting public hearings in cases where the
SPCB does not respond within time
̇ Receives updated EIA report from project proponent incorporating the
considerations from the proceedings of public hearing and responses received

5-2
Organization Functions
through other media
̇ Forwards updated EIA report to the EAC for appraisal
̇ Either accepts the recommendations of EAC or asks for reconsideration of specific
issues for review by the EAC.
̇ Takes the final decision – acceptance/ rejection – of the project proposal and
communicates the same to the project proponent
State Government ̇ Identifies experts as per the composition specified in the Notification and
subsequent guidelines to recommend to the the Central Government.
̇ Extends funding support to fulfill the functions of SEIAA/SEAC
̇ Engages other public agency for conducting public hearings in cases where the
SPCB does not respond within time
̇ State Governments will suitably pay the public agency for conducting such activity
EAC ̇ Reviews Form 1 and its attachments
̇ Visits site(s), if necessary
̇ Finalizes ToR and recommends to the Central Government, which in turn
communicates the finalized ToR to the project proponent, if not exempted by the
Notification
̇ Reviews EIA report, proceedings and appraises their views to the Central
government
̇ If the Central Government has any specific views, then the EAC reviews again for
appraisal
SEIAA ̇ Receives application from the project proponent
̇ Considers SEAC’s views for finalization of ToR
̇ Communicates the finalized ToR to the project proponent
̇ Receives EIA report from project proponent
̇ Uploads the summary of EIA report in the website in cases of Category B projects
̇ Forwards the responses received to the project proponent
̇ Receives updated EIA report from project proponent incorporating the
considerations from the proceedings of public hearing and responses received
through other media
̇ Forwards updated EIA report to SEAC for appraisal
̇ Either accepts the recommendations of SEAC or asks for reconsideration of
specific issues for review by SEAC.
̇ Takes the final decision and communicates the same to the project proponent
SEAC ̇ Reviews Form 1
̇ If necessary visits, site(s) for finalizing the ToR
̇ Reviews updated EIA - EMP report and
̇ Appraises the SEIAA
SPCB ̇ Receives request from project proponent and conducts public hearing in the manner
prescribed.
̇ Conveys proceedings to concerned authority and project proponent
Public Agency ̇ Receives request from the respective Governments to conduct public hearing
̇ Conducts public hearing in the manner prescribed.
̇ Conveys proceedings to the concerned Authority/EAC /Project proponent
5.1 SEIAA
̇ SEIAA is constituted by the MoEF to take final decision regarding the

acceptance/rejection of prior environmental clearance to the project proposal for all
Category ‘B’ projects.

5-3
̇ The state government may decide whether to house them at the Department of
Environment or at any other Board for effective operational support.
̇ State Governments can decide whether the positions are permanent or part-time. The
Central Government (MoEF) continues to follow the model of paying fee (TA/DA,
accommodation, and sitting fee) to the Chairperson and the members of EAC. As
such, the State Government is to fund SEIAA & SEAC and decide the appropriate
institutional support for them.
A. Constitution
̇ SEIAA is constituted by the Central Government comprising of three members

including a Chairperson and Member Secretary to be nominated by the State
Government or UT Administration concerned.
̇ The Central Government will notify as and when the nominations (in order) are
received from the State Governments, within 30 days from the date of receipt.
̇ The Chairperson and the non-official member shall have a fixed term of three years,
from the date of Notification by the Central Government constituting the Authority.
The form used by the State Governments to submit nominations for Notification by the
Central Government is provided in Annexure XIV.
B. Composition
̇ Chairperson shall be an expert in the EIA process

̇ Member Secretary shall be a serving officer of the concerned State Government/ UT
Administration familiar with the environmental laws.
̇ Member Secretary may be of a level equivalent to the Director, Dept. of Environment
or above – a full time member.
̇ All the members including the Chairperson shall be the experts as per the criteria set in
the Notification.
̇ The Government servants can only serve as the Member Secretary to SEIAA and the
Secretary to SEAC. All other members including Chairperson of the SEIAA and
SEAC shall not be comprised of serving Government Officers; sector representatives;
and the activists.
̇ Serving faculty (academicians) is eligible for the membership in the Authority and/or
the Committees, if they fulfill the criteria given in Appendix VI to the Notification.
̇ This is to clarify that the serving Government officers shall not be nominated as
professional/expert member of SEIAA/SEAC/EAC.
̇ Professionals/Experts in the SEIAA and SEAC shall be different.
Summary regarding the eligibility criteria for Chairperson and Members of the SEIAA is
given in Table 5-3.
C. Decision-making process
̇ The decision of the Authority shall be arrived through consensus.

̇ If there is no consensus, the Authority may either ask SEAC for reconsideration or
may reject the approval.

5-4
̇ All decisions of the SEIAA shall be taken in a meeting and shall ordinarily be
unanimous. In case a decision is taken by majority, the details of views, for and
against the decision, shall be clearly recorded in minutes of meeting and a copy thereof
shall be sent to MoEF.
Table 5-3: SEIAA: Eligibility Criteria for Chairperson/ Members/ Secretary
S. No. Requirement
Attribute Members Member Secretary Chairperson
1 Professional qualification Compulsory Compulsory Compulsory
as per the Notification
2 Experience a Professional Professional Professional
(Fulfilling any one of Qualification + 15 Qualification + 15 Qualification + 15
a, b, c) years of experience in years of experience in years of experience
one of the expertise one of the expertise in one of the
area mentioned in the area mentioned in the expertise area
Appendix VI Appendix VI mentioned in the
Appendix VI
b Professional Professional Professional
Qualification +PhD+10 Qualification Qualification
years of experience in +PhD+10 years of +PhD+10 years of
one of the expertise experience in one of experience in one of
area mentioned in the expertise area the expertise area
Appendix VI mentioned in the mentioned in the
Appendix VI Appendix VI
c Professional Professional -------------
Qualification +10 years Qualification +10
of experience in one of years of experience in
the expertise area one of the expertise
mentioned in the area mentioned in the
Appendix VI + 5 years Appendix VI + 5 years
interface with interface with
environmental issues, environmental issues,
problems and their problems and their
management management
3 Test of independence Shall not be a serving Only serving officer Shall not be a
(conflict of interest) and government officer from the State serving government
minimum grade of the Shall not be a person Government (DoE) officer
Secretary of the Authority engaged in industry and familiar with Shall not be a
their associations environmental laws person engaged in
not below the level of industry and their
Shall not be a person
Director associations
associated with
environmental activism Shall not be a
person associated
with environmental
activism
4 Age Below 67 years at the As per State Below 72 Years at
time of Notification of Government Service the time of the
the Authority Rules Notification of the
Authority
5 Other memberships in Shall not be a member Shall not be a member Shall not be a
Central/State Expert in any in any member in any
Appraisal Committee SEIAA/EAC/SEAC SEIAA/EAC/SEAC SEIAA/EAC/SEAC
6 Tenure of earlier Only one term before Not applicable Only one term
appointment (continuous) this in continuity is before this in

5-5
S. No. Requirement
Attribute Members Member Secretary Chairperson
permitted continuity is
permitted
7 Eminent environmental Desirable Desirable Compulsory
expertise with
understanding on
environmental aspects and
impacts
8 Expertise in the Desirable Desirable Compulsory
environmental clearance
process
Note:
1. A member after continuous membership in two terms (6 years) shall not be considered for
further continuation. His/her nomination may be considered after a gap of one term (three years),
if other criteria meet.
2. Chairperson/Member once notified may not be removed prior to the tenure of three years
without cause and proper enquiry.
5.2 EAC and SEAC
EAC and SEAC are independent Committees to review each developmental activity and
offer its recommendations for consideration of the Central Government and SEIAA
respectively.
A. Constitution
̇ EAC and SEAC shall be constituted by the Central Government comprising a

maximum of 15 members including a Chairperson and Secretary. In case of SEAC,
the State Government or UT Administration is required to nominate the
professionals/experts for consideration and Notification by the Central Government.
̇ The Central Government will notify as and when the nominations (in order) are
received from the State Governments, within 30 days from the date of receipt.
̇ The Chairperson and the non-official member shall have a fixed term of three years,
from the date of Notification by the Central Government.
̇ The Chairperson shall be an eminent environmental expert with understanding on
environmental aspects and environmental impacts. The Secretary of the SEAC shall be
a State Government officer, not below the level of a Director/Chief Engineer.
̇ The members of the SEAC need not be from the same State/UT.
̇ In case the State Governments/ Union Territories so desire, the MoEF can form
regional EAC to serve the concerned States/Union Territories.
̇ State Governments may decide to their convenience to house SEAC at the Department
of Environment or at SPCB or at any other department, to extend support to the SEAC
activities.

5-6
B. Composition
̇ Composition of EAC/SEAC as per the Notification is given in Annexure XV.

̇ Secretary to EAC/SEAC may invite a maximum of two professionals/experts with the
prior approval of the Chairperson, if desired, for taking the advisory inputs for
appraisal. In such case, the invited experts will not take part in the decision making
process
̇ The Secretary of each EAC/SEAC preferably is an officer of the level equivalent to or
above the level of Director, MoEF, GoI.
C. Decision making
The EAC and SEAC shall function on the principle of collective responsibility. The
Chairperson shall endeavour to reach a consensus in each case, and if consensus cannot
be reached, the view of the majority shall prevail.
D. Operational issues
̇ Secretary may deal with all correspondence, formulate agenda and prepare agenda
notes. Chairperson and other members may act only for the meetings.
̇ Chairperson of EAC/SEAC shall be one among the expert members having
considerable professional experience with proven credentials.
̇ EAC/SEAC shall meet at least once every month or more frequently, if so needed, to
review project proposals and to offer recommendations for the consideration of the
Authority.
̇ EAC/SEAC members may inspect the site at various stages i.e. during screening,
scoping and appraisal, as per the need felt and decided by the Chairperson of the
Committee.
̇ The respective Governments through the Secretary of the Committee may
pay/reimburse the participation expenses, honorarium etc., to the Chairperson and
members.
i. Tenure of EAC/SEIAA/SEAC
The tenure of Authority/Committee(s) shall be for a fixed period of three years. At the
end of the three years period, the Authority and the committees need to be re-constituted.
However, staggered appointment dates may be adopted to maintain continuity of
members at a given point of time.
ii. Qualifying criteria for nomination of a member to EAC/SEIAA/SEAC
While recommending nominations and while notifying the members of the Authority and
Expert Committees, it shall be ensured that all the members meet the following three
criteria:
̇ Professional qualification
̇ Relevant experience/Experience interfacing with environmental management
̇ Absence of conflict of interest
These are elaborated subsequently.

5-7
a) Professional qualification
The person should have at least (i) 5 years of formal University training in the concerned
discipline leading to a MA/MSc Degree, or (ii) in case of Engineering/Technology/
Architecture disciplines, 4 years formal training in a professional training course together
with prescribed practical training in the field leading to a B.Tech/B.E./B.Arch. Degree, or
(iii) Other professional degree (e.g. Law) involving a total of 5 years of formal University
training and prescribed practical training, or (iv) Prescribed apprenticeship/articleship and
pass examinations conducted by the concerned professional association (e.g. MBA/IAS/
IFS). In selecting the individual professionals, experience gained by them in their
respective fields will be taken note of.
b) Relevant experience
̇ Experience shall be related to professional qualification acquired by the person and be
related to one or more of the expertise mentioned for the expert members. Such
experience should be a minimum of 15 years.
̇ When the experience mentioned in the foregoing sub-paragraph interfaces with
environmental issues, problems and their management, the requirement for the length
of the experience can be reduced to a minimum of 10 years.
c) Absence of conflict of interest

For the deliberations of the EAC/SEAC to be independent and unbiased, all possibilities
of potential conflict of interests have to be eliminated. Therefore, serving government
officers; persons engaged in industry and their associations; persons associated with the
formulation of development projects requiring prior environmental clearance, and persons
associated with environmental activism shall not be considered for membership of
SEIAA/ SEAC/ EAC.
iii. Age
Below 70 years for the members and below 72 years for the Chairperson of the
SEIAA/SEAC/EAC. The applicability of the age is at the time of the Notification of the
SEIAA/SEAC/EAC by the Central Government.
Summary regarding the eligibility criteria for Chairperson and Members of the
EAC/SEAC is given in Table 5-4.
Table 5-4: EAC/SEAC: Eligibility Criteria for Chairperson / Members / Secretary

S. Requirement
No. Attribute Expert members Secretary Chairperson
1 Professional Compulsory Compulsory Compulsory
qualification as per
the Notification
2 Experience a Professional Professional Professional
(Fulfilling any Qualification + 15 Qualification + 15 years Qualification + 15
one of a, b, c) years of experience in of experience in one of years of experience in
one of the expertise the expertise area one of the expertise
area mentioned in the mentioned in the area mentioned in the
Appendix VI Appendix VI Appendix VI
b Professional Professional Professional

5-8
S. Requirement
No. Attribute Expert members Secretary Chairperson
Qualification +PhD+10 Qualification +PhD+10 Qualification
years of experience in years of experience in +PhD+10 years of
one of the expertise one of the expertise area experience in one of
area mentioned in the mentioned in the the expertise area
Appendix VI Appendix VI mentioned in
Appendix VI
c Professional Professional -------------
Qualification +10 years Qualification +10 years
of experience in one of of experience in one of
the expertise area the expertise area
mentioned in the mentioned in the
Appendix VI + 5 years Appendix VI + 5 years
interface with interface with
environmental issues, environmental issues,
problems and their problems and their
management management
3 Test of independence Shall not be a serving In case of EAC, not less Shall not be a serving
(conflict of interest) government officer than a Director from the government officer
and minimum grade Shall not be a person MoEF, Government of Shall not be a person
of the Secretary of the engaged in industry India engaged in industry
Committees and their associations and their associations
Shall not be a person Incase of SEAC, not Shall not be a person
associated with below the level of associated with
environmental activism Director/Chief Engineer environmental
from the State activism
Government (DoE)
4 Age Below 67 years at the As per state Government Below 72 Years at the
time of Notification of Service Rules time of the
the Committee Notification of the
Committee
5 Membership in Only one other than Shall not be a member in Shall not be a
Central/State Expert this nomination is other SEIAA/EAC/SEAC member in any other
Appraisal Committee permitted SEIAA/EAC/SEAC
6 Tenure of earlier Only one term before Not applicable Only one term before
appointment this in continuity is this in continuity is
(continuous) permitted permitted
7 Eminent Desirable Not applicable Compulsory
environmental
expertise with
understanding on
environmental aspects
and impacts
Note:
1. A member after continuous membership in two terms (six years) shall not be considered for
further continuation. His/her nomination may be reconsidered after a gap of one term (three
years), if other criteria meet.
2. Chairperson/Member once notified may not be removed prior to the tenure of 3 years with out
cause and proper enquiry. A member after continuous membership in two terms (6 years) shall not

5-9
be considered for further continuation. The same profile may be considered for nomination after a
gap of three years, i.e., one term, if other criteria are meeting.
E. Other conditions that may be considered
̇ An expert Committee member of one State/UT, can have at the most another State/UT
Committee membership, but in no case more than two Committees at a given point of
time.
̇ An expert member of a Committee shall not have membership continuously in the
same committee for more than two terms, i.e., six years. They can be nominated after
a gap of three years, i.e., one term. When a member of Committee has been associated
with any development project, which comes for prior environmental clearance, he/she
may not participate in the deliberations and the decisions in respect to that particular
project.
̇ At least four members shall be present in each meeting to fulfill the quorum
̇ If a member does not consecutively attend six meetings, without prior intimation to the
Committee his/her membership may be terminated by the Notifying Authority. Prior
information for absence due to academic pursuits, career development and
national/state-endorsed programmes may be considered as genuine grounds for
retention of membership.

5-10
ANNEXURE I
Definitions – MSW (Management and Handling) Rules 2000
Definitions: MSW (Management and Handling) rules 2000
i. "Anaerobic digestion" means a controlled process involving microbial

decomposition of organic matter in the absence of oxygen;
ii. "Authorization" means the consent given by the Board or Committee to the
"operator of a facility”;
iii. "Biodegradable substance" means a substance that can be degraded by
microorganisms;
iv. "Biomethanation" means a process which entails enzymatic decomposition of the
organic matter by microbial action to produce methane rich biogas;
v. "Collection" means lifting and removal of solid wastes from collection points or any
other location;
vi. "Composting" means a controlled process involving microbial decomposition of
organic matter;
vii. "Demolition and construction waste" means wastes from building materials debris
and rubble resulting from construction, re-modeling, repair and demolition operation;
viii. "Disposal" means final disposal of municipal solid wastes in terms of the specified
measures to prevent contamination of ground-water, surface water and ambient air
quality;
ix. "Form" means a Form appended to these rules;
x. "Generator of wastes" means persons or establishments generating municipal solid
wastes;
xi. "Land filling" means disposal of residual solid wastes on land in a facility designed
with protective measures against pollution of ground water, surface water and air
fugitive dust, wind-blown litter, bad odour, fire hazard, bird menace, pests or rodents,
greenhouse gas emissions, slope instability and erosion;
xii. "Leachate" means liquid that seeps through solid wastes or other medium and has
extracts of dissolved or suspended material from it;
xiii. "Lysimeter" is a device used to measure rate of movement of water through or from
a soil layer or is used to collect percolated water for quality analysis;
xiv. "Municipal authority" means Municipal Corporation, Municipality, Nagar Palika,
Nagar Nigam, Nagar Panchayat, Municipal Council including notified area committee
(NAC) or any other local body constituted under the relevant statutes and, where the
management and handling of municipal solid waste is entrusted to such agency;
xv. "Municipal solid waste" includes commercial and residential wastes generated in a
municipal or notified areas in either solid or semi-solid form excluding industrial
hazardous wastes but including treated bio-medical wastes;
xvi. "Operator of a facility" means a person who owns or operates a facility for
collection, segregation, storage, transportation, processing and disposal of municipal
solid wastes and also includes any other agency appointed as such by the municipal
authority for the management and handling of municipal solid wastes in the respective
areas;
i
xvii. "Pelletisation" means a process whereby pellets are prepared which are small cubes
or cylindrical pieces made out of solid wastes and includes fuel pellets which are also
referred as refuse derived fuel;
xviii. "Processing" means the process by which solid wastes are transformed into new or
recycled products;
xix. "Recycling" means the process of transforming segregated solid wastes into raw
materials for producing new products, which may or may not be similar to the original
products;
xx. "Schedule" means a Schedule appended to these rules;
xxi. "Segregation" means to separate the municipal solid wastes into the groups of
organic, inorganic, recyclables and hazardous wastes;
xxii. "State Board or the Committee" means the State Pollution Control Board of a
State, or as the case may be, the Pollution Control Committee of a Union territory;
xxiii. "Storage" means the temporary containment of municipal solid wastes in a manner
so as to prevent littering, attraction to vectors, stray animals and excessive foul odour;
xxiv. "Transportation " means conveyance of municipal solid wastes from place to place
hygienically through specially designed transport system so as to prevent foul odour,
littering, unsightly conditions and accessibility to vectors;
xxv. "Vadose water" water which occurs between the ground, surface and the water table
that is the unsaturated zone;
xxvi. "Vermicomposting" is a process of using earthworms for conversion of
biodegradable wastes into compost.
ii
ANNEXURE II
• Total quantity of waste generated in the country (based on weighment exercise by

local bodies) is not reported. However, Ministry of Urban Development in its
manual on solid waste management (year 2000) has estimated waste generation of
100,000 MT.
• CPCB with the assistance of NEERI has conducted survey of solid waste
management in 59 cities (35 metro cities and 24 state Capitals: 2004-05)
• Quantities and waste generation rate in 59 cities is as under.
S. No Name of City Population Area (Sq. Waste Waste Generation

(As per 2001 Km) Quantity Rate (kg/c/day)
census) (TPD)
1 Kavaratti 10,119 4 3 0.30
2 Gangtok 29,354 15 13 0.44
3 Itanagar 35,022 22 12 0.34
4 Daman 35,770 7 15 0.42
5 Silvassa 50,463 17 16 0.32
6 Panjim 59,066 69 32 0.54
7 Kohima 77,030 30 13 0.17
8 Port Blair 99,984 18 76 0.76
9 Shillong 1,32,867 10 45 0.34
10 Simla 1,42,555 20 39 0.27
11 Agartala 1,89,998 63 77 0.40
12 Gandhinagar 1,95,985 57 44 0.22
13 Dhanbad 1,99,258 24 77 0.39
14 Pondicherry 2,20,865 19 130 0.59
15 Imphal 2,21,492 34 43 0.19
16 Aizwal 2,28,280 117 57 0.25
17 Jammu 3,69,959 102 215 0.58
18 Dehradun 4,26,674 67 131 0.31
19 Asansol 4,75,439 127 207 0.44
20 Kochi 5,95,575 98 400 0.67
21 Raipur 6,05,747 56 184 0.30
22 Bhubaneswar 6,48,032 135 234 0.36
23 Tiruvanantapuram 7,44,983 142 171 0.23
24 Chandigarh 8,08,515 114 326 0.40
25 Guwahati 8,09,895 218 166 0.20
26 Ranchi 8,47,093 224 208 0.25
27 Vijaywada 8,51,282 58 374 0.44
28 Srinagar 8,98,440 341 428 0.48
29 Madurai 9,28,868 52 275 0.30
30 Coimbatore 9,30,882 107 530 0.57
31 Jabalpur 9,32,484 134 216 0.23
32 Amritsar 9,66,862 77 438 0.45
33 Rajkot 9,67,476 105 207 0.21
34 Allahabad 9,75,393 71 509 0.52
35 Vishakhapatnam 9.82,904 110 584 0.59
36 Faridabad 10,55,938 216 448 0.42
37 Meerut 10,68,772 142 490 0.46
38 Nashik 10,77,236 269 200 0.19
39 Varanasi 10,91,918 80 425 0.39
40 Jamshedpur 11,04,713 64 338 0.31
41 Agra 12,75,135 140 654 0.51

42 Vadodara 13,06,227 240 357 0.27
43 Patna 13,66,444 107 511 0.37
44 Ludhiana 13,98,467 159 735 0.53
45 Bhopal 14,37,354 286 574 0.40
46 Indore 14,74,968 130 557 0.38
47 Nagpur 20,52,066 218 504 0.25
48 Lucknow 21,85,927 310 475 0.22
49 Jaipur 23,22,575 518 904 0.39
50 Surat 24,33,835 112 1000 0.41
51 Pune 25,38,473 244 1175 0.46
52 Kanpur 25,51,337 267 1100 0.43
53 Ahmedabad 35,20,085 191 1302 0.37
54 Hyderabad 38,43,585 169 2187 0.57
55 Banglore 43,01,326 226 1669 0.39
56 Chennai 43,43,645 174 3036 0.62
57 Kolkata 45,72,876 187 2653 0.58
58 Delhi 1,03,06,452 1483 5922 0.57
59 Greater Mumbai 1,19,78,450 437 5320 0.45
• Characterisation of waste is necessary to know changing trends in composition of waste. Based on

composition/ characterization of waste, appropriate selection of waste processing technologies
could be selected.
• Waste characterisation in 59 cities is indicated below:
S. No Name of City Compostables Recyclables C/N HCV* Moisture

(%) (%) Ratio (Kcal/Kg) (%)
1 Kavarati 46.01 27.20 18.04 2242 25
2 Gangtok 46.52 16.48 25.61 1234 44
3 Itanagar 52.02 20.57 17.68 3414 50
4 Daman 29.60 22.02 22.34 2588 53
5 Silvassa 71.67 13.97 35.24 1281 42
6 Panjim 61.75 17.44 23.77 2211 47
7 Kohima 57.48 22.67 30.87 2844 65
8 Port Blair 48.25 27.66 35.88 1474 63
9 Shillong 62.54 17.27 28.86 2736 63
10 Simla 43 02 36 64 23 76 2572 60
11 Agartala 58.57 13.68 30.02 2427 60
12 Gandhinagar 34.30 13.20 36.05 698 24
13 Dhanbad 46.93 16.16 18.22 591 50
14 Pondicherry 49.96 24.29 36.86 1846 54
15 Imphal 60.00 18.51 22.34 3766 40
16 Aizwal 54.24 20.97 27.45 3766 43
17 Jammu 51.51 21.08 26.79 1782 40
18 Dehradun 51.37 19.58 25.90 2445 60
19 Asansol 50.33 14.21 14.08 1156 54
20 Kochi 57.34 19.36 18.22 591 50
21 Raipur 51.40 16.31 223.50 1273 29
22 Bhubaneswar 49.81 12.69 20.57 742 59
23 Tiruvananthapuram 72.96 14.36 35.19 2378 60
24 Chandigarh 57.18 10.91 20.52 1408 64
25 Guwahati 53.69 23.28 17.71 1519 61
26 Ranchi 51.49 9.86 20.23 1060 49
27 Vijaywada 59.43 17.40 33.90 1910 46
28 Srinagar 6177 17.76 22.46 1264 61
29 Madurai 55.32 17.25 32.69 1813 46
30 Coimbatore 50.06 15.52 45.83 2381 54
31 Jabalpur 58.07 16.61 28.22 2051 35
32 Amritsar 65.02 13.94 30.69 1836 61
33 Rajkot 41.50 11.20 52.56 687 17
34 Allahabad 35.49 19.22 19.00 1180 18
35 Visakhapatnam 45.96 24.20 41.70 1602 53
36 Faridabad 42.06 23.31 18.58 1319 34
37 Meerut 54.54 10.96 19.24 1089 32
38 Nasik 39.52 25.11 37.20 2762 62
39 Varanasi 45.18 17.23 19.40 804 44
40 Jamshedpur 43.36 15.69 19.69 1009 48
41 Agra 46.38 15.79 21.56 520 28
42 Vadodara 47.43 14.50 40.34 1781 25
43 Patna 51.96 12.57 18.62 819 36
44 Ludhiana 49.80 19.32 52.17 2559 65
45 Bhopal 52.44 22.33 21.58 1421 43
46 Indore 48.97 12.57 29.30 1437 31
47 Nagpur 47.41 15.53 26.37 2632 41
48 Lucknow 47.41 15.53 21.41 1557 60
49 Jaipur 45.50 12.10 43.29 834 21
50 Surat 56.87 11.21 42.16 990 51
51 Pune 62.44 16.66 35.54 2531 63
52 Kanpur 47.52 11.93 27.64 1571 46
53 Ahemdabad 40.81 11.65 29.64 1180 32
54 Hyderabad 54.20 21.60 25.90 1969 46
55 Bangalore 51 84 22 43 35 12 2386 55
56 Chennai 41.34 16.34 29.25 2594 47
57 Kolkata 50.56 11.48 31.81 1201 46
58 Delhi 54.42 15.52 34.87 1802 49
59 Greater Mumbai 62.44 16.66 39.04 1786 54
ANNEXURE III
Schedules from MSW 2000 Rules
Schedule I
[See rules4 (2) and (3)]
Implementation Schedule
Serial Compliance Criteria Schedule
No.
1. Setting up of waste processing and disposal facilities By 31.12.2003 or

earlier
2. Monitoring the performance of waste processing and disposal Once in six months
facilities
3. Improvement of existing landfill sites as per provisions of By 31.12.2001 or

these rules earlier
4. Identification of landfill sites for future use and making site By 31.12.2002 or
(s) ready for operation earlier
5
Schedule -II
[See rules 6(1) and (3), 7(1)]
Management of Municipal Solid Wastes
S. No Parameters Compliance criteria
1. Collection of 1. Littering of municipal solid waste shall be prohibited in cities, towns

municipal solid and in urban areas notified by the State Governments. To prohibit
wastes littering and facilitate compliance, the following steps shall be taken by
the municipal authority, namely: -
i. Organizing house-to-house collection of municipal solid

wastes through any of the methods, like community bin
collection (central bin), house-to-house collection, collection
on regular pre-informed timings and scheduling by using bell
ringing of musical vehicle (without exceeding permissible
noise levels);
ii. Devising collection of waste from slums and squatter areas or
localities including hotels, restaurants, office complexes and
commercial areas;
iii. Wastes from slaughter houses, meat and fish markets, fruits
and vegetable markets, which are biodegradable in nature, shall
be managed to make use of such wastes;
iv. Bio-medical wastes and industrial wastes shall not be mixed
with municipal solid wastes and such wastes shall follow the
rules separately specified for the purpose;
v. Collected waste from residential and other areas shall be
transferred to community bin by hand-driven containerized
carts or other small vehicles;
vi. Horticultural and construction or demolition wastes or debris
shall be separately collected and disposed off following proper
norms. Similarly, wastes generated at dairies shall be regulated
in accordance with the State laws;
vii. Waste (garbage, dry leaves) shall not be burnt;
viii. Stray animals shall not be allowed to move around waste
storage facilities or at any other place in the city or town and
shall be managed in accordance with the State laws.
2. The municipal authority shall notify waste collection schedule and

the likely method to be adopted for public benefit in a city or town.
3. It shall be the responsibility of generator of wastes to avoid littering

and ensure delivery of wastes in accordance with the collection and
segregation system to be notified by the municipal authority as per Para
1(2) of this Schedule.
6
2. Segregation of In order to encourage the citizens, municipal authority shall organize
municipal solid awareness programmes for segregation of wastes and shall promote
wastes recycling or reuse of segregated materials.
The municipal authority shall undertake phased programme to ensure

community participation in waste segregation. For this purpose, regular
meetings at quarterly intervals shall be arranged by the municipal
authorities with representatives of local resident welfare associations
and non-governmental organizations.
3. Storage of Municipal authorities shall establish and maintain storage facilities in

municipal solid such a manner, as they do not create unhygienic and in sanitary
wastes conditions around it. Following criteria shall be taken into account
while establishing and maintaining storage facilities, namely: -
i. Storage facilities shall be created and established by taking into

account quantities of waste generation in a given area and the
population densities. A storage facility shall be so placed that it
is accessible to users;
ii. Storage facilities to be set up by municipal authorities or any
other agency shall be so designed that wastes stored are not
exposed to open atmosphere and shall be aesthetically
acceptable and user-friendly;
iii. Storage facilities or ‘bins’ shall have ‘easy to operate’ design

for handling, transfer and transportation of waste. Bins for
storage of bio-degradable wastes shall be painted green, those
for storage of recyclable wastes shall be printed white and
those for storage of other wastes shall be printed black;
iv. Manual handling of waste shall be prohibited. If unavoidable
due to constraints, manual handling shall be carried out under
proper precaution with due care for safety of workers.
4. Transportation Vehicles used for transportation of wastes shall be covered. Waste

of municipal should not be visible to public, nor exposed to open environment
solid wastes preventing their scattering. The following criteria shall be met, namely:
-
i. The storage facilities set up by municipal authorities shall be

daily attended for clearing of wastes. The bins or containers
wherever placed shall be cleaned before they start overflowing;
ii. Transportation vehicles shall be so designed that multiple
handling of wastes, prior to final disposal, is avoided.
5. Processing of Municipal authorities shall adopt suitable technology or combination of

municipal solid such technologies to make use of wastes so as to minimize burden on
wastes
7
landfill. Following criteria shall be adopted, namely: -
(i) The biodegradable wastes shall be processed by

composting, vermicomposting, anaerobic digestion or any
other appropriate biological processing for stabilization of
wastes. It shall be ensured that compost or any other end
product shall comply with standards as specified in Schedule-
IV;
ii. Mixed waste containing recoverable resources shall follow the

route of recycling. Incineration with or without energy
recovery including pelletisation can also be used for processing
wastes in specific cases. Municipal authority or the operator of
a facility wishing to use other state-of-the-art technologies
shall approach the Central Pollution Control Board to get the
standards laid down before applying for grant of authorization.
6. Disposal of Land filling shall be restricted to non-biodegradable, inert waste and

municipal solid other waste that are not suitable either for recycling or for biological
wastes processing. Land filling shall also be carried out for residues of waste
processing facilities as well as pre-processing rejects from waste
processing facilities. Land filling of mixed waste shall be avoided
unless the same is found unsuitable for waste processing. Under
unavoidable circumstances or till installation of alternate facilities,
landfilling shall be done following proper norms. Landfill sites shall
meet the specifications as given in Schedule –III.
8
Schedule III
[See rules 6(1) and (3), 7(2)]
Specifications for Landfill Sites
Site Selection
1. In areas falling under the jurisdiction of ‘Development Authorities’ it shall be the

responsibility of such Development Authorities to identify the landfill sites and hand over
the sites to the concerned municipal authority for development, operation and
maintenance. Elsewhere, this responsibility shall lie with the concerned municipal
authority.
2. Selection of landfill sites shall be based on examination of environmental issues. The
Department of Urban Development of the State or the Union territory shall co-ordinate
with the concerned organizations for obtaining the necessary approvals and clearances.
3. The landfill site shall be planned and designed with proper documentation of a phased
construction plan as well as a closure plan.
4. The landfill sites shall be selected to make use of nearby wastes processing facility.
Otherwise, wastes processing facility shall be planned as an integral part of the landfill
site.
5. The existing landfill sites, which continue to be used for more than five years, shall be
improved in accordance of the specifications given in this Schedule.
6. Biomedical wastes shall be disposed off in accordance with the Bio-medical Wastes
(Management and Handling) Rules, 1998 and hazardous wastes shall be managed in
accordance with the Hazardous Wastes (Management and Handling) Rules, 1989, as
amended from time to time.
7. The landfill site shall be large enough to last for 20-25 years.
8. The landfill site shall be away from habitation clusters, forest areas, water bodies
monuments, National Parks, Wetlands and places of important cultural, historical or
religious interest.
9. A buffer zone of no-development shall be maintained around landfill site and shall be
incorporated in the Town Planning Department’s land-use plans.
10. Landfill site shall be away from airport including airbase. Necessary approval of airport
or airbase authorities prior to the setting up of the landfill site shall be obtained in cases
where the site is to be located within 20 km of an airport or airbase.
Facilities at the Site
11. Landfill site shall be fenced or hedged and provided with proper gate to monitor
incoming vehicles or other modes of transportation.
12. The landfill site shall be well protected to prevent entry of unauthorized persons and stray
animals.
13. Approach and other internal roads for free movement of vehicles and other machinery
shall exist at the landfill site.
14. The landfill site shall have wastes inspection facility to monitor wastes brought in for
landfill, office facility for record keeping and shelter for keeping equipment and
machinery including pollution monitoring equipments.
9
15. Provisions like weigh bridge to measure quantity of waste brought at landfill site, fire
protection equipments and other facilities as may be required shall be provided.
16. Utilities such as drinking water (preferably bathing facilities for workers) and lighting
arrangements for easy landfill operations when carried out in night hours shall be
provided.
17. Safety provisions including health inspections of workers at landfill site shall be
periodically made.
Specifications for land filling
18. Wastes subjected to land filling shall be compacted in thin layers using landfill
compactors to achieve high density of the wastes. In high rainfall areas where heavy
compactors cannot be used alternative measures shall be adopted.
19. Wastes shall be covered immediately or at the end of each working day with minimum 10
cm of soil, inert debris or construction material till such time waste processing facilities
for composting or recycling or energy recovery are set up as per Schedule I.
20. Prior to the commencement of monsoon season, an intermediate cover of 40-65 cm
thickness of soil shall be placed on the landfill with proper compaction and grading to
prevent infiltration during monsoon. Proper drainage berms shall be constructed to divert
run-off away from the active cell of the landfill.
21. After completion of landfill, a final cover shall be designed to minimize infiltration and
erosion. The final cover shall meet the following specifications, namely: -
a. The final cover shall have a barrier soil layer comprising of 60 cms of clay or amended
soil with permeability coefficient less that 1 x 10-7 cm/sec.
b. On top of the barrier soil layer there shall be a drainage layer of 15 cm.
c. On top of the drainage layer there shall be a vegetative layer of 45 cm to support natural
plant growth and to minimize erosion.
Pollution prevention
22. In order to prevent pollution problems from landfill operations, the following provisions shall
be made, namely: -
a. Diversion of storm water drains to minimize leachate generation and prevent pollution of
surface water and also for avoiding flooding and creation of marshy conditions;
b. Construction of a non-permeable lining system at the base and walls of waste disposal
area. For landfill receiving residues of waste processing facilities or mixed waste or waste
having contamination of hazardous materials (such as aerosols, bleaches, polishes,
batteries, waste oils, paint products and pesticides) minimum liner specifications shall be
a composite barrier having 1.5 mm high density polyethylene (HDPE) geomembrane, or
equivalent, overlying 90 cm of soil (clay or amended soil) having permeability
coefficient not greater than 1 x 10-7 cm/sec. The highest level of water table shall be at
least two meter below the base of clay or amended soil barrier layer;
c. Provisions for management of leachate collection and treatment shall be made. The
treated leachate shall meet the standards specified in Schedule- IV;
d. Prevention of run-off from landfill area entering any stream, river, lake or pond.
Water Quality Monitoring
10
23. Before establishing any landfill site, baseline data of ground water quality in the area
shall be collected and kept in record for future reference. The ground water quality within
50 meters of the periphery of landfill site shall be periodically monitored to ensure that
the ground water is not contaminated beyond acceptable limit as decided by the Ground
Water Board or the State Board or the Committee. Such monitoring shall be carried out to
cover different seasons in a year that is, summer, monsoon and post-monsoon period.
24. Usage of groundwater in and around landfill sites for any purpose (including drinking
and irrigation) is to be considered after ensuring its quality. The following specifications
for drinking water quality shall apply for monitoring purpose, namely: -
S.No. Parameters IS 10500: 1991

Desirable limit (mg/l
except for pH)
1. Arsenic 0.05
2. Cadmium 0.01
3 Chromium 0.05
4. Copper 0.05
5. Cyanide 0.05
6. Lead 0.05
7. Mercury 0.001
8. Nickel -
9. Nitrate as NO3 45.0
10 PH 6.5-8.5
11. Iron 0.3
12. Total hardness (as CaCO3) 300.0
13. Chlorides 250
14. Dissolved solids 500
15. Phenolic compounds (as 0.001

C6H5OH)
16. Zinc 5.0
17. Sulphate (as SO4) 200
11
25. Ambient Air Quality Monitoring
26. Installation of landfill gas control system including gas collection system shall be made at
landfill site to minimize odour generation, prevent off-site migration of gases and to
protect vegetation planted on the rehabilitated landfill surface.
27. The concentration of methane gas generated at landfill site shall not exceed 25 per cent of
the lower explosive limit (LEL).
28. The landfill gas from the collection facility at a landfill site shall be utilized for either
direct thermal applications or power generation, as per viability. Otherwise, landfill gas
shall be burnt (flared) and shall not be allowed to directly escape to the atmosphere or for
illegal tapping. Passive venting shall be allowed if its utilization or flaring is not possible.
29. Ambient air quality at the landfill site and at the vicinity shall be monitored to meet the
following specified standards, namely: -
S.No. Parameters Acceptable levels
(i) Sulphur dioxide 120 µg/m3 (24 hours)
(ii) Suspended Particulate Matter 500 µg/m3 (24 hours)
(iii) Methane Not to exceed 25 per cent of the

lower explosive limit (equivalent
to 650 mg/m3)
(iv) Ammonia daily average
(Sample duration 24 hrs) 0.4 mg/m3 (400 µg/m3)
(v) Carbon monoxide 1 hour average: 2 mg/m3
8 hour average: 1 mg/m3
29. The ambient air quality monitoring shall be carried out by the concerned authority as per the
following schedule, namely: -
(a) Six times in a year for cities having population of more than fifty lakhs;
(b) Four times in a year for cities having population between ten and fifty lakhs;
(c) Two times in a year for town or cities having population between one and ten lakhs.
Plantation at Landfill Site
30. A vegetative cover shall be provided over the completed site in accordance with the and
following specifications, namely: -
(a) Selection of locally adopted non-edible perennial plants that are resistant to drought and
extreme temperatures shall be allowed to grow;
12
(b) The plants grown be such that their roots do not penetrate more than 30 cms. This condition
shall apply till the landfill is stabilized;
(c) Selected plants shall have ability to thrive on low-nutrient soil with minimum nutrient
addition;
(d) Plantation to be made in sufficient density to minimize soil erosion.
Closure of Landfill Site and Post-care
31. The post-closure care of landfill site shall be conducted for at least fifteen years and long term
monitoring or care plan shall consist of the following, namely: -
(a) Maintaining the integrity and effectiveness of final cover, making repairs and preventing run-
on and run-off from eroding or otherwise damaging the final cover;
(b) Monitoring leachate collection system in accordance with the requirement;
(c) Monitoring of ground water in accordance with requirements and maintaining ground water
quality;
(d) Maintaining and operating the landfill gas collection system to meet the standards.
32. Use of closed landfill sites after fifteen years of post-closure monitoring can be considered for
human settlement or otherwise only after ensuring that gaseous and leachate analysis complies
with the specified standards.
Special provisions for hilly areas
33. Cities and towns located on hills shall have location-specific methods evolved for final
disposal of solid wastes by the municipal authority with the approval of the concerned State
Board or the Committee. The municipal authority shall set up processing facilities for utilization
of biodegradable organic wastes. The inert and non-biodegradable waste shall be used for
building roads or filling-up of appropriate areas on hills. Because of constraints in finding
adequate land in hilly areas, wastes not suitable for road laying or filling up shall be disposed of
in specially designed landfills.
13
Schedule IV
[See rules 6(1) and (3), 7(2)]
Standards for Composting, Treated Leachate and Incineration
1. The waste processing or disposal facilities shall include composting, incineration,

pelletisation, energy recovery or any other facility based on state-of-the-art technology
duly approved by the Central Pollution Control Board
2. In case of engagement of private agency by the municipal authority, a specific agreement
between the municipal authority and the private agency shall be made particularly, for
supply of solid waste and other relevant terms and conditions.
3. In order to prevent pollution problems from compost plant and other processing facilities,
the following shall be complied with, namely: -
i. The incoming wastes at site shall be maintained prior to further processing. To the extent
possible, the waste storage area should be covered. If, such storage is done in an open
area, it shall be provided with impermeable base with facility for collection of leachate
and surface water run-off into lined drains leading to a leachate treatment and disposal
facility;
ii. Necessary precautions shall be taken to minimize nuisance of odour, flies, rodents, bird
menace and fire hazard;
iii. In case of breakdown or maintenance of plant, waste intake shall be stopped and
arrangements be worked out for diversion of wastes to the landfill site;
iv. Pre-process and post-process rejects shall be removed from the processing facility on
regular basis and shall not be allowed to pile at the site. Recyclables shall be routed
through appropriate vendors. The non-recyclables shall be sent for well-designed landfill
site(s).
v. In case of compost plant, the windrow area shall be provided with impermeable base.
Such a base shall be made of concrete or compacted clay, 50 cm thick, having
permeability coefficient less than 10–7 cm/sec. The base shall be provided with 1 to 2 per
cent slope and circled by lined drains for collection of leachate or surface run-off;
vi. Ambient air quality monitoring shall be regularly carried out particularly for
checking odour nuisance at down-wind direction on the boundary of processing
plant.
vii. In order to ensure safe application of compost, the following specifications for
compost quality shall be met, namely:-
Parameters Concentration not to exceed * (mg/kg

dry basis, except pH value and C/N
ratio)
Arsenic 10.00
Cadmium 5.00
Chromium 50.00
14
Copper 300.00
Lead 100.00
Mercury 0.15
Nickel 50.00
Zinc 1000.00
C/N ratio 20-40
PH 5.5-8.5
* Compost (final product) exceeding the above stated concentration limits shall not be used for
food crops. However, it may be utilized for purposes other than growing food crops.
4. The disposal of treated leachate shall follow the following standards, namely: -
S.No Parameter Standards
(Mode of Disposal)
Inland Public Land

surface sewers disposal
water
1. Suspended solids, mg/l, max 100 600 200
2. Dissolved solids (inorganic) mg/l, 2100 2100 2100

max.
3 PH value 5.5 to 9.0 5.5 to 9.0 5.5 to 9.0
4 Ammonical nitrogen (as N), mg/l, 50 50 -

max.
5 Total Kjeldahl nitrogen (as N), 100 - -

mg/l, max.
6 Biochemical oxygen demand (3 30 350 100

days at 270 C) max. (Mg/l)
7 Chemical oxygen demand, mg/l, 250 - -

max.
8 Arsenic (as As), mg/l, max 0.2 0.2 0.2
15
9 Mercury (as Hg), mg/l, max 0.01 0.01 -
10 Lead (as Pb), mg/l, max 0.1 1.0 -
11 Cadmium (as Cd), mg/l, max 2.0 1.0 -
12 Total Chromium (as Cr), mg/l, 2.0 2.0 -

max.
13 Copper (as Cu), mg/l, max. 3.0 3.0 -
14 Zinc (as Zn), mg/l, max. 5.0 15 -
15 Nickel (as Ni), mg/l, max 3.0 3.0 -
16 Cyanide (as CN), mg/l, max. 0.2 2.0 0.2
17 Chloride (as Cl), mg/l, max. 1000 1000 600
18 Fluoride (as F), mg/l, max 2.0 1.5 -
19 Phenolic compounds (as C6H5OH) 1.0 5.0 -

mg/l, max.
Note: While discharging treated leachates into inland surface waters, quantity of leachates being
discharged and the quantity of dilution water available in the receiving water body shall be given
due consideration.
The incinerators shall meet the following operating and emission standards, namely: -
A. Operating Standards
(1) The combustion efficiency (CE) shall be at least 99.00%.
(2) The combustion efficiency is computed as follows:
%CO2
C.E. = ------------------------ x 100
%CO2 + %CO
1. Emission Standards
Parameters Concentration mg/Nm3 at (12% CO2

correction)
(1) Particulate matter 150
(2) Nitrogen Oxides 450
(3) HCl 50
(4) Minimum stack height shall be 30 meters above ground.
(5) Volatile organic compounds in ash shall not be more than 0.01%.
16
Note:
1. Suitably designed pollution control devices shall be installed or retrofitted with the
incinerator to achieve the above emission limits, if necessary.
2. Astes to be incinerated shall not be chemically treated with any chlorinated disinfectants
3. Chlorinated plastics shall not be incinerated.
4. Toxic metals in incineration ash shall be limited within the regulatory quantities as
specified in the Hazardous Wastes (Management and Handling) Rules, 1989 as amended
from time to time.
5. Only low sulphur fuel like l.d.o., l.s.h.s or Diesel shall be used as fuel in the incinerator.
17
ANNEXURE IV
A Compilation of Legal Instruments
Sl. Legal Instrument Responsible Chemical Use Categories/ Objective of Legislation Relevant Articles/Provisions
No. (Type, Reference, Ministries or Pollutants
Year) Bodies
1 Air (Prevention and Central Pollution Air pollutants from chemical The prevention, control and Section 2: Definitions
Control of Pollution) Control Board and industries abatement of air pollution Section 21: Consent from State Boards
Act, 1981 amended State Pollution Section 22: Not to allow emissions exceeding
1987 Control Boards prescribed limits
Section 24: Power of Entry and Inspection
Section 25: Power to Obtain Information
Section 26: Power to Take Samples
Section 37-43: Penalties and Procedures
2 Air (Prevention and Central Pollution Air pollutants from chemical The prevention, control and Rule 2: Definitions
Control of Pollution) Control Board and industries abatement of air pollution Rule 9: Consent Applications
(Union Territories) State Pollution
Rules, 1983 Control Boards
3 Water (Prevention and Central Pollution Water Pollutants from water The prevention and control Section 2: Definitions
Control of Pollution) Control Board and polluting industries of water pollution and also Section 20: Power to Obtain Information
Act, 1974 amended State Pollution maintaining or restoring the Section 21: Power to Take Samples
1988 Control Boards wholesomeness of water Section 23: Power of Entry and Inspection
Section 24: Prohibition on Disposal
Section 25: Restriction on New Outlet and New
Discharge
Section 26: Provision regarding existing discharge
of sewage or trade effluent
Section 27: Refusal or withdrawal of consent by
state boards
4 Water (Prevention and Central Pollution Water Pollutants from water The prevention and control Rule 2: Definitions
Control of Pollution) Control Board and polluting industries of water pollution and also
Rule 30: Power to take samples
Rules, 1975 State Pollution maintaining or restoring the
Control Boards wholesomeness of water Rule 32: Consent Applications
5 The Environment Ministry of All types of environmental Protection and Improvement Section 2: Definitions
(Protection) Act, 1986, Environment and pollutants of the Environment
Section 7: Not to allow emission or discharge of
i
Year) Bodies
amended 1991 Forests, Central environmental pollutants in excess of prescribed

Pollution Control standards
Board and State
Section 8: Handing of Hazardous Substances
Pollution Control
Boards Section 10: Power of Entry and Inspection
Section 11: Power to take samples
6 Environmental Ministry of All types of Environmental Protection and Improvement Rule 2: Definitions
(Protection) Rules, 1986 Environment and Pollutants of the Environment
Rule 3: Standards for emission or discharge of
(Amendments in 1999, Forests, Central
environmental pollutants
2001, 2002, 2002, 2002, Pollution Control
2003, 2004) Board and State Rule 5: Prohibition and restriction on the location of
Pollution Control industries and the carrying on process and
Boards operations in different areas
Rule 13: Prohibition and restriction on the handling
of hazardous substances in different areas
Rule 14: Submission of environmental statement
7 Manufacture Storage Ministry of Hazardous Chemicals - Toxic, Regulate the manufacture, Rule 2: Definitions
and Import of Environment & Explosive, Flammable, storage and import of Rule 4: responsibility of the Occupier
Hazardous Chemicals Forests, Chief Reactive Hazardous Chemicals Rule 5: Notification of Major Accidents
Rules, 1989 amended Controller of Imports Rule 7-8: Approval and notification of site and
2000 and Exports, CPCB, updating
SPCB, Chief Rule 10-11: Safety Reports and Safety Audit reports
Inspector of and updating
Factories, Chief Rule 13: Preparation of Onsite Emergency Plan
Inspector of Dock Rule 14: Preparation of Offsite Emergency Plan
Safety, Chief Rule 15: Information to persons likely to get
Inspector of Mines, affected
AERB, Chief Rule 16: Proprietary Information
Controller of Rule 17: Material Safety Data Sheets
Explosives, District Rule 18: Import of Hazardous Chemicals
Collector or District
ii
Year) Bodies
Emergency
Authority, CEES
under DRDO
8 Chemical Accidents CCG, SCG, DCG, Hazardous Chemicals - Toxic, Emergency Planning Rule 2: Definitions
(Emergency Planning, LCG and MAH Explosive, Flammable, Preparedness and Response Rule 5: Functions of CCG
Preparedness and Units Reactive to chemical accidents Rule 7: Functions of SCG
Response) Rules, 1996 Rule 9: Functions of DCG
Rule 10: Functions of LCG
9 Ozone Depleting Ministry of Ozone depleting substances Regulate the production, Rule 2: Definitions
Substances (Regulation Environment & import, use, sale, purchase Rule 3: Regulation of production and consumption
and Control) Rules, Forests and phase-out of the ODS of ozone depleting substances
2000 Rule 4: Prohibition on export to or import from
countries not specified in Schedule VI
Rule 5: Ozone depleting substances are to be
exported to or imported from countries specified in
Schedule VI under a license
Rule 6: Regulation of the sale of ozone depleting
substances
Rule 7: Regulation on the purchase of ozone
depleting substances
Rule 8: Regulation on the use of ozone depleting
substance
Rule 9: Prohibition on new investments with ozone
depleting substances
Rule 10: Regulation of import, export and sale of
products made with or containing ozone depleting
substances
Rule 11: Regulation on reclamation and destruction
of ozone depleting substances
Rule 12: Regulation on manufacture, import and
export of compressors
Rule 13: Procedure for registration, cancellation of
registration and appeal against such orders
Rule 14: Monitoring and reporting requirements
iii
Year) Bodies
10 EIA Notification, 2006 MoEF, SPCB For all the identified Requirement of Requirements and procedure for seeking
developmental activities in the environmental clearance environmental clearance of projects
notification before establishment of or
modernization / expansion of
identified developmental
projects.
11 Public Liability Ministry of Hazardous Substances To provide immediate relief Section 2: Definitions
Insurance Act, 1991 Environment & to persons affected by Section 3: Liability to give relief in certain cases on
amended 1992 Forests, District accident involving hazardous principle of no fault
Collector substances Section 4: Duty of owner to take out insurance
policy
Section 7A: Establishment of Environmental Relief
Fund
Section 14-18: Penalties and Offences
13 Public Liability Ministry of Hazardous Substances To provide immediate relief Rule 2: Definitions
Insurance Rules, 1991 Environment & to persons affected by Rule 6: Establishment of administration of fund
amended 1993 Forests, District accident involving hazardous Rule 10: Extent of liability
Collector substances and also for Rule 11: Contribution of the owner to
Establishing an environmental relief fund
Environmental Relief fund
14 The Explosives Act, Ministry of Explosive substances as defined To regulate the manufacture, Section 4: Definition
1884 Commerce and under the Act possession, use, sale, Section 6: Power for Central government to prohibit
Industry transport, export and import the manufacture, possession or importation of
(Department of of explosives with a view to especially dangerous explosives
Explosives) prevent accidents Section 6B: Grant of Licenses
15 The Explosive Rules, Ministry of Explosive substances as defined To regulate the manufacture, Rule 2: Definition
1983 Commerce and under the Act possession, use, sale, Chapter II: General Provisions
Industry and Chief transport, export and import Chapter III: Import and Export
Controller of of explosives with a view to Chapter IV: Transport
Explosives, port prevent accidents Chapter V: Manufacture of explosives
conservator, customs Chapter VI: Possession sale and use
collector, railway Chapter VII: Licenses
administration
iv
Year) Bodies
16 The Static and Mobile Ministry of Gases (Toxic, non toxic and Regulate the import, Rule 2: Definition
Pressure Vessels Commerce and non flammable, non toxic and manufacture, design, Chapter III: Storage
(Unfired) Rules, 1981 Industry and Chief flammable, Dissolved installation, transportation, Chapter IV: Transport
Controller of Acetylene Gas, Non toxic and handling, use and testing of Chapter V: Licenses
Explosives, port flammable liquefiable gas other mobile and static pressure
conservator, customs than LPG, LPG vessels (unfired) with a view
collector, DGCA, to prevent accidents
DC, DM, Police (sub
inspector to
commissioner)
v
ANNEXURE V
General Standards for Discharge of Environmental Pollutants as per
CPCB
Table: Water Quality Standards
1. Colour and odour See Note-1 --- See Note-1 See Note-1
2. Suspended Solids, mg/l, Max 100 600 200 (a) For process waste
water-100
(b) For cooling water
effluent-10 per cent
above total suspended
matter of influent
cooling water.
3. Particle size of suspended solids Shall pass 850 micron --- --- (a) Floatable solids,
IS Sieve Max 3 mm
(b) Settleable solids
Max 850 microns.
4. Dissolved solids (inorganic), mg/a, mac 2100 2100 2100 ---
5. pH value 5.5 to 9.0 5.5 to 9.0 5.5 to 9.0 5.5 to 9.0
6. Temperature oC, Max Shall not exceed 40 in 45 at the point of --- 45 at the point of
any section of the discharge discharge
stream within 15
meters down stream
from the effluent
outlet
7. Oil and grease, mg/l, max 10 20 10 20
8. Total residual chlorine, mg/l, Max. 1.0 --- --- 1.0
9. Ammonical nitrogen (as N), mg/l, Max. 50 50 --- 50
10. Total Kjeldahl nitrogen (as N), mg/l, 100 --- --- 100
Max.
11. Free Ammonia (as NH3), mg/l, Max. 5.0 --- --- 5.0
12. Biochemical Oxygen Demand (5 days at 30 350 100 100
20oC) Max.
13. Chemical Oxygen Demand, mg/l, Max. 250 --- --- 250
14. Arsenic (as As), mg/l, Max. 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
15. Mercury (as Hg), mg/l, Max. 0.01 0.01 --- 0.01
16. Lead (as Pb), mg/l, Max. 0.1 1.0 --- 1.0
17. Cadmium (as Cd), mg/l, Max. 2.0 1.0 --- 2.0
i
18. Hexavalent chromium (as Cr+6) mg/l, 0.1 2.0 --- 1.0
Max.
19. Total chromium as (Cr), mg/l, Max. 2.0 2.0 --- 2.0
20. Copper (as Cu), mg/l, Max. 3.0 3.0 --- 3.0
21. Zinc (as Zn), mg/l, Max. 5.0 15 --- 15
22. Selenium (as Se), mg/l, Max. 0.05 0.05 --- 0.05
23. Nickel (as Ni), mg/l, Max. 3.0 3.0 --- 5.0
24. Boron (as B), mg/l, Max. 2.0 2.0 2.0 ---
25. Percent Sodium, Max. --- 60 60 ---
26. Residual sodium carbonate, mg/l, Max. --- --- 5.0 ---
27. Cyanide (as CN), mg/l, Max. 0.2 2.0 0.2 0.2
28. Chloride (as Cl), mg/l, Max. 1000 1000 600 (a)
29. Fluoride (as F), mg/l, Max. 2.0 15 --- 15
30. Dissolved Phosphates (as P), mg/l, 5.0 --- --- ---
Max.
31. Sulphate (as SO4), mg/l, Max. 1000 1000 1000 ---
32. Sulphide (as S), mg/l, Max. 2.0 --- --- 5.0
33. Pesticides Absent Absent Absent Absent
34. Phenolic compounds (as C6H5OH), 1.0 5.0 --- 5.0
mg/l, Max.
35. Radioactive materials
(a) Alpha emitters MC/ml, Max. 10-7 10-7 10-8 10-7
(b) Beta emitters uc/ml, Max.
10-6 10-6 10-7 10-6
Note :-
1. All efforts should be made to remove colour and unpleasant odour as far as practicable.
2. The standards mentioned in this notification shall apply to all the effluents discharged such as industrial mining and mineral processing
activities municipal sewage etc.
ii
Ambient air quality standards in respect of noise
Area Code Category of Area Limits in dB (A) Leq

Day Time Night Time
(A) Industrial area 75 70
(B) Commercial area 65 55
(C) Residential area 55 45
(D) Silence zone 50 40
Note :
1. Day time is reckoned in between 6.00 AM and 9.00 PM
2. Night time is reckoned in between 9.00 PM and 6.00 AM
3. Silence zone is defined as areas upto 100 meters around such premises as hospitals,
educational institutions and courts. The Silence zones are to be declared by the
Competent Authority.
4. Use of vehicular horns, loudspeakers and bursting of crackers shall be banned in these
zones.
5. Mixed categories of areas should be declared as one of the four above mentioned
categories by the Competent Authority and the corresponding standards shall apply.
The total sound power level, Lw, of a DG set should be less than, 94+10 log10 (KVA), dB (A), at the
manufacturing stage, where, KVA is the nominal power rating of a DG set.
This level should fall by 5 dB (A) every five years, till 2007, i.e. in 2002 and then in 2007.
Noise from the DG set should be controlled by providing an acoustic enclosure or by treating the room
acoustically.
The acoustic enclosure/acoustic treatment of the room should be designed for minimum 25 dB(A) Insertion
Loss or for meeting the ambient noise standards, whichever is on the higher side (if the actual ambient noise
is on the higher side, it may not be possible to check the performance of the acoustic enclosure/acoustic
treatment. Under such circumstances the performance may be checked for noise reduction upto actual
ambient noise level, preferably, in the night time). The measurement for Insertion Loss may be done at
different points at 0.5m from the acoustic enclosure/room, and then averaged.
The DG set should also be provide with proper exhaust muffler with Insertion Loss of minimum 25 dB(A).
1. The manufacturer should offer to the user a standard acoustic enclosure of 25 dB(A) Insertion Loss
and also a suitable exhaust muffler with Insertion Loss of 25 dB(A).
i
2. The user should make efforts to bring down the noise levels due to the DG set, outside his premises,
within the ambient noise requirements by proper siting and control measures.
3. The manufacturer should furnish noise power levels of the unlicensed DG sets as per standards
prescribed under (A)
4. The total sound power level of a DG set, at the user's end, shall be within 2 dB(A) of the total sound
power level of the DG set, at the manufacturing stage, as prescribed under (A).
5. Installation of a DG set must be strictly in compliance with the recommendation of the DG set
manufacturer.
6. A proper routine and preventive maintenance procedure for the DG set should be set and followed in
consultation with the DG set manufacturer which would help prevent noise levels of the DG set from
deteriorating with use.
(5th December, 2001)
In exercise of the powers conferred by section 5 of the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986, (29 of 1986),
read with the Government of India, Ministry of Home Affairs notification S.O. 667 (E) bearing No. F.No. U-
11030/J/91-VTL dated 10th September, 1992, the Lt. Governor of Government of National Capital of Delhi
hereby directs to all owners/users of generators sets in the National Capital Territory of Delhi as follows :-
1. that generator sets above the capacity of 5 KVA shall not be operated in residential areas between
the hours of 10.00 PM to 6.00 AM;
2. that the generator sets above the capacity of 5 KVA in all areas residential/commercial/industrial
shall operate only with the mandatory acoustic enclosures and other standards prescribed in the
Environment (Protection) Rules, 1986;
3. that mobile generator sets used in social gatherings and public functions shall be permitted only if
they have installed mandatory acoustic enclosures and adhere to the prescribed standards for noise
and emission as laid down in the Environment (Protection) Rules, 1986.
The contravention of the above directions shall make the offender liable for prosecution under section 15 of
the said Act which stipulates punishment of imprisonment for a term which may extend to five years with
fine which may extend to one lakh rupees, or with both, and in case the failure of contravention continues,
with additional fine which may extend to five thousand rupees for every day during which such failure or
contravention continues after the conviction for the first such failure or contravention and if still the failure or
contravention continues beyond a period of one year after the date of contravention, the offender continues
beyond a period of one year after the date of contravention, the offender shall be punishable with
imprisonment for a term which may extend to seven years.
In exercise of the powers conferred by section 5 of the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 (29 of 1986) read
with the Govt. of India, Ministry of Home Affairs notification S.O. 667(E) bearing No. U-11030/J/91-VTL dated
the 10th September, 1992, the Lt. Governor Govt. of the National Capital Territory of Delhi hereby makes the
following amendment/modification in his order dated the 5th December, 2001 regarding the operation of
generator sets, namely:-
In the above said order, for clause(1), the following shall be substituted, namely:-
ii
“(1) that the generator sets above 5KVA shall not be operated in residential areas between the hours from
10.00 p.m. to 6.00 a.m. except generator sets of Group Housing Societies and Multi-storey residential
apartments”.
The minimum height of stack to be provided with each generator set can be worked out using the following
formula:
H = h +0.2 Ì √KVA
H = Total height of stack in metre
h = Height of the building in metres where the generator set is installed
KVA = Total generator capacity of the set in KVA
Based on the above formula the minimum stack height to be provided with different range of generator sets
may be categorized as follows:
For Generator Sets Total Height of stack in metre
50 KVA Ht. of the building + 1.5 metre
50-100 KVA Ht. of the building + 2.0 metre
100- 150 KVA Ht. of the building + 2.5 metre
Similarly for higher KVA ratings a stack height can be worked out using the above formula
Source: Evolved By CPCB
[Emission Regulations Part IV: COINDS/26/1986-87]
iii
ANNEXURE VI
FCO Standards for Compost Quality
Fertilizer Control Order (FCO) Standards for Compost Quality
S.NO TESTS LIMIT

1 Moisture % 15.0 - 25.0
2 Colour Dark Brown to Black
3 Odour Absence of foul odour
Minimum 90% material should
4 Particle Size
pass through the 4mm sieve
5 Bulk Density(g/cm3) 0.7 - 0.9
6 Total Organic carbon % 16
7 Total Nitrogen(as n) % 0.5
8 Total Phosphate (P2O5) 0.5
9 Total Potash (as K2O) 1
10 C:N ratio 20:1 or less
11 pH 6.5 - 7.5
12 Conductivity 4
13 Pathogens Nil
14 Heavy Metal Content %
Arsenic(as As2O3) 10
Cadmium (as Cd) 5
Chromium (as Cr) 50
Copper (as Cu) 300
Mercury(as Hg) 0.15
Nickel (as Ni) 50
Lead (as Pb) 100
Zinc(as Zn) 1000
i
ANNEXURE VII
Form 1 (Application Form for Obtaining EIA Clearance)
FORM 1
(I) BASIC INFORMATION
S. No. Item Details
1. Name of the project/s

2. S.No. in the schedule
3. Proposed capacity/area/length/tonnage to be
handled/command area/lease area/number of
wells to be drilled
4. New/Expansion/Modernization
5. Existing Capacity/Area etc.
6. Category of Project i.e., ‘A’ or ‘B’
7. Does it attract the general condition? If yes,
please specify.
8. Does it attract the specific condition? If yes,
Please specify.
9. Location
Plot/Survey/Khasra No.
Village
Tehsil
District
State
10. Name of the applicant
11. Registered Address
12. Address for correspondence:
Name
Designation (Owner/Partner/CEO)
Address
Pin Code
E-mail
Telephone No.
Fax No.
13. Details of alternative Sites examined, if any Village-District-State
location of these sites should be shown on a 1.
toposheet.
2.
3.
1
S. No. Item Details
14. Interlined Projects

15. Whether separate application of interlined
project has been submitted
16. If yes, date of submission
17. If no, reason
18. Whether the proposal involves
approval/clearance under:
The Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980
The Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972
The C.R.Z. Notification, 1991
19. Forest land involved (hectares)
20. Whether there is any litigation pending against
the project and/or land in which the project is
propose to be set up
Name of the Court
Case No.
Orders/directions of the Court, if any and its
relevance with the proposed project.
(II) ACTIVITY
1. Construction, operation or decommissioning of the Project involving
actions, which will cause physical changes in the locality (topography, land use,
changes in water bodies, etc.)
Details thereof (with

approximate quantities
/rates, wherever
S.No. Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No possible) with source of
information data
1.1 Permanent or temporary change in land use,

land cover or topography including increase
in intensity of land use (with respect to local
land use plan)
1.2 Clearance of existing land, vegetation and
buildings?
1.3 Creation of new land uses?
1.4 Pre-construction investigations e.g. bore

houses, soil testing?
1.5 Construction works?
2
/rates, wherever
information data
1.6 Demolition works?
1.7 Temporary sites used for construction works

or housing of construction workers?
1.8 Above ground buildings, structures or
earthworks including linear structures, cut
and fill or excavations
1.9 Underground works including mining or
tunneling?
1.10 Reclamation works?
1.11 Dredging?
1.12 Offshore structures?
1.13 Production and manufacturing processes?
1.14 Facilities for storage of goods or materials?
1.15 Facilities for treatment or disposal of solid
waste or liquid effluents?
1.16 Facilities for long term housing of operational
workers?
1.17 New road, rail or sea traffic during
construction or operation?
1.18 New road, rail, air waterborne or other
transport infrastructure including new or
altered routes and stations, ports, airports etc?
1.19 Closure or diversion of existing transport
routes or infrastructure leading to changes in
traffic movements?
1.20 New or diverted transmission lines or
pipelines?
1.21 Impoundment, damming, culverting,
realignment or other changes to the hydrology
of watercourses or aquifers?
1.22 Stream crossings?
1.23 Abstraction or transfers of water form ground
or surface waters?
1.24 Changes in water bodies or the land surface
affecting drainage or run-off?
1.25 Transport of personnel or materials for
construction, operation or decommissioning?
3
/rates, wherever
information data
1.26 Long-term dismantling or decommissioning

or restoration works?
1.27 Ongoing activity during decommissioning
which could have an impact on the
environment?
1.28 Influx of people to an area in either
temporarily or permanently?
1.29 Introduction of alien species?
1.30 Loss of native species or genetic diversity?
1.31 Any other actions?
2. Use of Natural resources for construction or operation of the Project

(such as land, water, materials or energy, especially any resources which are
non-renewable or in short supply):

S.No. Information/checklist confirmation Yes/No approximate quantities
/rates, wherever possible)
with source of
information data
2.1 Land especially undeveloped or agricultural
land (ha)
2.2 Water (expected source & competing users)

unit: KLD
2.3 Minerals (MT)
2.4 Construction material – stone, aggregates, sand
/ soil (expected source – MT)
2.5 Forests and timber (source – MT)
2.6 Energy including electricity and fuels (source,
competing users) Unit: fuel (MT), energy (MW)
2.7 Any other natural resources (use appropriate
standard units)
4
3. Use, storage, transport, handling or production of substances or
materials, which could be harmful to human health or the environment or raise
concerns about actual or perceived risks to human health.

approximate
quantities/rates,
S.No Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No wherever possible) with
source of information
data
3.1 Use of substances or materials, which are

hazardous (as per MSIHC rules) to human health
or the environment (flora, fauna, and
water supplies)
3.2 Changes in occurrence of disease or affect disease
vectors (e.g. insect or water borne diseases)
3.3 Affect the welfare of people e.g. by changing
living conditions?
3.4 Vulnerable groups of people who could be
affected by the project e.g. hospital patients,
children, the elderly etc.,
3.5 Any other causes
4. Production of solid wastes during construction or operation or

decommissioning (MT/month)

approximate
quantities/rates,
S.No. Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No wherever possible) with
data
4.1 Spoil, overburden or mine wastes

4.2 Municipal waste (domestic and or commercial
wastes)
4.3 Hazardous wastes (as per Hazardous Waste
Management Rules)
4.4 Other industrial process wastes

4.5 Surplus product
4.6 Sewage sludge or other sludge from effluent
treatment
4.7 Construction or demolition wastes
4.8 Redundant machinery or equipment
5
approximate
quantities/rates,
data
4.9 Contaminated soils or other materials

4.10 Agricultural wastes
4.11 Other solid wastes
5. Release of pollutants or any hazardous, toxic or noxious substances to air

(kg/hr)

approximate
quantities/rates,
S.No Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No wherever possible) with
data
5.1 Emissions from combustion of fossil fuels from

stationary or mobile sources
5.2 Emissions from production processes
5.3 Emissions from materials handling including
storage or transport
5.4 Emissions from construction activities including
plant and equipment
5.5 Dust or odours from handling of materials
including construction materials, sewage and
waste
5.6 Emissions from incineration of waste
5.7 Emissions from burning of waste in open air (e.g.
slash materials, construction debris)
5.8 Emissions from any other sources
6
6. Generation of Noise and Vibration, and Emissions of Light and Heat:
S.No. Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No Details thereof (with

approximate
quantities/rates, wherever
possible) with source of
information data with
source of information data
6.1 From operation of equipment e.g. engines,

ventilation plant, crushers
6.2 From industrial or similar processes
6.3 From construction or demolition
6.4 From blasting or piling
6.5 From construction or operational traffic
6.6 From lighting or cooling systems
6.7 From any other sources
7. Risks of contamination of land or water from releases of pollutants into

the ground or into sewers, surface waters, groundwater, coastal waters or the
sea:

approximate
quantities/rates,
data
7.1 From handling, storage, use or spillage of

hazardous materials
7.2 From discharge of sewage or other effluents to
water or the land (expected mode and place of
discharge)
7.3 By deposition of pollutants emitted to air into
the land or into water
7.4 From any other sources
7.5 Is there a risk of long term build up of pollutants
in the environment from these sources?
7
8. Risk of accidents during construction or operation of the Project, which
could affect human health or the environment

approximate
S.No Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No possible) with source of
information data
8.1 From explosions, spillages, fires etc from

storage, handling, use or production of hazardous
substances
8.2 From any other causes
8.3 Could the project be affected by natural disasters
causing environmental damage (e.g. floods,
earthquakes, landslides, cloudburst etc)?
9. Factors which should be considered (such as consequential development)

which could lead to environmental effects or the potential for cumulative impacts
with other existing or planned activities in the locality

approximate
S. Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No
No.
possible) with source of
information data
9.1 Lead to development of supporting facilities,

ancillary development or development
stimulated by the project which could have
impact on the environment e.g.:
̇ Supporting infrastructure (roads, power
supply, waste or waste water treatment,
etc.)
̇ housing development
̇ extractive industries
̇ supply industries
̇ other
9.2 Lead to after-use of the site, which could have an

impact on the environment
9.3 Set a precedent for later developments
9.4 Have cumulative effects due to proximity to
other existing or planned projects with similar
effects
8
(III) ENVIRONMENTAL SENSITIVITY
S.No. Areas Name/ Aerial distance (within 15

km.)
Identity
Proposed project location
boundary
1 Areas protected under international conventions,

national or local legislation for their ecological,
landscape, cultural or other related value
2 Areas which are important or sensitive for
ecological reasons - Wetlands, watercourses or
other water bodies, coastal zone, biospheres,
mountains, forests
3 Areas used by protected, important or sensitive
species of flora or fauna for breeding, nesting,
foraging, resting, over wintering, migration
4 Inland, coastal, marine or underground waters

5 State, National boundaries
6 Routes or facilities used by the public for access
to recreation or other tourist, pilgrim areas
7 Defence installations
8 Densely populated or built-up area
9 Areas occupied by sensitive man-made land uses
(hospitals, schools, places of worship,
community facilities)
10 Areas containing important, high quality or
scarce resources (ground water resources,
surface resources, forestry, agriculture,
fisheries, tourism, minerals)
11 Areas already subjected to pollution or
environmental damage. (those where existing
legal environmental standards are exceeded)
12 Areas susceptible to natural hazard which could
cause the project to present environmental
problems (earthquakes, subsidence, landslides,
erosion, flooding or extreme or adverse climatic
conditions)
9
(IV) PROPOSED TERMS OF REFERENCE FOR EIA STUDIES
“I hereby given undertaking that the data and information given in the application and
enclosure are true to the best of my knowledge and belief and I am aware that if any
part of the data and information submitted is found to be false or misleading at any
stage, the project will be rejected and clearance give, if any to the project will be
revoked at our risk and cost.
Date:______________
Place:______________
Signature of the applicant
With Name and Full Address
(Project Proponent / Authorized Signatory)
NOTE:
1. The projects involving clearance under Coastal Regulation Zone
Notification, 1991 shall submit with the application a C.R.Z. map duly
demarcated by one of the authorized, agencies, showing the project
activities, w.r.t. C.R.Z. and the recommendations of the State Coastal Zone
Management Authority. Simultaneous action shall also be taken to obtain
the requisite clearance under the provisions of the C.R.Z. Notification,
1991 for the activities to be located in the CRZ.
2. The projects to be located within 10km of the National Parks, Sanctuaries,
Biosphere Reserves, Migratory Corridors of Wild Animals, the project
proponent shall submit the map duly authenticated by Chief Wildlife
Warden showing these features vis-à-vis the project location and the
recommendations or comments of the Chief Wildlife Warden thereon.”
10
ANNEXURE VIII
Critically Polluted Industrial Areas and Clusters/Potential Impact
Zones
Table 1: Details of Critically Polluted Industrial Areas and Clusters / Potential Impact Zone
(Ref: Office Memorandum No. J-11013/5/2010-IA.II(I) Dated 13.1.2010)
S. No. Critically Polluted Industrial Industrial Clusters/ Potential Impact Zones

Area and CEPI
1. Ankeshwar (Gujarat) ̇ GIDC Ankeshwar and GIDC, Panoli

CEPI-88.50(Ac_Wc_Lc)
2 Vapi (Gujarat) ̇ GIDC Vapi
CEPI-88.09(Ac_Wc_Lc)
3 Ghaziabad (Uttar Pradesh) Sub-cluster A
CEPI-87.37(Ac_Wc_Lc) ̇ Mohan nagar industrial area
̇ Rajinder nagar industrial area
̇ Sahibabad industrial area
Sub-cluster B
̇ Pandav nagar industrial area
̇ Kavi nagar industrial area
̇ Bulandshahar road industrial area
̇ Amrit nagar
̇ Aryanagar industrial area
Sub-cluster C
̇ Merrut road industrial are
Sub-cluster D
̇ Loni industrial area
̇ Loni Road industrial area
̇ Roop nagar industrial area
Sub-cluster E
̇ Hapur Road industrial area
̇ Dasna
̇ Philkura
Sub-cluster F (Other scattered industrial areas)
̇ South side of GT road
̇ Kavi Nagar
̇ Tronica city
̇ Anand Nagar
̇ Jindal Nagar
̇ Prakash Nagar
̇ Rural industrial estate
4 Chandrapur ̇ Chandrapur (MIDC Chandrapur, Tadali, Ghuggus,
Ballapur)
(Maharashtra)
CEPI-83.88 (Ac_Wc_Lc)
5 Kobra (Chhatisgarh) ̇ Industrial areas and their townships of NTPC, BALCO,
CEPI-83.00 (Ac_Ws_Lc) CSEB (East) & CSEB (West)
̇ Korba town
6 Bhiwadi (Rajasthan) ̇ RIICO industrial areas Phase I to IV
CEPI-82.91 (Ac_Wc_Ls) ̇ Bhiwadi town
̇ Other surrounding industrial areas: Chopanki, Rampura
Mundana, Khuskhera Phase I to III
7 Angul Talcer(Orissa) ̇ MCL Coal mining area, Augul – Talcer region
CEPI-82.09 (Ac_Wc_Lc) ̇ Industrial area (60 km x 45 km)
Following blocks of Augul district:
̇ Kohina block
̇ Talcher block
i
Area and CEPI
̇ Angul block
̇ Chhendipada block
̇ Banarpal block
̇ Odapada block of Dhenkamal district
8 Vellore (North Arcot) (Tamil ̇ Ranipet, SIPCOT industrial complex
Nadu)
CEPI-81.79 (Ac_Wc_Lc)
9 Singrauli (Uttar Pradesh) Sonebhadra (UP)
CEPI-81.73 (Ac_Wc_Ls) ̇ Dala-Tola
̇ Obra
̇ Renukoot
̇ Anpara
̇ Renusagar
̇ Kakri
̇ Dudhichuwa
̇ Bina
̇ Khadia
̇ Shakti nagar
̇ Rihand nagar
̇ Bijpur
Sigrauli (Madhya Pradesh)
Vindhyachal nagar and Jaynat, Nigahi, Dudhichua, Amlohri &
Jhingurdah townships
10 Ludhiana (Punjab) Ludhiana municipal limits covering industrial clusters:
CEPI-81.66 (Ac_Wc_Ls) ̇ Focal point along with NH-I- Total eight phase
̇ Industrial area-B- from sherpur chowk to Gill road & Gill
road to Miller Kotla road (left side of road)
̇ Mixed industrial area – right side of Gill road
̇ Industrial area –C (near Juglana village)
̇ Industrial area A & extension: area between old GT road
and Ludhiana bypass road
̇ Industrial estate: near Dholwal chowk
̇ Mixes industrial area (MIA) Miller gunj
̇ MIA – bypass road
̇ Bahdur industrial area
̇ Tejpur industrial complex
11 Nazafgarh drain basin, Delhi ̇ Industrial areas: Anand Parvat, Naraina, Okhla and
Wazirpur
CEPI-79.54 (As_Wc_Lc)
12 Noida (Uttar Pradesh) Territorial Jurisdiction of:
CEPI-78.90 (Ac_Wc_Lc) ̇ Noida Phase-1
̇ Noida Phase-2
̇ Noida Phase-3
̇ Surajpur industrial area
̇ Greater Noida industrial area
̇ Village- Chhaparaula
13 Dhanbad (Jharkhand) Four blocks of Dhanbad district:
CEPI-78.63 (Ac_Ws_Lc) ̇ Sadar (Dhanbad Municipality)
̇ Jharia (Jharia Municipality, Sindri industrial area)
̇ Govindpur (Govindpur industrial estate)
̇ Nirsa
ii
Area and CEPI
14 Dombivalli (Maharashtra) ̇ MIDC Phase- I, Phase- II

CEPI-78.41 (Ac_Wc_Ls)
15 Kanpur (Uttar Pradesh) Industrial areas:
CEPI-78.09 (Ac_Wc_Ls) ̇ Dada nagar
̇ Panki
̇ Fazalganj
̇ Vijay nagar
̇ Jajmau
16 Cuddalore (Tamil Nadu) ̇ SIPCOT industrial complex, Phase I & II
CEPI-77.45 (As_Wc_Lc)
17 Aurangabad (Maharashtra) ̇ MIDC Chikhalthana, MIDC Waluj, MIDC Shendra, and
CEPI-77.44 (Ac_Wc_Ls) Paithan road industrial area
18 Faridabad (Haryana) ̇ Sector 27-A, B, C, D

CEPI-77.07 (Ac_Ws_Lc) ̇ DLF phase- 1, sector 31,32
̇ DLF phase- 2, sector 35
̇ Sector 4, 6, 24, 27, 31, 59
̇ Industrial area Hatin
̇ Industrial model township
19 Agra (Uttar Pradesh) ̇ Nunihai industrial estate, Rambag nagar, UPSIDC
CEPI-76.48 (As_Wc_Ls) industrial area, and Runukata industrial area
20 Manali (Tamil Nadu) ̇ Manali industrial area

CEPI-76.32 (Ac_Ws_Ls)
21 Haldia (West Bengal) ̇ 5 km wide strip (17.4 x 5.0 km) of industrial area on the
CEPI-75.43 (As_Wc_Ls) southern side of the confluence point of Rivers Hugli and
Rupnarayan, covering
̇ Haldia municipal area & Sutahata block – I and II
22 Ahmedabad (Gujarat) ̇ GIDC Odhav
CEPI-75.28 (Ac_Ws_Ls) ̇ GIDC Naroda
23 Jodhpur (Rajasthan) ̇ Industrial areas including Basni areas (phase-I & II),
CEPI-75.19 (As_Wc_Ls) industrial estate, light & heavy industrial areas, industrial
areas behind new power house, Mandore, Bornada,
Sangariya and village Tanwada & Salawas.
̇ Jodhpur city
24 Greater Cochin (Kerala) ̇ Eloor-Edayar industrial belt,
CEPI-75.08 (As_Wc_Ls) ̇ Ambala Mogal industrial areas
25 Mandi Gobind Garh (Punjab) ̇ Mandi Govindgarh municipal limit and khanna area
CEPI-75.08 (Ac_Ws_Lc)
26 Howrah (West Bengal) ̇ Liluah-Bamangachhi region, Howrah
CEPI-74.84 (As_Ws_Lc) ̇ Jalan industrial complex-1, Howrah
27 Vatva (Gujarat) ̇ GIDC Vatva, Narol industrial area (Villages Piplaj,

Shahwadi, Narol)
CEPI-74.77 (Ac_Wc_Ls)
28 Ib Valley (Orissa) ̇ Ib Valley of Jharsuguda (Industrial and mining area)

29 Varansi-Mirzapur (Uttar Pradesh) ̇ Industrial estate, Mirzapur
CEPI-73.79 (As_Wc_Ls) ̇ Chunar
̇ Industrial estate, Chandpur, Varansi
iii
Area and CEPI
̇ UPSIC, industrial estate, Phoolpur
̇ Industrial area, Ramnagar, Chandauli
30 Navi Mumbai (Maharashtra) ̇ TTC industrial area, MIDC, Navi Mumbai (including
Bocks-D, C, EL, A, R, General, Kalva)
31 Pali (Rajasthan) ̇ Existing industrial areas: Mandia road, Puniyata road,
CEPI-73.73 (As_Wc_Ls) Sumerpur
̇ Pali town
32 Mangalore (Karnataka) ̇ Baikampady industrial area
33 Jharsuguda (Orissa) ̇ Ib valley of Jharsuguda (Industrial and mining area)
34 Coimbatore (Tamil Nadu) ̇ SIDCO, Kurichi industrial Clusters
CEPI-72.38 (Ac_Ws_Ln)
35 Bhadravati (Karnataka) ̇ KSSIDC Industrial area, Mysore paper mill & VISL
township complex
CEPI-72.33 (Ac_Ws_Ln)
36 Tarapur (Maharashtra) ̇ MIDC Tarapur
37 Panipat (Haryana) ̇ Panipat municipal limit and its industrial clusters
CEPI-71.91 (As_Ws_Ls)
38 Indore (Madhya Pradesh) Following 09 industrial area:
CEPI-71.26 (As_Ws_Ls) ̇ Sanwer road
̇ Shivaji nagar
̇ Pologround
̇ Laxmibai nagar
̇ Scheme no.71
̇ Navlakha
̇ Pipliya
̇ Palda
̇ Rau
Indore city
Other surrounding industrial areas: Manglia, Rajoda, Asrawad,
Tejpur Gadwadi
39 Bhavnagar (Gujarat) ̇ GIDI Chitra, Bhavnagar
40 Vishakhapatnam (Andhra Pradesh) ̇ Bowl area (the area between Yarada hill range in the south
CEPI-70.82 (As_Ws_Ls) to Simhachalam hill range in the north and sea on the east
and the present NH-5 in the west direction)
41 Junagarh (Gujarat) Industrial areas:
CEPI-70.82 (As_Ws_Ls) ̇ Sabalpur
̇ Jay Bhavani
̇ Jay Bhuvneshwari
̇ GIDC Junagarh (I&II)
42 Asansole (West Bengal) ̇ Bumpur area surrounding IISCO
43 Patancheru - Bollaram Industrial area:
(Andhra Pradesh) ̇ Patancheru
̇ Bollaram
iv
Area and CEPI
Note:
Names of identified industrial clusters/potential impact zones are approximate location based on rapid
survey and assessment and may alter partially subject to the detailed field study and monitoring.
Detailed mapping will be made available showing spatial boundaries of the identified industrial
clusters including zone of influence/ buffer zone, after in depth field study.
v
ANNEXURE IX
Pre-Feasibility Report: Points for Possible Coverage
Table 1: Points for Possible Coverage in Pre-feasibility Report
S. No. Contents Points of Coverage in Pre-feasibility Report
I. Executive summary ̇ A miniature report of entire pre feasibility report.
II. Project Details

Need/Justification of the Project ̇Need for waste management and establishing the
waste management facilities
̇ Alternatives to meet the need
̇ Post project scenario , etc.
Profile of Project Area ̇ City/ULB Profile
̇ Location/ Landuse (Study area as well as City/ULB)
- Geographical details - Longitude & latitude,
village, taluka, district, state
- In case of seismic areas, seismic zone, active
faults, occurrence on earthquakes, etc.
- Proximity from infrastructural facilities
- Landuse pattern such as agricultural, barren,
forest, etc. and details thereof
- Topography of the area
- Approach to site – roads, railways and airports
- Distance from nearest residential and industrial
areas
- Distance from nearest water bodies such as
river, canal, dam, etc
- Distance from ecologically sensitive areas
- In case of flood prone areas, HFL of the site
- Drainage patterns, etc
̇ Climatic conditions (Meteorology)
̇ Area & population (also provide details of slums)
̇ Population projections
̇ Population density, etc.
Current waste management ̇ Details on waste quantity, composition and waste
Scenario generation rates, leachate quantity & quality etc
̇ Solid waste collection system
̇ Solid waste transfer and transport
̇ Storage, treatment and disposal details
̇ SWM organisation, etc.
Baseline Studies - Parameters for ̇ Micro-meteorology
Study ̇ Air Environment
̇ Water Environment
̇ Noise Environment
̇ Traffic studies
̇ Land Environment
̇ Ecological Environment
̇ Socio-economic Environment, etc.
III Proposed Solid Waste Management Facilities
Technical profile ̇ Various activities of the proposed MSW facility

- Waste Handling, Sorting, Storage &
Processing At Source
- Collection of MSW
- Door-to-door collection
- Transfer and Transport
- Transfer station
- Traffic that would arise during different
phases of the project and transportation
mechanism to handle such traffic
ii
̇ New facilities needed
̇ Technical parameters of the facility & equipments to
be used, etc.
Process technology ̇ Analysis of all available technologies and better
operating practices.
̇ Analysis of various possible configurations for each
technology or a combination of these technologies for
waste management
̇ Optimization of facility capacity and area
̇ Broad specifications for the proposed facility
including:
- Design, construction, operation process for each
alternative
- In case of landfill, details on landfill type,
construction and phases, waste storage, leachate
management, landfill gas management,
stormwater management, etc.
- Equipments used at the facility for handling
waste
- General facility layout showing all the units, etc.
Resources ̇ Manpower
̇ Equipments for handling waste
̇ Transportation vehicles
̇ Construction material
̇ Infrastructure development
̇ Power
̇ Source of water for utilities, domestic, etc.
Project schedule ̇ Project implementation schedule
Project Cost ̇ Ascertain the costs and benefits of the proposed

project for project life
̇ Technical and logistic constraints/requirements of
project sustainability, etc.
III. Selection of site based on least possible impacts (New MSW Facilities)
i. Choice of site selection
Land details ̇ Land requirement and availability
̇ Land ownership details such as Government, private,
tribal, non-tribal, etc.
̇ Total area of the project/site
̇ Prevailing land cost details, etc.
Major techno-economic feasibility ̇ Land availability & its development
considerations ̇ Product demand around the selected site
̇ Access to site for transportation of equipments/
construction machinery, material, etc.
̇ Raw material availability and its transportation
̇ Water availability and consumptive use
̇ Product transportation
̇ Infrastructure availability at selected site
̇ Inter-state issue, if any, etc.
Incompatible landuse and ̇ If any incompatible land-use attributes fall within the
ecologically sensitive attributes study area, the following details has to be provided:
with respect to identified suitable - Public water supply areas from rivers/surface
sites water bodies, from groundwater
- Scenic areas/tourism areas/hill resorts
- Religious places, pilgrim centers that attract
over 10 lakh pilgrims a year
- Protected tribal settlements (notified tribal areas
where industrial activity is not permitted); CRZ
- Monuments of national significance, World
iii
Heritage Sites
- Cyclone, Tsunami prone areas (based on last 25
years);
- Airport areas
- Any other feature as specified by the State or
local government and other features as locally
applicable, including prime agricultural lands,
pastures, migratory corridors, etc.
̇ If ecologically sensitive attributes fall within the
study area, please give details. Ecologically sensitive
attributes include
- National parks
- Wild life sanctuaries Game reserve
- Tiger reserve/elephant reserve/turtle nesting
ground
- Mangrove area
- Wetlands
- Reserved and protected forests
- Endangered species of flora and fauna
- Any other eco-sensitive areas etc.
Social aspects ̇ Corporate social responsibilities
̇ Employments and infrastructure added in the vicinity
of the plant
̇ Status of land availability, current and post project
land use variation
̇ Social sensitivity and likely project affected people,
etc.
III. Anticipated impacts based on ̇ Population
project operations on receiving ̇ Flora and fauna
environment ̇ Water
̇ Soil
̇ Air
̇ Climate
̇ Landscape, etc.
IV. Proposed broad mitigation ̇ Preventive measures
measures which could effectively ̇ Source control measures
be internalized as project ̇ Mitigation measures at the receiving environment
components to have ̇ Health and safety measures of workers, etc.
environmental and social
acceptance of the proposed site
V. An indication of any difficulties (technical deficiencies or lack of know-how) encountered by

the developer in compiling the required information.
The above listing is not exhaustive. Thus the proponent may provide additional necessary
information, felt appropriate, to include in the pre-feasibility study report in support of selecting
the site for the proposed developmental activities. The Concerned EAC/SEAC during scrutiny,
may specifically ask for any additional information/data required to substantiate the requirement
to prescribe the ToR for EIA studies. However, it is to make clear that all the required further
information by EAC/SEAC may be mentioned in one single letter, within the prescribed time.
iv
ANNEXURE X
Types of Monitoring and Network Design Considerations
TYPES OF MONITORING AND NETWORK DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
A. Types of Monitoring
Monitoring refers to the collection of data using a series of repetitive measurements of
environmental parameters (or, more generally, to a process of systematic observation).
The environmental quality monitoring programme design will be dependent upon the
monitoring objectives specified for the selected area of interest. The main types of EIA
monitoring activities are:
̇ Baseline monitoring is the measurement of environmental parameters during the pre-

project period for the purpose of determining the range of variation of the system and
establishing reference points against which changes can be measured. This leads to
the assessment of the possible (additional available) assimilative capacity of the
environmental components in pre-project period w.r.t. the standard or target level.
̇ Effects monitoring is the measurement of environmental parameters during project
construction and implementation to detect changes which are attributable to the
project to provide the necessary information to:
− verify the accuracy of EIA predictions; and
− determine the effectiveness of measures to mitigate adverse effects of projects on
the environment.
− Feedback from environmental effect monitoring programs may be used to improve
the predictive capability of EIAs and also determine whether more or less stringent
mitigation measures are needed
̇ Compliance monitoring is the periodic sampling or continuous measurement of
environmental parameters to ensure that regulatory requirements and standards are
being met.
Compliance and effects monitoring occurs during the project construction, operation, and
abandonment stages. The resources and institutional set-up should be available for the
monitoring at these stages. All large-scale construction projects will require some
construction stage monitoring. To control the environmental hazards of construction as
specified in the EIA, a monitoring program should be established to ensure that each
mitigation measure is effectively implemented. There are numerous potential areas for
monitoring during operations.
The scope of monitoring topics discussed in this chapter is limited to Baseline and Effects
monitoring. In addition, this chapter will also discuss the Compliance monitoring during
the construction phase. Post-project monitoring requirements are discussed in the EMP.
Before any field monitoring tasks are undertaken there are many institutional, scientific,
and fiscal issues that must be addressed in the implementation of an environmental
monitoring program. Careful consideration of these issues in the design and planning
stages will help avoid many of the pitfalls associated with environmental monitoring
programs. Although these issues are important but the discussions here are confined to the
monitoring network design component.
i
B. Network Design
Analysis of Significant Environmental Issues
At the outset of planning for an environmental monitoring network, the EIA manager may
not know exactly what should be monitored, when monitoring should begin, where it
should monitor, which techniques should be employed, and who should take
responsibility for its conduct. Because there are usually a number of objective decisions
associated with network design to be made, it is important to start with an analysis of
environmental issues. The scoping phase of an EIA is designed to identify and focus on
the major issues. Scoping should provide a valuable source of information on the
concerns that need to be addressed by the monitoring network design. These are project
specific as well as specific to the environmental setting of the location where the project
is proposed to be located
Hence, the network designs are associated with questions like:
̇ What are the expected outputs of the monitoring activity?

̇ Which problems do we need to address to? etc.
Defining the output will influence the design of the network and optimize the resources
used for monitoring. It will also ensure that the network is specially designed to optimize
the information on the problems at hand
What to Monitor?
The question of what to monitor is associated with the identification of VECs.
VECs are generally defined as environmental attributes or components of the

environment that are valued by society as identified during the scoping stage of the
project. They are determined on the basis of perceived public concerns. For example,
changes to water quality and quantity could have implications on fish by affecting habitat,
food supply, oxygen, and contaminant uptake. Similarly, employment and business, and
economies are both VECs that serve as pathways.
The choice of VECs is also related to the perceived significant impact of the project
implementation on important environmental components. In general, the significance or
importance of environmental components is judged based on:
̇ legal protection provided (for example, rare and endangered species)

̇ political or public concerns (for example, resource use conflicts and sustainable
development)
̇ scientific judgment (for example, ecological importance); or
̇ commercial or economic importance
However, in addition to their economic, social, political or ecological significance, the
chosen VEC should also have unambiguous operational ease, be accessible to prediction
and measurement; and be susceptible to hazard. Once the VECs are defined, the VECs
may be directly measured (for example, extent of habitat for an endangered species). In
cases where it is impossible or impractical to directly measure the VECs, the chosen
measurement endpoints or environmental indicators must correspond to, or be predictive
of assessment endpoints.
The chosen environmental indicators must be: 1) measurable; 2) appropriate to the scale
of disturbance/ contamination; 3) appropriate to the impact mechanism; 4) appropriate
ii
and proportional to temporal dynamics; 5) diagnostic; and 6) standardized; as well as
have: 1) a low natural variability; 2) a broad applicability; and 3) an existing data series.
Where, How and How Many Times to Monitor?
These are the other components of Monitoring Network Design. These questions are best
answered based on local field conditions, capacity and resources available, prevailing
legal and regulatory priorities, etc. For this screening or reconnaissance Surveys of the
study area also necessary. This may also include some simple inexpensive measurements
and assimilative/dispersion modeling. The data will give some information on the
prevailing special and temporal variations, and the general background air pollution in the
area. The number of monitoring stations and the indicators to be measured at each station
in the final permanent network may then be decided upon based on the results of the
screening study as well as on the knowledge of the sources of the proposed development
and prevailing local environmental/meteorological conditions. The best possible
definition of the air pollution problem, together with the analysis of the resources:
personnel, budget and equipment available, represent the basis for the decision on the
following questions:
̇ What spatial density (number) of sampling stations is required? How many samples
are needed and during what period (sampling (averaging) time and frequency)?
̇ Where should the stations be located?
̇ What kind of equipment should be used?
̇ What additional background information is needed?
− meteorology
− topography
− population density
− emission sources and emission rates
− effects and impacts
̇ How will the data be made available/communicated?
C. Site Selection
This normally means that for designing a monitoring programme in an (study) area which
might have an impact, several monitoring stations are needed for characterizing the
baseline conditions of the impacted area. When considering the location of individual
samplers, it is essential that the data collected are representative for the location and type
of area without the undue influence from the immediate surroundings. In any
measurement point in the study area the total ambient concentration is the representative
of:
̇ natural background concentration

̇ regional background
̇ impact of existing large regional sources such as Industrial emissions and other power
plants
To obtain the information about the importance of these different contributions it is
therefore necessary to locate monitoring stations so that they are representative for
different impacts. In addition to the ambient pollution data, one would often need other
data governing the variations such as meteorological data for air pollution, to identify and
quantify the sources contributing to the measurements.. When considering the location of
individual samplers, it is essential that the data collected are representative for the
location and type of area without undue influence from the immediate surroundings.
iii
ANNEXURE XI
Guidance for Assessment of Baseline Components and Attributes
GUIDANCE FOR ASSESSMENT OF BASELINE COMPONENTS AND ATTRIBUTES*
Attributes Sampling Measurement Method Remarks
Network Frequency
A. Air
̇ Meteorological Minimum 1 site in the Min: 1 hrly observations Mechanical / automatic weather IS 5182 Part 1-20 Sit-specific
̇ Wind speed station primary data is essential
project impact area from continuous records
̇ Wind direction requirements Rain gauge Secondary data from IMD,
̇ Dry bulb temperature New Delhi for the nearest
̇ Wet bulb temperature Other additional site(s) are As per IMD IMD station
̇ Relative humidity require depending upon the
̇ Rainfall model applied or site As per IMD
̇ Solar radiation sensitivities
̇ Cloud cover
Pollutants 10 to 15 locations in the 24 hrly twice a week ̇ Gravimetric (High – Volume) Monitoring Network
project impact area ̇ Gravimetric (High – Volume ̇ Minimum 2 locations in
̇ SPM 8 hrly twice a week with Cyclone) upwind side, more sites
̇ RPM ̇ EPA Modified West & Gaeke
24 hrly twice a week in downwind side /
̇ SO2 method impact zone
̇ NO2 ̇ Arsenite Modified Jacob & ̇ All the sensitive receptors
̇ CO Hochheiser need to be covered
̇ H2S* ̇ NDIR technique
Measurement Methods
̇ HC* ̇ Methylene-blue
As per CPCB standards for
(parameters to be proposed by the ̇ Nessler’s Method
NAQM, 1994
proponent, in draft ToR, which will ̇ Infra Red analyzer
be reviewed and approved by ̇ Specific lon meter
EAC/SEAC)
i
Network Frequency
B. Noise
Hourly equivalent noise levels Same as for Air Pollution At lest one day continuous Instrument : Sensitive Noise level Min: IS: 4954- 1968 as
along with others Identified in each season on a meter (preferably recording type) adopted by CPCB
in study area working and non-working
day
Hourly equivalent noise levels Inplant (1.5 m from Same as above for day and Instrument : Noise level metre CPCB / OSHA
machinery or high emission night
processes)
Hourly equivalent noise levels Highways (within 500 Same as above for day and Instrument : Noise level meter CPCB / IS : 4954-1968
metres from the road edge) night
C. Water
Parameters for water quality Set of grab samples during Diurnal and season-wise Samples for water quality should
̇ Ph, temp, turbidity, magnesium pre and post- monsoon for be collected and analyzed as per:
hardness, total alkalinity, ground and surface water IS: 2488 (Part 1-5) methods for
chloride, sulphate, nitrate, for the whole study zone. sampling and testing of industrial
fluoride, sodium, potassium For lab. Analysis the effluents
salinity samples should be
Standard methods for examination
̇ Total nitrogen, total phosphorus, preserved for transport safe
of water and waste water analysis
DO, BOD, COD, Phenol published by American Public
̇ Heavy metals Health Association.
̇ Total coliforms, faecal coliforms International standard practices
̇ Phyto plankton for benthos and aquatic flora &
̇ Zooplankton fauna
̇ Fish & other aquatic flora &
fauna
(parameters are given in ToR for
EIA studies based on nature of
project, raw material & process
technology, location-nature/activities
within of air basin)
ii
Network Frequency
For Surface Water Bodies
̇ Total Carbon Monitoring locations Yield & impact on water Samples for water quality should Historical data should be
̇ PH should include up-stream, sources to be measured be collected and analyzed as per: collected from relevant offices
̇ Dissolved Oxygen on site, down stream of during critical season IS: 2488 (Part 1-5) methods for such as central water
̇ Biological Oxygen proposed discharge point. River Stretch within sampling and testing of industrial commission, state and central
̇ Demand Besides sampling should project area be divided in effluents ground water board, Irrigation
̇ Free NH4 cover width of the river in grids (say 1 km length and dept.
Standard methods for examination
̇ Boron case water quality modeling 1/3 width) and samples of water and wastewater analysis
is proposed.
̇ Sodium Absorption ratio should be from each grid published by American Public
̇ Electrical Conductivity Standard methodology for at a time when the Health Association.
collection of surface water wastewater discharged by
(BIS standards) other sources of pollution
At least one grab sample is expected to be
per location per season maximum
Parameters for wastewater characterization

̇ Temp, colour, odour, turbidity, Implant Source depending Different operational Samples for water quality should All plant sources categorized
TSS, TDS upon the different waste cycles as well as raw be collected and analyzed as per: as:
̇ PH , alkalinity as CaCO3, p streams the parameters can material variations should IS: 2488 (Part 1-5) methods for ̇ Different Process waste
value, M value, tatal hardness as be optimized be reflected in the analysis sampling and testing of industrial streams as well as run-off
CaCO3, chloride as cl, sulphate Grab and composite effluents conditions
as S04, Nitrate as NO3, Floride sampling representing avg ̇ ETP wastewater
as F, Phosphate as P04, of different process
Chromium as Cr (Hexavalent, Standard methods for examination Domestic/ sanitary wastewater
operations as well as worst
total) Ammonical Nitrogen as of water and wastewater analysis
emission scenario should be
N, TKN, % sodium, BOD at 20 published by American Public
represented
C, COD, DO, total residual Health Association.
chlorine as Cl2, oil and grease,
sulphide, phenolic compound
D. Land Environment
̇ Soil One surface sample from Season-wise Collected and analyzed as per soil The purpose of impact
iii
Network Frequency
̇ Particle size distribution each landfill and/or analysis reference book, assessment on soil (land
̇ Texture hazardous waste site (if M.I.Jackson and soil analysis environment) is to assess the
̇ pH applicable) and prime reference book by C.A. Black significant impacts due to
̇ Electrical conductivity villages, (soil samples be leaching of wastes or
̇ Caution exchange capacity collected as per BIS accidental releases and
specifications) in the study contaminating
̇ Alkali metals
area
̇ Sodium Absorption Ratio (SAR)
̇ Permeability
̇ Porosity
Landuse / Landscape
̇ Location code At least 20 points along Drainage once in the study ̇ Global positioning system Drainage within the plant area
̇ Total project area with plant boundary and period and land use ̇ Topo-sheets and surrounding is very
̇ Topography general major land use categories from secondary ̇ Satellite Imageries important for storm water
̇ Drainage (natural) categories in the study area. data (local maps) and ̇ (1:25,000) impacts.
̇ Cultivated, forest plantations, satellite imageries ̇ Satellite Imageries From land use maps sensitive
water bodies, roads and ̇ (1:25,000) receptors (forests, parks,
settlements mangroves etc.) can be
identified
E. Solid Waste
Quantity: For green field unites it is Process wise or activity Guidelines
̇ Based on waste generated from based on secondary data wise for respective raw IS 9569 : 1980
per unit production base of earlier plants. material used. Domestic
IS 10447 : 1983
̇ Per capita contribution waste depends upon the
season also IS 12625 : 1989
̇ Collection, transport and
disposal system IS 12647 : 1989
̇ Process Waste IS 12662 (PTI) 1989
̇ Quality (oily, chemical,
biological)
Quality: Grab and Composite Process wise or activity Analysis

wise for respective raw
iv
Network Frequency
̇ General segregation into samples material used. Domestic IS 9334 : 1979
biological/organic/inert/hazardo waste depends upon the IS 9235 : 1979
us season also
IS 10158 : 1982
̇ Loss on heating
̇ pH
̇ Electrical Conductivity
̇ Calorific value, metals etc.
Hazardous Waste
̇ Permeability And porosity Grab and Composite Process wise or activity Analysis Impacts of hazardous waste
̇ Moisture pH samples. Recyclable wise for respective raw IS 9334 : 1979 should be performed critically
̇ Electrical conductivity components have to material used. depending on the waste
IS 9235 : 1979
̇ Loss on ignition analyzed for the recycling characteristics and place of
̇ Phosphorous requirements IS 10158 : 1982 discharge. For land disposal
̇ Total nitrogen the guidelines should be
̇ Caution exchange capacity followed and impacts of
̇ Particle size distribution accidental releases should be
assessed
̇ Heavy metal
̇ Ansonia
̇ Fluoride
F. Biological Environment Aquatic

̇ Primary productivity Considering probable Season changes are very Standards techniques (APHA et. Seasonal sampling for aquatic
̇ Aquatic weeds impact, sampling points and important Al. 1995, Rau and Wooten 1980) biota
̇ Enumeration of number of samples to be to be followed for sampling and One season for terrestrial
̇ phytoplankton, zooplankton and decided on established measurement biota, in addition to vegetation
benthos guidelines on ecological studies during monsoon
̇ Fisheries studies based on site eco- season
̇ Diversity indices environment setting within
Preliminary assessment
̇ Trophic levels 10/25 km radius from the
proposed site Microscopic analysis of
̇ Rare and endangered species plankton and meiobenthos,
̇ Sanctuaries / closed areas / Samples to collect from
studies of macrofauna, aquatic
v
Network Frequency
Coastal regulation zone (CRZ) upstream and downstream vegetation and application of
̇ Terrestrial of discharge point, nearby indices, viz. Shannon,
̇ Vegetation – species, list, tributaries at down stream, similarity, dominance IVI etc
economic importance, forest and also from dug wells Point quarter plot-less method
produce, medicinal value close to activity site (random sampling) for
̇ Importance value index (IVI) of terrestrial vegetation survey.
trees
̇ Wild animals
Avifauna For forest studies, chronic Secondary data to collect from
̇ Rare and endangered species as well as short-term Government offices, NGOs,
̇ Sanctuaries / National park / impacts should be analyzed published literature
Biosphere reserve warranting data on micro Plankton net
climate conditions
Sediment dredge
Depth sampler
Microscope
Field binocular
G. Socio Economic
̇ Demographic structure Socio-economic survey is Different impacts occurs Primary data collection through Secondary data from census
̇ Infrastructure resource base based on proportionate, during construction and R&R surveys (if require) or records, statistical hard books,
̇ Economic resource base stratified and random operational phases of the community survey are based on toposheets, health records and
̇ Health status: Morbidity pattern sampling method project personal interviews and relevant official records
̇ Cultural and aesthetic attributes questionnaire available with Govt. agencies
* Project Specific concerned parameters needs to be identified by the project proponent and shall be incorporated in the draft ToR, to be submitted to the Authority for the
consideration and approval by the EAC/SEAC
vi
ANNEXURE XII
Sources of Secondary Data
Annexure XIIA: Potential Sources of Data For EIA
Information Source
Air Environment
1. Meteorology- Temperature, Rainfall, Humidity, Indian Meteorology Department, Pune
Inversion, Seasonal Wind rose pattern (16 point
compass scale), cloud cover, wind speed, wind
direction, stability, mixing depth
2. Ambient Air Quality- 24 hourly concentration of Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB),
SPM, RPM, SO2, NOx, CO State Pollution Control Board (SPCB),
Municipal Corporations
Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF)
State Department of Environment (DoEN)
Water Environment
3. Surface water- water sources, water flow (lean Central Water Commission (CWC),
season), water quality, water usage, Downstream Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB),
water users State Pollution Control Board (SPCB), Central Water
Command area development plan and Power Research Institute (CWPRS), Pune
Catchment treatment plan State Irrigation Department
Hydel Power generation organizations such as
NHPC, State SEBs
4. Ground Water- groundwater recharge Central Ground Water Board (CGWB)
rate/withdrawal rate, ground water potential Central Ground Water Authority (CGWA)
groundwater levels (pre monsoon, post monsoon), State Ground Water Board (SGWB)
ground water quality, changes observed in quality National Water Development Authority (NWDA)
and quantity of ground water in last 15 years
5. Coastal waters- water quality, tide and current data, Department of Ocean Development, New Delhi
bathymetry State Maritime Boards
Naval Hydrographer’s Office, Dehradun
Port Authorities
National Institute of Oceanography (NIO), Goa
Biological Environment
6. Description of Biological Environment- inventory District Gazetteers
of flora and fauna in 7 km radius, endemic species, National Remote Sensing Agency (NRSA),
endangered species, Aquatic Fauna, Forest land, Hyderabad
forest type and density of vegetation, biosphere, Forest Survey of India, Dehradun
national parks, wild life sanctuaries, tiger reserve, Wildlife Institute of India
elephant reserve, turtle nesting ground, core zone World Wildlife Fund
of biosphere reserve, habitat of migratory birds, Zoological Survey of India
routes of migratory birds Botanical Survey of India
Bombay Natural History Society, (BNHS), Mumbai
State Forest Departments
State Fisheries Department
Ministry of Environment and Forests
State Agriculture Departments
State Agriculture Universities
Land Environment
7. Geographical Information-Latitude, Longitude, Toposheets of Survey of India, Pune
Elevation ( above MSL) National Remote Sensing Agency (NRSA),
Hyderabad
Space Application Centre (SAC), Ahmedabad
REPORT ON SECONDARY DATA COLLECTION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION CENTRE 1

Information Source
8. Nature of Terrain, topography map indicating Survey of India Toposheets
contours (1:2500 scale) National Remote Sensing Agency (NRSA),
Hyderabad
State Remote Sensing Centre,
Space Application Centre (SAC), Ahmedabad
9. Hydrogeology- Hydrogeological report (in case of NRSA, Hyderbad
ground water is used/area is drought Survey of India Toposheets
prone/wastewater is likely to discharged on land) Geological Survey of India
Geomorphological analysis (topography and State Geology Departments
drainage pattern) State Irrigation Department
Geological analysis (Geological Department of Wasteland Development, Ministry of
Formations/Disturbances- geological and structural Rural Areas
maps, geomorphological contour maps, structural National Water Development Authority (NWDA)
features, including lineaments, fractures, faults and
joints)
Hydrogeological analysis (disposition of permeable
formations, surface-ground water links, hydraulic
parameter determination etc)
Analysis of the natural soil and water to assess
pollutant absorption capacity
10. Nature of Soil, permeability, erodibility Agriculture Universities
classification of the land State Agriculture Department
Indian Council for Agriculture Research
State Soil Conservation Departments
National Bureau of Soil Survey and Landuse Planning
Central Arid Zone Research Institute (CAZRI),
Jodhpur
11. Landuse in the project area and 10 km radius of the Survey of India- Toposheets
periphery of the project All India Soil and Landuse Survey; Delhi
National Remote Sensing Agency (NRSA),
Hyderabad
Town and County Planning Organisation
State Urban Planning Department
Regional Planning Authorities (existing and proposed
plans)
Village Revenue Map- District Collectorate
Directorate of Economics and Statistics-State
Government
Space Application Centre, Ahmedabad
12. Coastal Regulation Zones- CRZMP, CRZ Urban Development Department

classification, Demarcation of HTL and LTL State Department of Environment
State Pollution Control Board
Space Application Centre*
Centre for Earth Sciences Studies,
Thiruvanthapuram*
Institute of Remote Sensing, Anna University
Chennai*
Naval Hydrographer’s Office, Dehradun*
National Institute of Oceanography, Goa*
National Institute of Ocean Technology, Chennai
Centre for Earth Science Studies
Agencies authorized for approval of demarcation of HTL and LTL

Information Source
Social
13. Socioeconomic - population, number of houses Census Department
and present occupation pattern within 7 km from District Gazetteers- State Government
the periphery of the project District Statistics- District Collectorate
International Institute of Population Sciences,
Mumbai (limited data)
Central Statistical Organisation
14. Monuments and heritage sites District Gazetteer
Archeological Survey of India,
INTACH
District Collectorate
Central and State Tourism Department
State Tribal and Social Welfare Department
Natural Disasters
15. Seismic data (Mining Projects)- zone no, no of Indian Meteorology Department, Pune
earthquakes and scale, impacts on life, property Geological Survey of India
existing mines
16. Landslide prone zone, geomorphological Space Application Centre
conditions, degree of susceptibility to mass
movement, major landslide history (frequency of
occurrence/decade), area affected, population
affected
17. Flood/cyclone/droughts- frequency of occurrence Natural Disaster Management Division in

per decade, area affected, population affected Department of Agriculture and Cooperation
Indian Meteorological Department
Industrial
18. Industrial Estates/Clusters, Growth Centres State Industrial Corporation
Industrial Associations
State Pollution Control Boards
Confederation Indian Industries (CII)
FICCI
19. Physical and Chemical properties of raw material Material and Safety Data Sheets
and chemicals (Industrial projects); fuel quality ENVIS database of Industrial Toxicological Research
Centre, Lucknow
Indian Institute Petroleum
20. Occupational Health and Industrial Hygiene- Central Labour Institute, Mumbai
major occupational health and safety hazards, Directorate of Industrial Safety
health and safety requirements, accident histories ENVIS Database of Industrial Toxicological Research
Centre, Lucknow
National Institute of Occupational Health,
Ahmedabad
21. Pollutant release inventories (Existing pollution Project proponents which have received EC and have
sources in area within 10 km radius) commenced operations
22. Water requirement (process, cooling water, DM EIA Reports

water, Dust suppression, drinking, green belt, fire National and International Benchmarks
service)

Annexure XIIB: Summary of Available Data with Potential Data Sources for EIA
Agency Information Available

1. Archaeological Survey of India Inventory of monuments and sites of national importance- Listing and
Department of Culture documentation of monuments according to world heritage, pre
Government of India historic, proto historic and secular, religious places and forts
Janpath, New Delhi - 110011
[email protected]
2. Botanical Survey Of India Photodiversity documentation of flora at National, State and District
P-8, Brabourne Road Calcutta level and flora of protected areas, hotspots, fragile ecosystems, sacred
700001 groves etc
Tel#033 2424922 Identification of threatened species including endemics, their
Fax#033 2429330 mapping, population studies
Email: [email protected]. . Database related to medicinal plants, rare and threatened plant species
Red data book of Indian plants (Vol 1,2, and 3)
RO - Coimbatore, Pune, Jodhpur, Manual for roadside and avenue plantation in India
Dehradun, Allahabad, Gantok,
Itanagar, Port Blair
3. Bureau of Indian Standards Bureau of Indian Standards Committees on Earthquake Engineering
Manak Bhawan, 9 Bahadur Shah and Wind Engineering have a Seismic Zoning Map and the Wind
Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110 002 Velocity Map including cyclonic winds for the country
Tel#3230131, 3233375, 3239402 (10
lines)
Fax : 91 11 3234062, 3239399,
3239382
Email- [email protected]
4. Central Water Commission (CWC) Central Data Bank -Collection, collation and Publishing of
Sewa Bhawan, R.K.Puram Hydrological, Hydrometeorological, Sediment and Water Quality
New Delhi - 110066 data-.
[email protected] Basin wise Master Plans
Flood atlas for India
RO- Bangalore, Bhopal, Flood Management and Development and Operation of Flood
Bhubaneshwar, Chandigarh, Forecasting System- CWC operate a network of forecasting stations
Coimbatore/Chennai, Delhi, Over 6000 forecasts are issued every year with about 95% of the
Hyderabad, Lucknow, Nagpur, forecasts within the permissible limit.
Patna, Shillong, Siliguri and Water Year Books, Sediment Year Books and Water Quality Year
Vadodara Books.
Also actively involved in monitoring of 84 identified projects through
National, State and Project level Environmental Committees for
ensuring implementation of environmental safeguards
5. Central Ground Water Board surveys, exploration, monitoring of ground water development
(HO) N.H.IV, New CGO
Complex,
Faridabad - 121001
RO - Guwahati, Chandigarh,
Ahemadabad, Trivandrum,
Calcutta, Bhopal, Lucknow,
Banglore, Nagpur, Jammu,
Bhubneshwar, Raipur, Jaipur,
Chennai, Hyderabad, Patna
16
Based on web search and literature review

6. Central Pollution Control Board National Air Quality Monitoring Programme
Parivesh Bhawan, CBD-cum-Office National River Water Quality Monitoring Programme- Global
Complex Environment Monitoring , MINARS
East Arjun Nagar, DELHI - 110 032 Zoning Atlas Programme
INDIA Information on 17 polluting category industries (inventory, category
E-mail : [email protected] wise distribution, compliance, implementation of pollution control
programmes
7. Central Arid Zone Research AGRIS database on all aspects of agriculture from 1975 to date
Institute, Jodhpur Also have cell on Agriculture Research Information System;
Working on ENVIS project on desertification
Email : [email protected] Repository of information on the state of natural resources and
desertification processes and their control
Regional Centre at Bhuj in Gujarat The spectrum of activities involves researches on basic resource
inventories; monitoring of desertification, rehabilitation and
management of degraded lands and other areas
8. Central Inland Capture Fisheries Data Base on

Research Institute, Barrackpore- Ecology and fisheries of major river systems of India.
743101, Biological features of commercially important riverine and estuarine
Tel#033-5600177 fish species.
Fax#033-5600388 Production functions and their interactions in floodplain wetlands.
Email : [email protected] Activities - Environmental Impact Assessment for Resource
Management ; Fisheries Resource surveys
9. Central Institute of Brackish Water Repository of information on brackish water fishery resources with
Aquaculture systematic database of coastal fishery resources for ARIS
141, Marshalls Road, Egmore , Agricultural Research Information System (ARIS) database covers
Chennai - 600 008, State wise data on soil and water quality parameters, land use pattern,
Tel# 044-8554866, 8554891, production and productivity trends,
Director (Per) 8554851 Social, economic and environmental impacts of aquaculture farming,
Fax#8554851, Guidelines and effluent standards for aquaculture farming
10. Central Marine Fisheries Research Assessing and monitoring of exploited and un-exploited fish stocks in
Institute (CMFRI), Cochin Indian EEZ
Monitoring the health of the coastal ecosystems, particularly the
endangered ecosystems in relation to artisanal fishing, mechanised
fishing and marine pollution
The institute has been collecting data on the catch and effort and
biological characteristics for nearly half a century based on
scientifically developed sampling scheme, covering all the maritime
States of the country
The voluminous data available with the institute is managed by the
National Marine Living Resources Data Centre (NMLRDC)
11. Central Water and Power Research Numerical and Physical models for hydro-dynamic simulations
Station, Pune
Tel#020-4391801-14; 4392511;
4392825
Fax #020-4392004,4390189
12. Central Institute of Road Transport, Repository of data on all aspects of performance of STUs and a host
Bhosari, Pune of other related road transport parameters
411 026, India.
Tel : +91 (20) 7125177, 7125292,
7125493, 7125494

13. Department of Ocean Development Assessment of environment parameters and marine living resources
(primary and secondary) in Indian EEZ (Nodal Agency NIO Kochi)
Stock assessment, biology and resource mapping of deep sea shrimps,
lobsters and fishes in Indian EEZ (Nodal agency-Fisheries Survey of
India)
Investigations of toxical algal blooms and benthic productivity in
Indian EEZ (Nodal agency- Cochin University of Science and
technology)
Coastal Ocean Monitoring and Prediction System (COMAP) -
monitoring and modelling of marine pollution along entire Indian
coast and islands. Parameters monitored are temp, salinity, DO, pH,
SS, BOD, inorganic phosphate, nitrate, nitrite, ammonia, total
phosphorus, total nitrite, total organic carbon, petroleum
hydrocarbons, pathogenic vibros, pathogenic E.coli, shigella,
salmonella, heavy metals (Cd, Hg, Pb) and pesticide residues (DDT,
BHC, Endosulfan). Monitoring is carried out along the ecologically
sensitive zones and urban areas (NIO Mumbai- Apex coordinating
agency).
Sea Level Measurement Programe (SELMAM)- sea level measurement
at selected stations (Porbandar, Bombay, Goa, Cochin, Tuticorin,
Madras, Machilipatnam, Visakhapatnam, Paradeep, Calcutta and
Kavaratti (Lakshadweep Island)) along Indian coast and islands using
modern tide gauges
Detailed coastal maps through Survey of India showing contour at 1/2
a metre interval in the scale of 1:25000. (Nellore- Machhalipatnam work
already over)
Marine Data Centre (MDC) IMD for Ocean surface meteorology,
GSI for marine geology, SOI for tide levels, Naval Hydrographic
Office for bathymetry, NIO Goa for physical chemical and biological
oceanography, NIO Mumbai for marine pollution, CMFRI for
coastal fisheries, Institute of Ocean Management Madras for coastal
geomorphology
DOD has setup Indian National Centre for Ocean Information
Services (INCOIS) at Hyderabad for generation and dissemination of
ocean data products (near real time data products such as sea surface
temperature, potential fishing zones, upwelling zones, maps, eddies,
chlorophyll, suspended sediment load etc). MDC will be integrated
with INCOIS
Integrated Coastal and Marine Area Management (ICMAM)
programme - GIS based information system for management of 11
critical habitats namely Pichavaram, Karwar, Gulf of Mannar, Gulf of
Khambat, Gulf of Kutch, Malvan, Cochin, Coringa mangroves,
Gahirmata, Sunderbans and Kadamat (Lakshadeep)
Wetland maps for Tamil Nadu and Kerala showing the locations of
lagoons, backwaters, estuaries, mudflats etc (1:50000 scale)
Coral Reef Maps for Gulf of Kachch, Gulf of Mannar, Andaman and
Nicobar and Lakshadeep Islands (1:50,000 scale) indicating the
condition of corals, density etc
14. Environment Protection Training Environment Information Centre- has appointed EPTRI as the
and Research Institute Distributed Information Centre for the Eastern Ghats region of India.
Gachibowli, Hyderabad - 500 019, EIC Collaborates with the Stockholm Environment Institute Sweden
India Phone: +91-40-3001241, Database on Economics of Industrial Pollution Prevention in India
3001242, 3000489 Database of Large and Medium Scale Industries of Andhra Pradesh
Fax: +91-40- 3000361 Environmental Status of the Hyderabad Urban Agglomeration
E-mail: [email protected] Study on ‘water pollution-health linkages’ for a few Districts of A.P

Environment Quality Mapping
Macro level studies for six districts in the State of Andhra Pradesh
Micro level studies for two study zones presenting the permissible
pollutant load and scoping for new industrial categories
Zonation of the IDA, Parwada which helped APIIC to promote the
land for industrial development
Disaster management plan for Visakhapatnam Industrial Bowl Area
15. Forest Survey of India (FSI) State of Forest Report (Biannual)

Kaulagarh Road, P.O., IPE National Forest Vegetation Map (Biannual exercise) (on 1: 1 million
Dehradun - 248 195 scale)
Tel# 0135-756139, 755037, 754507 Thematic mapping on 1:50,000 scale depicting the forest type, species
Fax # 91-135-759104 composition, crown density of forest cover and other landuse National
E-Mail : [email protected] Basic Forest Inventory System
[email protected] Inventory survey of non forest area
Forest inventory report providing details of area estimates,
RO- Banglore, Calcutta, Nagpur topographic description, health of forest, ownership pattern,
and Shimla estimation of volume and other growth parameters such as height and
diameter in different types of forest, estimation of growth,
regeneration and mortality of important species, volume equation and
wood consumption of the area studied
16. Geological Survey of India Environmental hazards zonation mapping in mineral sector
27 Jawaharlal Nehru Road, Calcutta Codification of base line information of geo-environmental
700 016, India Telephone +91-33- appreciation of any terrain and related EIA and EMP studies
2496941 FAX 91-33-2496956 Lineament and geomorphological map of India on 1:20,000 scale.
[email protected] Photo-interpreted geological and structural maps of terrains with
limited field checks.
17. Indian Council of Agriculture A total of 80,000 profiles at 10 kms grid across the country were
Research, analyzed to characterize the soils of India.
Krishi Bhawan, New Delhi, Detailed soil maps of the Country (1:7 million), State (1:250,000) and
Tel#011-338206 districts map (1:50,000) depicting extent of degradation (1:4.4 millions)
have been prepared.
Thematic maps depicting soil depth, texture drainage, calcareousness,
− ICAR complex, Goa- Agro salinity, pH, slope and erosion have been published
metrology Agro-climate characterization of the country based on moisture,
− Central Arid Zone Research thermal and sunshine regimes
Institute- Agro forestry Agro-ecological zones (20) and sub-zones (60) for the country were
− Central Soil salinity Research delineated based on physiography, soils, climate, Length of Growing
Institute, Period and Available Water Content, and mapped on 1:4.4 million
− Indian Institute of Soil Science scale.
− Central Soil and Water Digitization of physiography and soil resource base on 1:50,000 scale
Conservation Research and for 14 States have been completed.
Training Institute .Soil fertility maps of N,P,K,S and Zn have also been developed
− National Bureau of Soil Survey Water quality guidelines for irrigation and naturally occurring
and Landuse Planning saline/sodic water
Calibration and verification of ground water models for predicting
water logging and salinity hazards in irrigation commands
18. Indian Bureau of Mines National mineral inventory for 61 minerals and mineral maps
Indira Bhawan, Civil Lines Nagpur Studies on environmental protection and pollution control in regard
Ph no - 0712-533 631, to the mining and mineral beneficiation operations
Fax- 0712-533 041 Collection, processing and storage of data on mines, minerals and
mineral-based industries, collection and maintenance of world mineral
intelligence, foreign mineral legislation and other related matters

19. Indian Meteorology Department Meteorological data
Shivaji nagar, Pune 41100 Background air quality monitoring network under Global
Atmospheric Watch Programme (operates 10 stations)
RO- Mumbai, Chennai, Calcutta, Seismicity map, seismic zoning map; seismic occurrences and cyclone
New Delhi, Nagpur, Guwahati hazard monitoring; list of major earthquakes
Climatological Atlas of India , Rainfall Atlas of India and
Agroclimatic Atlas of India
Monthly bulletin of Climate Diagnostic Bulletin of India
Environmental Meteorological Unit of IMD at Delhi to provide
specific services to MoEF
20. INTACH Listing and documentation of heritage sites identified by
Natural Heritage, 71 Lodi Estate, New municipalities and local bodies (Listing excludes sites and buildings
Delhi-110 003 under the purview of the Archaeological Survey of India and the State
Departments of Archaeology)
Tel. 91-11-4645482, 4632267/9,
4631818, 4692774, 4641304 Fax : 91-
11-4611290
E-mail : [email protected]
21. Industrial Toxicology Research Activities include health survey on occupational diseases in industrial
Centre workers, air and water quality monitoring studies, ecotoxicological
Post Box No. 80, Mahatma Gandhi impact assessment, toxicity of chemicals, human health risk
Marg, Lucknow-226001, assessment
Phone: +91-522- Five databases on CD-ROM in the area of environmental toxicology
221856,213618,228227; Fax : +91- viz: TOXLINE, CHEMBANK, POISINDEX, POLTOX and
522 228227 PESTBANK. The Toxicology Information Centre provides
Email: [email protected] information on toxic chemicals including household chemicals
ENVIS centre and created a full-fledged computerized database
(DABTOC) on toxicity profiles of about 450 chemicals
22. Indian Institute of Forest Consultancy and research on joint forest management (Ford
Management Foundation, SIDA, GTZ, FAO etc)
Post Box No. 357, Nehru Nagar
Bhopal - 462 003
Phone # 0755-575716, 573799,
765125, 767851
Fax # 0755-572878
23. Indian Institute of Petroleum Fuel quality characterisation

Mohkampur , Dehradun, India, Emission factors
248005
0135- 660113 to 116
0135- 671986
24. Ministry of Environment and Survey of natural resources

Forest National river conservation directorate
Environmental research programme for eastern and western ghats
National natural resource management system
Wetlands conservation programme- survey, demarcation, mapping
landscape planning, hydrology for 20 identified wetlands National
wasteland identification programme
25. Mumbai Metropolitan Regional Mumbai Urban Transport Project

Development Authority Mumbai Urban Development Project
Mumbai Urban Rehabilitation Project
Information on MMR; statistics on councils and corporations Regional
Information Centre- Basic data on population, employment, industries
and other sectors are regularly collected and processed

26. Municipal Corporation of Greater Air Quality Data for Mumbai Municipal Area
Mumbai Water quality of lakes used for water supply to Mumbai
27. Ministry of Urban Development Identification of hazard prone area
Disaster Mitigation and Vulnerability Atlas showing areas vulnerable to natural disasters
Vulnerability Atlas of India Land-use zoning and design guidelines for improving hazard resistant
construction of buildings and housing
Building Materials & Technology State wise hazard maps (on cyclone, floods and earthquakes)
Promotion Council
G-Wing,Nirman Bhavan, New
Delhi-110011
Tel: 91-11-3019367
Fax: 91-11-3010145
E-Mail: [email protected]
28. Natural Disaster Management Weekly situation reports on recent disasters, reports on droughts,
Division in Department of floods, cyclones and earthquakes
Agriculture and Cooperation
29. National Bureau Of Soil Survey & NBSS&LUP Library has been identified as sub centre of ARIC
Land Use Planning (ICAR) for input to AGRIS covering soil science literature generated
P.O. Box No. 426, Shankar Nagar in India
P.O., Nagpur-440010 Research in weathering and soil formation, soil morphology, soil
mineralogy, physicochemical characterisation, pedogenesis, and landscape-
Tel#91-712-534664,532438,534545 climate-soil relationship.
Fax#:91-712-522534 Soil Series of India- The soils are classified as per Soil Taxonomy. The
described soil series now belong to 17 States of the country.
RO- Nagpur, New Delhi, Banglore, Landuse planning- watershed management, land evaluation criteria, crop
Calcutta, Jorhat, Udaipur efficiency zoning
Soil Information system is developed state-wise at 1:250,000 scale.
Presently the soil maps of all the States are digitized, processed and
designed for final output both digital and hardcopy. The thematic layers
and interpreted layers of land evaluation (land capability, land
irrigability and crop suitability), Agro-Ecological Zones and soil
degradation themes are prepared.
Districts level information system is developed for about 15 districts at 1:
50, 000 scale. The soil information will be at soil series level in this system.
Soil resource inventory of States, districts water-sheds (1:250,000;
1:50,000; 1:10,000/8000)
30. National Institute of Ocean Waste load allocation in selected estuaries (Tapi estuary and Ennore
Technology, creek) is one the components under the Integrated Coastal and Marine
Velacherry-Tambaram main road Area Management (ICMAM) programme of the Department of
Narayanapuram Ocean Development ICMAM is conducted with an IDA based credit
Chennai, Tamil Nadu to the Government of India under the Environmental Capacity
Tel#91-44-2460063 / 2460064/ Building project of MoEF (waste assimilation capacity of Ennore
2460066/ 2460067 creek is over)
Fax#91-44-2460645 Physical oceanographic component of Coastal & Ocean monitoring
Predictive System (COMAPS) a long term monitoring program under
the Department of Ocean Development
Identification of suitable locations for disposal of dredge spoil using
mathematical models & environmental criteria
EIA Manual and EIA guidelines for port and harbour projects
31. National Institute of Oceanography, Coastal Ocean Monitoring and Predictions(COMAP)-Monitoring of
Goa coastal waters for physicochemical and biological parameters
including petroleum hydrocarbons, trace metals, heavy metals, and
RO- Mumbai, Kochi biomass of primary (phytoplankton) and secondary (zooplankton,
microbial and benthic organisms)
Marine Biodiversity of selected ecosystem along the West Coast of
India

32. National Botanical Research Dust filtering potential of common avenue trees and roadside shrubs
Institute, has been determined, besides studies have also been conducted on
Post Box No 436 Rana Pratap Marg heavy-metals accumulation potential of aquatic plants supposedly
Lucknow- 226001, useful as indicators of heavy metal pollution in water bodies and
Tel: (+91) 522 271031-35 Fax: (+91) capable of reducing the toxic metals from water bodies.
522 282849, 282881 Assessment of bio-diversity of various regions of India
Lucknow
33. National Geophysical Research Exploration, assessment and management of ground water resources
Institute, Uppal Road, Hyderabad including ground water modelling and pollution studies
Telephone:0091-40-7171124,
FAX:0091-40-7171564
34. National Environmental National Air Quality Monitoring (NAQM) for CPCB
Engineering Research Institute, Database on cleaner technologies of industrial productions
Nagpur
RO- Mumbai, Delhi, Chennai,
Calcutta, Ahmedabad, Cochin,
Hyderabad, Kanpur
35. National Hydrology Institute, Basin studies, hydrometeorological network improvement,
Roorkee hydrological year book, hydrological modelling, regional flood
RO- Belgaum (Hard Rock Regional formulae, reservoir sedimentation studies, environmental hydrology,
Centre), Jammu (Western watershed development studies, tank studies, and drought studies.
Himalayan Regional Centre),
Guwahati (North Eastern Regional
Centre), Kakinada (Deltaic Regional
Centre), Patna (Ganga Plains North
Regional Centre), and Sagar (Ganga
Plains South)
36. National Institute Of Urban Affairs, Urban Statistics Handbook
India Habitat Centre, New Delhi
37. National Institute of Occupational epidemiological studies and surveillance of hazardous occupations
Health including air pollution, noise pollution, agricultural hazards, industrial
Meghaninagar, Ahmedabad hazards in organised sectors as well as small scale industries,
carcinogenesis, pesticide toxicology, etc
RO- Banglore, Calcutta WHO collaborative centre for occupational health for South East Asia
region and the lead institute for the international programme on
chemical safety under IPCS (WHO)
38. NRSA Data Centre Satellite data products (raw data, partially processed (radiometrically
Department of Space, Balanagar, corrected but geometrically uncorrected), standard data
(radiometrically and geometrically corrected), geocoded data(1:50,000
Hyderabad 500 037
and 1:25000 scale), special data products like mosaiced, merged and
Ph- 040-3078560 extracted) available on photographic (B?W and FCC in form of film of
3078664 240 mm X 240mm or enlargements/paper prints in scale varying
[email protected] between 1:1M and 1:12500 and size varying between 240mm and
1000mm) and digital media (CD-ROMs, 8 mm tapes)
39. Rajiv Gandhi National Drinking Database for groundwater using remote sensing technology (Regional
Water Mission Remote Sensing Service Centre involved in generation of ground
water prospect maps at 1:50,000 scale for the State of Kerala,
Karnataka, AP, MP and Rajasthan for RGNDWM)
40. Space Application Centre National Natural Resource Information System
Value Added Services Cell (VASC) Landuse mapping for coastal regulation zone (construction setback
Remote Sensing Application Area line) upto 1:12500 scale
Ahmedabad 380 053 Inventory of coastal wetlands, coral reefs, mangroves, seaweeds
079-676 1188 Monitoring and condition assessment of protected coastal areas

Fax- 079-6762735 Wetland mapping and inventory
Mapping of potential hotspots and zoning of environmental hazards
General geological and geomorphological mapping in diverse terrain
Landslide risk zonation for Tehre area
41. State Pollution Control Board State Air Quality Monitoring Programme
Inventory of polluting industries
Identification and authorization of hazardous waste generating
industries
Inventory of biomedical waste generating industries
Water quality monitoring of water bodies receiving wastewater
discharges
Inventory of air polluting industries
Industrial air pollution monitoring
Air consent, water consent, authorization, environment monitoring
reports
42. State Ground Water Board
43. Survey of India Topographical surveys on 1:250,000 scales, 1:50,000 and 1:25,000
scales
Digital Cartographical Data Base of topographical maps on scales
1:250,000 and 1:50,000
Data generation and its processing for redefinition of Indian Geodetic
Datum
Maintenance of National Tidal Data Centre and receiving/ processing
of tidal data of various ports.
Coastal mapping along the Eastern coast line has been in progress to
study the effect of submergence due to rise in sea-level and other
natural phenomenon. Ground surveys have been completed for the
proposed coastal region and maps are under printing.
District planning maps containing thematic information (135 maps)
have been printed out of 249 maps covering half the districts of India.
Districts planning maps for remaining half of the area are being
processed by National Atlas and Thematic Mapping Organisation
(NATMO)
44. Town and Country Planning Urban mapping - Thematic maps and graphic database on towns
Organisation (under progress in association with NRSA and State town planning
department)
45. Wildlife Institute of India Post Bag Provide information and advice on specific wildlife management
No. 18, Chandrabani Dehradun - problems.
248 001, Uttaranchal National Wildlife Database
Tel#0135 640111 -15,
Fax#0135 640117
email : wii@wii .
46. Zoological Survey of India Red Book for listing of endemic species
Prani Vigyan Bhawan Survey of faunal resources
'M' Block, New Alipore
Calcutta - 700 053
Phone # 91-33-4786893, 4783383
Fax # 91-33-786893
RO - Shillong, Pune, Dehradun,
Jabalpur, Jodhpur, Chennai, Patna,
Hyderabad, Canning, Behrampur,
Kozikode, Itanagar, Digha, Port
Bliar, Solan

ANNEXURE XIII
Impact Prediction Tools
Table 1: Choice of Models for Impact Prediction: Air Environment*
Model Application Remarks
ISCST 3 ̇ Appropriate for point, area and line sources ̇ Can take up to 99 sources
̇ Application for flat or rolling terrain ̇ Computes concentration on 600
̇ Transport distance up to 50 km valid receptors in Cartesian on polar
̇ Computes for 1 hr to annual averaging coordinate system
periods ̇ Can take receptor elevation
̇ Requires source data,
meteorological and receptor data
as input.
AERMOD with ̇ Settling and dry deposition of particles; ̇ Can take up to 99 sources
AERMET ̇ Building wake effects (excluding cavity ̇ Computes concentration on 600
region impacts); receptors in Cartesian on polar
̇ Point, area, line, and volume sources; coordinate system
̇ Plume rise as a function of downwind ̇ Can take receptor elevation
distance; ̇ Requires source data,
̇ Multiple point, area, line, or volume meteorological and receptor data
sources; as input.
̇ Limited terrain adjustment;
̇ Long-term and short-term averaging modes;
̇ Rural or urban modes;
̇ Variable receptor grid density;
̇ Actual hourly meteorology data
PTMAX ̇ Screening model applicable for a single ̇ Require source characteristics
point source ̇ No met data required
̇ Computes maximum concentration and ̇ Used mainly for ambient air
distance of maximum concentration monitoring network design
occurrence as a function of wind speed and
stability class
PTDIS ̇ Screening model applicable for a single ̇ Require source characteristics
point source ̇ Average met data (wind speed,
̇ Computes maximum pollutant concentration temperature, stability class etc.)
and its occurrences for the prevailing required
meteorological conditions ̇ Used mainly to see likely impact
of a single source
MPTER ̇ Appropriate for point, area and line sources ̇ Can take 250 sources
applicable for flat or rolling terrain ̇ Computes concentration at 180
̇ Transport distance up to 50 km valid receptors up to 10 km
̇ Computes for 1 hr to annual averaging ̇ Requires source data,
periods meteorological data and receptor
̇ Terrain adjustment is possible coordinates
CTDM PLUS ̇ Point source steady state model, can ̇ Can take maximum 40 Stacks and
(Complex estimate hrly average concentration in computes concentration at
Terrain isolated hills/ array of hills maximum 400 receptors
Dispersion ̇ Does not simulate calm met
Model) conditions
̇ Hill slopes are assumed not to
exceed 15 degrees
̇ Requires sources, met and terrain
characteristics and receptor details
i
UAM (Urban ̇ 3-D grid type numerical simulation model ̇

Airshed Model) ̇ Computes O3 concentration short term
episodic conditions lasting for 1 or 2 days
resulting from NOx and VOCs
̇ Appropriate for single urban area having
significant O3 problems
RAM (Rural ̇ Steady state Gaussian plume model for ̇ Suitable for flat terrains
Airshed Model) computing concentration of relatively stable ̇ Transport distance less than 50
pollutants for 1 hr to 1 day averaging time km.
̇ Application for point and area sources in
rural and urban setting
CRESTER ̇ Applicable for single point source either in ̇ Can take up to 19 Stacks
rural or urban setting simultaneously at a common site.
̇ Computes highest and second highest ̇ Unsuitable for cool and high
concentration for 1hr, 3hr, 24hr and annual velocity emissions
averaging times ̇ Do not account for tall buildings or
̇ Tabulates 50 highest concentration for topographic features
entire year for each averaging times ̇ Computes concentration at 180
receptor, circular wing at five
downwind ring distance 36 radials
̇ Require sources, and met data
OCD (Offshore ̇ It determines the impact of offshore ̇ Requires source emission data
and coastal emissions from point sources on the air ̇ Require hrly met data at offshore
Dispersion quality of coastal regions and onshore locations like water
Model) ̇ It incorporates overwater plume transport surface temperature; overwater air
and dispersion as well as changes that occur temperature; relative humidity etc.
as the plume crosses the shore line
̇ Most suitable for overwater sources shore
onshore receptors are below the lowest
shore height
FDM (Fugitive ̇ Suitable for emissions from fugitive dust ̇ Require dust source particle sizes
Dust Model) sources ̇ Source coordinates for area
̇ Source may be point, area or line (up to 121 sources, source height and
source) geographic details
̇ Require particle size classification max. up ̇ Can compute concentration at
to 20 sizes max. 1200 receptors
̇ Computes concentrations for 1 hr, 3hr, 8hr, ̇ Require met data (wind direction,
24hr or annual average periods speed, Temperature, mixing height
and stability class)
̇ Model do not include buoyant
point sources, hence no plume rise
algorithm
RTDM (Rough ̇ Estimates GLC is complex/rough (or flat) ̇ Can take up to 35 co-located point
Terrain terrain in the vicinity of one or more co- sources
Diffusion located point sources ̇ Require source data and hourly
Model) ̇ Transport distance max. up to 15 km to up met data
to 50 km ̇ Computes concentration at
̇ Computes for 1 to 24 hr. or annual ave5rage maximum 400 receptors
concentrations ̇ Suitable only for non reactive
gases
̇ Do not include gravitational
ii
effects or depletion mechanism
such as rain/ wash out, dry
deposition
CDM(Climatolo ̇ It is a climatologically steady state GPM for ̇ Suitable for point and area sources
gically determining long term (seasonal or annual) in urban region, flat terrain
̇ Arithmetic average pollutant concentration ̇ Valid for transport distance less
Dispersion at any ground level receptor in an urban area than 50 km
Model) ̇ Long term averages: One month to
one year or longer
PLUVUE-II ̇ Applicable to assess visibility impairment ̇ Require source characteristics, met
(Plume due to pollutants emitted from well defined data and receptor coordinates &
Visibility point sources elevation
Model) ̇ It is used to calculate visual range reduction ̇ Require atmospheric aerosols
and atmospheric discoloration caused by (back ground & emitted)
plumes characteristics, like density,
̇ It predicts transport, atmospheric diffusion, particle size
chemical, conversion, optical effects, and ̇ Require background pollutant
surface deposition of point source concentration of SO4, NO3, NOx,
emissions. NO2, O3, SO2 and deposition
velocities of SO2, NO2 and
aerosols
MESO-PUFF II ̇ It is a Gaussian, Variable trajectory, puff ̇ Can model five pollutants
(Meso scale superposition model designed to account fro simultaneously (SO2, SO4, NOx,
Puff Model) spatial and temporal variations in transport, HNO3 and NO3)
diffusion, chemical transformation and ̇ Require source characteristics
removal mechanism encountered on ̇ Can take 20 point sources or 5 area
regional scale. source
̇ Plume is modeled as a series of discrete ̇ For area source – location,
puffs and each puff is transported effective height, initial puff size,
independently emission is required
̇ Appropriate for point and area sources in ̇ Computes pollutant concentration
urban areas at max. 180 discrete receptors and
̇ Regional scale model. 1600 (40 x 40) grided receptors
̇ Require hourly surface data
including cloud cover and twice a
day upper air data (pressure, temp,
height, wind speed, direction)
̇ Do not include gravitational
effects or depletion mechanism
such as rain/ wash out, dry
deposition
Table 2: Choice of Models for Impact Modeling: Noise Environment*
Model Application
FHWA (Federal Highway Noise Impact due to vehicular movement on highways

Administration)
iii
Dhwani For predictions of impact due to group of noise sources in the
industrial complex (multiple sound sources)
Hemispherical sound wave propagation Fore predictive impact due to single noise source
Air Port For predictive impact of traffic on airport and rail road
Table 3: Choice of Models for Impact Modeling: Land Environment*
Digital Analysis Techniques Provides land use / land cover

distribution
Ranking analysis for soil Provides suitability criteria Various parameters viz. depth, texture,
suitability criteria for developmental slope, erosion status, geomorphology,
conversation activities flooding hazards, GW potential, land
use etc., are used.
Table 4: Choice of Models for Impact Modeling: Water Environment*

QUAL-II E Wind effect is insignificant, vertical dispersive effects Steady state or dynamic
insignificant applicable to streams model
Data required
Deoxygenation coefficients, re-aeration coefficients for
carbonaceous, nitrogenous and benthic substances,
dissolved oxygen deficit
The model is found excellent to generate water quality
parameters
Photosynthetic and respiration rate of suspended and
attached algae
Parameters measured up to 15 component can be
simulated in any combination, e.g. ammonia, nitrite,
nitrate, phosphorous, carbonaceous BOD, benthic
oxygen demand, DO, coliforms, conservative
substances and temperature
DOSAG-3, USEPA: Water quality simulation model for streams & canal Steady-state
(1-D) RECEIV – II, A general Water quality model
USEPA
Explore –I, USEPA A river basin water quality model Dynamic, Simple
hydrodynamics
HSPE, USEPA Hydrologic simulation model Dynamic, Simple
hydrodynamics
RECEIVE-II, A general dynamic planning model for water quality
USEPA management
Stanford watershed This model simulates stream flows once historic
iv
model precipitation data are supplied
The major components of the hydrologic cycle are
modeled including interception, surface detention,
overland inflow, groundwater, evapo-transpiration and
routing of channel flows, temperature, TDS, DO,
carbonaceous BOD coliforms, algae, zooplanktons,
nitrite, nitrate, ammonia, phosphate and conservative
substances can be simulated
Hydrocomp model Long-term meteorological and wastewater Time dependant
characterization data is used to simulate stream flows (Dynamic)
and stream water quality
Stormwater Runoff is modeled from overland flow, through surface Time Dependent
Management model channels, and through sewer network Both combined
(SWMM) and separate sewers can be modeled.
This model also enables to simulate water quality
effects to stormwater or combined sewer discharges.
This model simulates runoff resulting from individual
rainfall events.
Battelle Reservoir Water body is divided into segments along the Two Dimensional multi-
model direction of the flow and each segment is divided into segment model
number of horizontal layers. The model is found to
generate excellent simulation of temperature and good
prediction of water quality parameters.
The model simulates temperature, DO, total and
benthic BOD, phytoplankton, zooplankton, organic and
inorganic nitrogen, phosphorous, coliform bacteria,
toxic substances and hydrodynamic conditions.
TIDEP (Turbulent Horizontal temperature homogeneity Coefficient of Steady state model
diffusion vertical turbulent diffusion constant for charge of area
temperature model with depth negligible coefficient of thermal exchange
reservoirs) constant
Data required wind speed, air temperature, air
humidity, net incoming radiation, surface water
temperature, heat exchange coefficients and vertical
turbulent diffusion coefficients.
BIOLAKE Model estimates potential fish harvest from a take Steady state model
Estuary models/ It is simulates tides, currents, and discharge in shallow, Dynamic model
estuarial Dynamic vertically mixed estuaries excited by ocean tides,
model hydrologic influx, and wind action
Tides, currents in estuary are simulated
Dynamic Water It simulates the mass transport of either conservative or Dynamic model
Quality Model non-conservative quality constituents utilizing
information derived from the hydrodynamic model
Bay-Delta model is the programme generally used.
Up to 10 independent quality parameters of either
conservative or non-conservative type plus the BOD-
DO coupled relationship can be handled
v
HEC -2 To compute water surface profiles for stead7y,
gradually: varying flow in both prismatic & non-
prismatic channels
SMS Lake circulation, salt water intrusion, surface water Surface water Modeling
profile simulation model system Hydrodynamic
model
RMA2 To compute flow velocities and water surface Hydrodynamic analysis
elevations model
RMA4 Solves advective-diffusion equations to model up to six Constituent transport
non-interacting constituents model
SED2D-WES Model simulates transport of sediment Sediment transport
model
HIVEL2D Model supports subcritical and supercritical flow A 2-dimensional
analysis hydrodynamic model
MIKE-II, DHI Model supports, simulations of flows, water quality, Professional Engineering
and sediment transport in estuaries, rives, irrigation software package
systems, channels & other water bodies
Table 5: Choice of Models for Impact Modeling: Biological Environment*
Name Relevance Applications Remarks
Flora
Sample Density and Average number of The quadrant sampling technique is
plot relative density individuals species per unit applicable in all types of plant
methods area communities and for the study of
submerged, sessile (attached at the
Density and
base) or sedentary plants
relative dominance Relative degree to which a
species predominates a
community by its sheer
numbers, size bulk or biomass
Frequency and Plant dispersion over an area Commonly accepted plot size:
relative frequency or within a community 0.1 m2- mosses, lichens & other mat-
importance value like plants
Average of relative density, 0.1 m2- herbaceous vegetation
relative dominance and including grasses
relative frequency
10.20 m2 – for shrubs and saplings up
to 3m tall, and
100 m2 – for tree communities
Transects Cover Ratio of total amount of line This methods allows for rapid
& line intercepted by each species assessment of vegetation transition
intercepts and total length of the line zones, and requires minimum time or
methods intercept given its cover equipment of establish
Relative It is the ratio of total Two or more vegetation strata can be
vi
Name Relevance Applications Remarks
dominance individuals of a species and sampled simultaneously
total individuals of all species
Plot-less Mean point plant Mean point – plant distance Vegetation measurements are
sampling Mean area per plant determined from points rather than
methods being determined in an area with
Mean area per
boundaries
plant
Density and Method is used in grass-land and open
relative density shrub and tree communities
Dominance and It allows more rapid and extensive
relative dominance sampling than the plot method
Importance value Point- quarter method is commonly
used in woods and forests.
Fauna
Species Animal species list List of animal communities Animal species lists present common
list observed directly and scientific names of the species
methods involved so that the faunal resources of
the area are catalogued
Direct Animal species List of animals communities This method involves collection, study
Contact list observed directly and release of animals
Methods
Count Drive counts Observation of animals Count indices provide estimates of
indices by driving them past trained animal populations and are obtained
methods observers from signs, calls or trailside counts or
Temporal counts
(Roadside roadside counts
and aerial
count
methods)
Call counts Count of all animals passing a These estimates, through they do not
fixed point during some stated provide absolute population numbers,
interval of time Provide an index of the various species
in an area
Such indices allow comparisons
through the seasons or between sites or
habitats
Removal Population size Number of species captured Removal methods are used to obtain
methods population estimates of small
mammals, such as, rodents through
baited snap traps
Market Population size Number of species originally It involves capturing a portion of the
capture estimate marked (T) population and at some later date
methods (M) Number of marked animals sampling the ratio of marked to total
recaptured (t) and total animals caught in the population
number of animals captured
during census (n)
N = nT/t
vii
Table 6: Choice of Models for Impact Predictions: Socio-economic Environment*
Relevance
Name Application Remarks
Extrapolati A prediction is made that is consistent with past and

ve Methods present socio-economic data, e.g. a prediction based
on the linear extrapolation of current trends
Intuitive Delphi technique is used to determine environmental Conjecture Brainstorming Heuristic
Forecasting priorities and also to make intuitive predictions programming Delphi consensus
(Delphi through the process of achieving group consensus
techniques)
Trend Predictions may be obtained by extrapolating present Trend breakthrough precursor
extrapolatio trends Not an accurate method of making socio- events correlation and regression
n and economic forecasts, because a time series cannot be
correlation interpreted or extrapolated very far into the future
with out some knowledge of the underlying physical,
biological, and social factors
Metaphors The experience gained else where is used to predict Growth historical simulation
and the socio-economic impacts commonsense forecasts
analogies
Scenarios Scenarios are common-sense forecasts of data. Each Common-sense
scenario is logically constructed on model of a
potential future for which the degrees of
“confidence” as to progression and outcome remain
undefined
Dynamic Model predicts net economic gain to the society after
modeling considering all inputs required for conversion of raw
(Input- Out materials along with cost of finished product
model)
Normative Desired socio-economic goals are specified and an Morphological analysis technology
Methods attempt is made to project the social environment scanning contextual mapping
backward in time to the present to examine whether - functional array
existing or planned resources and environmental
- graphic method
programmes are adequate to meet the goals
Mission networks and functional
arrays decision trees & relevance
trees matrix methods scenarios
* NOTE: (i) If a project proponent prefer to use any model other than listed, can do so, with prior
concurrence of concerned appraisal committee. (ii) Project-specific proposed prediction tools need to be
identified by the project proponent and shall be incorporated in the draft ToR to be submitted to the
Authority for the consideration and approval by the concerned EAC/SEAC.
viii
ANNEXURE XIV
Form through which the State Governments/Administration of
the Union Territories Submit Nominations for SEIAA and SEAC
for the Consideration and Notification by the
Central Government
1 Name (in block letters)
2 Address for communication
3 Age & Date of Birth

(Shall be less than 67 years for the members
and 72 years for the Chairman)
4 Area of Expertise (As per
Appendix VI)
Professional Qualifications Qualification(s) University Year of Percentage of
(As per Appendix VI) passing marks
6 Work experience Position Years of association Nature of work. If

From to Period in required, attach
(High light relevant experience years separate sheets
as per Appendix VI)
Serving Central / State Government Office? Yes/No

Engaged in industry or their associations? Yes/No
Present position and nature of Associated with environmental activism? Yes/No
7
job
If no is the answer for above three, please
specify the present position and name of the
organization
Whether experienced in the Yes/No.
8 process of prior environmental If yes, please specify the experience in a separate sheet (Please restrict to
clearance? 500 words)
Yes/ No
Whether any out-standing
9 If yes, please provide details in a separate sheet (Please restrict to 500
expertise has been acquired?
words).
10 Any other relevant information? May like to attach separate sheets (Research projects, consultancy projects,
publications, memberships in associations, trainings undergone,
international exposure cum experience etc.)
The Government of……………………is pleased to forward the Nomination of Dr./Sh.

…………………...…. for the position of Chairperson / Member / Secretary of the SEIAA / SEAC / EAC
to the Ministry of Environment & Forests, the Government of India for the Notification.
(Authorized Signature with Seal)

ANNEXURE XV
Composition of EAC/SEAC
Composition of the EAC/SEAC
The Members of the EAC shall be Experts with the requisite expertise and experience in the
following fields /disciplines. In the event that persons fulfilling the criteria of “Experts” are not
available, Professionals in the same field with sufficient experience may be considered:
̇ Environment Quality Experts: Experts in measurement/monitoring, analysis and

interpretation of data in relation to environmental quality
̇ Sectoral Experts in Project Management: Experts in Project Management or Management of
Process/Operations/Facilities in the relevant sectors.
̇ Environmental Impact Assessment Process Experts: Experts in conducting and carrying out
Environmental Impact Assessments (EIAs) and preparation of Environmental Management
Plans (EMPs) and other Management plans and who have wide expertise and knowledge of
predictive techniques and tools used in the EIA process
̇ Risk Assessment Experts
̇ Life Science Experts in floral and faunal management
̇ Forestry and Wildlife Experts
̇ Environmental Economics Expert with experience in project appraisal
i
___________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE XVI
Suggested practices to minimize environmental impacts of landfills:
 Biogas produced by decomposing organic waste can be used in electricity generation, to

prevent release of potent greenhouse gases into the atmosphere
 Waste is covered at the end of each day, minimising the escape of litter and odour into
the environment
 Water is sprayed to suppress dust
 Thick clay layers and liners are placed in each cell to prevent leachate from reaching
underground water systems
 Waste is compacted to allow for a maximum lifespan of landfill
Incineration Technology
Key criterion for incineration technology:

 The technology should be based on the mass burning principle. Furthermore, the
supplier must have numerous reference plants in successful operation for a number of
years.
 The furnace must be designed for stable and continuous operation and complete
burnout of the waste and flue gases (CO<50 mg/Nm3, TOC<10 mg/Nm3).
 The flue gases from the furnace must be cooled to 200°C or lower before flue gas
treatment.
 The flue gas cleaning equipment must be at least a two-field ESP (basic emission
control, dust<30 mg/Nm3).
 A controlled landfill must be available for residue disposal. Full leachate control
must be exercised at the landfill.
 Municipal solid waste incineration plants should be in land-use zones dedicated to
medium or heavy industry.
 Stack height should not be less than 30 meters
 Stack height requirement based on sulfur dioxide emissions by using the equation –
stack height =14 (Q) 0.3 [where, Q is the emission rate of SO2 in kg/hr]
 By using simple Gaussian plume model to maintain ambient air quality requirements
for all concerned parameters in the receiving environment
Good combustion practices:

 To control emissions by ensuring that the temperature in the combustion chamber and the
time MSW remains in the combustion chamber are kept at optimal levels.
 Newer incinerators are equipped with computer control systems to maintain a high degree
of consistency in plant operations
 Air pollution control equipment must also be carefully maintained to prevent the release
of contaminants.
Incinerator Ash:
Risks:
MSW incineration generates ash, representing about 10% by volume and 25-35% by weight
of the waste incinerated. Incinerator ash can contain concentrations of heavy metals such as
lead, cadmium, mercury, arsenic, copper, and zinc, which originate from plastics, colored
printing inks, batteries, certain rubber products, and hazardous waste from households and
small industrial generators. Organic compounds such as dioxins and furans have also been
detected in incinerator ash.
The principal environmental concern of the public regarding incinerator ash is that when ash
is disposed of in a landfill, the metals and organic compounds can leach (i.e., dissolve and
move from the ash through liquids in the landfill) and migrate into ground water or nearby
surface water. In addition to possibly contaminating water supplies, incinerator ash could also
affect human health through direct inhalation or ingestion of airborne or settled ash.
Techniques to cope with incinerator ash:
 Incinerator ash is usually disposed of in an MSW landfill (ideally in a special section)

or an ash-only landfill known as an ash monofill. Ash monofills are specially
designed to reduce the ability of heavy metals to migrate from the ash into the
environment.
 Monofills can be co-located with MSW incinerators or existing landfills to reduce
transportation distances and siting difficulties
 Ash can be stabilized and solidified by encasing in concrete prior to disposal, thereby
significantly reducing the potential for the contaminant to migrate.
Sources:
“Decision maker’s guide to municipal solid waste incineration” The World Bank,
Washington D.C.
http://web.mit.edu/urbanupgrading/urbanenvironment/resources/references/pdfs/DecisionMa
kers.pdf
“Landfills” Holroyd City

http://www.holroyd.nsw.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0003/20748/LANDFILLS.pdf
United Nations Environment Programme , “Sound Practices Incineration”

http://www.unep.or.jp/ietc/ESTdir/Pub/MSW/sp/SP5/SP5_4.asp
REFERENCES
Documents
̇ Ministry of Environment and Forest, GoI - “Environment Impact Assessment Notification”

S.O.1533 dated 14th September, 2006.
̇ Ministry of Environment and Forest, GoI – “Environment Impact Assessment Notification

2006 – Amendment S.O. 195 (E)” consideration dated 1st December, 2009.
̇ Ministry of Environment and Forest, GoI – Charter on Corporate Responsibility for

Environment Protection Action Points for 17 Categories of Industries, CPCB, March 2003.
̇ Ministry of Environment and Forest, GoI – “Municipal Solid Wastes (Management and
Handling) Rules, 2000”.
̇ Larry W. Canter, “Environmental Impact Assessment”, Second Edition, McGraw Hill,

University of Oklahoma, 1997.
̇ International Association for Impact Assessment – “Principles of Environmental Impact

Assessment Best Practice”, Institute of Environmental Assessment, UK.
̇ Central Pollution Control Board, Assessment of Status of Municipal Solid Waste

Management in Metro Cities and State Capitals, Control of Urban Pollution Series:
CUPS/65/2006-07.
̇ Central pollution Control Board, Status of Solid Waste Generation, Collection, Treatment
and Disposal in Class –II Towns, Control of Urban Pollution Series: CUPS/50/1999-2000.
̇ Central Pollution Control Board, Health Status of Conservancy Staff and Other Community
Associated with Municipal Solid Wastes Management in Kolkata and Chennai, Control of
Urban Pollution Series: CUPS/62/2005-06.
̇ Central Pollution Control Board, Management of Municipal Solid Waste, Published:

Member Secretary, CPCB.
̇ CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban Development, GoI, Manual on Municipal Solid Waste

Management, February 1998.
̇ CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban Development, GoI, Report of the Technology Advisory Group
on Solid Waste Management, May 2005.
̇ The World Bank, Improving Management of Municipal Solid Waste in India, Overview and
Challenges. Published: Environment and Social Development Unit, South Asia Region. The
World Bank (India Country Office), May 2006.
̇ International Finance Corporation, World Bank Group, Environmental, Health and Safety
Guidelines for Waste Management Facilities, 10th December, 2007.
i
̇ Foundation for Greentech Environmental Systems, Risk Factors associated with Solid
Waste Management – Technology Options in the Indian Context, Asit Nema, 2005-06.
̇ Food and Agricultural Organization, On farm composting methods, compiled by R.V. Misra
and R.N.Roy FAO, Rome.
̇ Alberta Agriculture, Food and Rural Development, Manure Composting Manual, January
2005.
Websites
̇ http://cpheeo.nic.in/
̇ http://envfor.nic.in/divisions/iass/eia.htm
̇ http://www.cpcb.nic.in/
̇ http://www.epa.gov/
̇ http://www.calrecycle.ca.gov
̇ http://www.fao.org
̇ http://www.iaia.org
̇ http://www.benefits-of-recycling.com
ii
IL&FS Ecosmart Limited
Flat # 408, Saptagiri Towers
Begumpet
Hyderabad – 500 016
Ph: + 91 40 40163016
Fax: + 91 40 40032220
For any queries or technical inputs kindly mail:
[email protected]
[email protected]

TGM - Comman Municipal Sold Waste Management - 160910 - NK PDF

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

TGM - Comman Municipal Sold Waste Management - 160910 - NK PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TGM - Comman Municipal Sold Waste Management - 160910 - NK PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FOR

COMMON MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTE

Core Project Coordination Team Mr. Mahesh Babu

Expert Core & Peer Committee

1. INTRODUCTION TO THE TECHNICAL EIA GUIDANCE MANUALS PROJECT 1-1

Technical EIA Guidance Manual for CMSWMF September 2010

3.4.1 Major concerns .................................................................................................. 3-41

Technical EIA Guidance Manual for CMSWMF September 2010

Table 3-4: Case Study – Pyrolysis of Indian MSW .......................................................................... 3-29

Table 3-5: Comparative Analysis of the Available Energy Technologies........................................ 3-31

Table 3-7: Inputs and Outputs of Various MSW Technologies........................................................ 3-40

Table 3-9: Summary of Key Parameters from Action Plans............................................................. 3-48

Table 4-2: Matrix of Impacts ............................................................................................................ 4-12

Table 4-5: Typical Mitigation Measures........................................................................................... 4-36

Table 4-6: Structure of EIA Report................................................................................................... 4-39

Table 5-2: Organization-specific Functions........................................................................................ 5-2

Technical EIA Guidance Manual for CMSWMF September 2010

Figure 2-2: Types of Impacts .............................................................................................................. 2-5

Figure 2-3: Cumulative Impact ........................................................................................................... 2-7

Figure 3-1: Type and Composition of MSW ...................................................................................... 3-6

Figure 3-2: Technological Options for MSW Management ............................................................. 3-12

Figure 3-3: Schematic Diagram of Bioreactor Landfill .................................................................... 3-16

Figure 3-4: Schematic of Composting Process ................................................................................. 3-19

Figure 3-5: Steps in Composting ...................................................................................................... 3-22

Figure 3-6: Composting Procedure ................................................................................................... 3-23

Figure 3-7: Cross Section of a Mass Burn Incineration Plant........................................................... 3-28

Figure 3-8: CDM Project cycle......................................................................................................... 3-47

Figure 4-3: Approach for EIA Study ................................................................................................ 4-22

Figure 4-4: Risk Assessment – Conceptual Framework ................................................................... 4-31

Figure 4-5: Comprehensive Risk Assessment - At a Glance ............................................................ 4-32

Figure 4-6: Elements of Mitigation................................................................................................... 4-34

Technical EIA Guidance Manual for CMSWMF September 2010

Definitions – MSW (Management and Handling) Rules 2000

Waste Generation and Composition

Schedules from MSW (Management and Handling) Rules 2000

A Compilation of Legal Instruments

General Standards for Discharge of Environmental Pollutants

Fertilizer Control Order (FCO) Standards for Compost Quality

Critically Polluted Industrial Areas and Clusters/Potential Impact Zones

Form 1 (Application Form for Obtaining EIA Clearance)

Pre-feasibility Report: Points for Coverage of EIA Studies

Types of Monitoring and Network Design Considerations

Guidance for Assessment of Baseline Components and Attributes

Sources of Secondary Data

Technical EIA Guidance Manual for CMSWMF September 2010

Impact Prediction Tools

Best Practices available and reference

AAQ Ambient Air Quality

Technical EIA Guidance Manual for CMSWMF vi September 2010

EPZ Export Processing Zones

Technical EIA Guidance Manual for CMSWMF September 2010

TEQM Total Environmental Quality Movement

Technical EIA Guidance Manual for CMSWMF September 2010

The Ministry of Environment & Forests(MOEF) introduced the Environmental Impact

Although the process of obtaining environmental clearance consisting of screerung,

The Technical Guidance Manual of "Common Municipal solid waste Management

To keep pace with changing technologiesand needs of sustainable developmenf the

I congratulatethe entire team of IL&FS EcosmartLtd., expertsfrom the sectorwho were